ML20094N711
| ML20094N711 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Limerick  |
| Issue date: | 06/08/1984 |
| From: | PECO ENERGY CO., (FORMERLY PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC |
| To: | |
| Shared Package | |
| ML20094N707 | List: |
| References | |
| PROC-840608-01, NUDOCS 8408160360 | |
| Download: ML20094N711 (450) | |
Text
{{#Wiki_filter:O t 37400'OI00 Pcge 1 of 4 Revision 5 6 06/08/84
/
k .)-- EMERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE INDEX PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST NUMBER NO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEW EP-101 1 Classification of Emergencies 06/08/64 EP-102 3 Unusual Event Response 06/08/84 EP-103 3 Alert Response 06/08/84 EP-104 3 Site Emergency Response 06/08/84 i l EP-105 2 General Emergency Response 04/02/84_ EP-106 1 Written Summary Notification 06/08/84 EP-110 2 Personnel Assembly and ) Accountability 06/08/84 EP-120 1 Site Emergency Coordinator 06/08/84 EP-201 1 Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation 06/08/84 EP-202 1 Operations Support Center (OSC) Activation 06/08/84 EP-203 1 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation 06/08/84 EP-208 2 Security Team Activation 06/08/84 EP-210 1 Dose Assessment Team 06/08/84 EP-220 CANCELLED EP-221 1 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, . and Respiratory Protection Group 06/08/84 EP-222 1 Field Survey Group 06/08/84 EP-230 2 Chemistry Sampling and 1 Analysis Team Activation 06/08/84 ; EP-231 2 Operation of Post-Accident Sampling Systems 1 (PASS) 06/08/84 ' EP-232 0 Obtaining Drywell/ Suppression Pool G ll Samples from Co I Gas Sampling an System __L2427/83 o COM e nu na e s...- - 8408160360 840709 PDR ADDCK 05000352 F pyg I 1 I
l i s Page 2 of 4 Revision 5 06/08/84 j'Q ,
\j -~ '
EMERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE INDEX PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST NUMBER NO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEW EP-233 2 Retrieving and Changing . Sample Filters and Cartridges from the Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies 06/08/84 EP-234 2 Obtaining Containment Gas Samples from the Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies 06/08/84 EP-235 2 Obtaining Reactor Water Samples from Sample Sinks Following Accident Conditions 06/08/84 EP-236 1 Obtaining Cooling Tower Blowdown Line Water Samples Following Radioactive Liquid Release after Accident Conditions 06/08/84 EP-237 2 Obtaining the Iodine / s Particulate and/or Gas Samples from the North Vent Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) 06/08/84 EP-238 2 Obtaining Liquid Radwaste Samples from Radwaste Sample Sink Following Accident Conditions 06/08/84 EP-240 2 Obtaining Off-Gas - Samples from the Air Ejector / Holdup Pipe Discharge Sample Station 06/08/84 EP-241 2 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples 06/08/84 EP-242 2 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges 06/08/84 EP-243 2 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 06/08/84 EP-244 0 Offsite Analysis of O High Activity Samples 06/08/84
. P;go 3 of 4 Revision 5
. 06/08/84 EMERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE INDEX
' PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST NUMBER NO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEW EP-250 1 Personnel Safety Team Activation 06/08/84 EP-251 1 Plant Survey Group 06/08/84 EP-252 1 Search and Rescue /First Aid 06/08/84 EP-254 1 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group 06/08/84 EP-255 1 Vehicle Decontamination 06/08/84 EP-260 1 Fire and Damage Team Activation 06/08/84 EP-261 1 Damage Repair Group 06/08/84 EP-272 1 Philadelphia Electric Company Officials 06/08/84 EP-273 1 Limerick Station Supervision Call List 06/08/84 EP-275 CANCELLED EP-276 1 Fire and Damage Team Phone List 06/08/84 EP-277 1 Personnel Safety Team Phone List 06/08/84 EP-278 0 Security Team Phone List 12/27/83 EF-279 1 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Group Phone List 06/08/84 EP-280 1 Technical Support Center Phone List 06/08/84 EP-282 1 Government and Emergency Management Agencies 06/08/84 EP-284 1 Company Consultants and Contractors 06/08/84 EP-287 1 Nearby Public and Industrial Users of Downstream Water 06/08/84 EP-291 1 Staffing Augmentation O'6/08/84 EP-292 1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Phone List 06/08/84 EP-294 1 Dose Assessment Team Phone List 06/08/84
, l J
-m -. , . . . _ _ . .- -- _- -__ - . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- n.
. .Pcge 4 of 4 -
- Revision 5 J'.. -
06/08/84
. : /*
( EMERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE'INDEX PROCEDURE REV. DATE SIGNED DATE OF LAST :
~ NUMBER- NO. TITLE BY SUPER. PERIODIC REVIEW i 4 EP-301 0 Operating the Evacuation .-
Alarm and River ~ Warning . System 11/11/83 , ! EP-303 2 Local Evacuation 04/02/84 f 4 EP-304 1 Partial Plant Evacuation 06/08/84
, EP-305 1 Site Evacuation 06/08/84-i EP-306 0 Evacuation of the i Information Center 12/27/83 i _EP-307 1 Reception and Orientation i ! of Support Personnel 06/08/84 ' } EP-312 0 Radioactive Liquid 1- Release 11/30/83
[ EP-313 1 Distribution of Thyroid ! Blocking Tablets 06/08/84 i EF 316 0 Cumulative Population
- . Dose Calculations for
- ! b.. W Airborne Releases -
Manual Method 12/23/83 - EP-317 0 Determination of ' Protective Action l Recommendations . 12/27/03 .i l EP-318 0 Liquid Release Dose i Calculations Method for
) Drinking Water 11/30/83 ! EP-319 0 Fish Ingestion Pathway J Dose calculation 11/30/83 '
i EP-325 0 Use of Containment i Radiation Monitors to I Estimate Release Source
} Term 12/29/83 ) EP-330 1 Emergency Response i Facility Habitability 06/08/84 j EP-401 1 Entry for Emergency-j Repair and Operations 06/08/84 ; EP-410 1 Recovery Phase
{ Implementation 06/08/84 j EP-500 1 Review and Revision of Emergency Plan 06/08/84 i i I () 1 1
1 3 3 i 3840090110 EP-101 Rev. 1 l Page 1 of 20 VAW V G/mla
'k PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-101 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for classifying an event or condition into one of four emergency classifications as described in the Emergency Plan.
Additionally this procedure details the method to change from j one emergency action level to another and to enter the recovery phase, if applicable. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES (r 2.1 Shift Supervision acting as Interim Emergency Director is responsible to: 2.1.1 Classify the event according to this procedure. 2.1.2 Periodically re-evaluate the event for a change in classification. ImAefeEtI k l 2.1.3 e$c 1 n if the si :uait g e s . jwipf{ts. ,,...-.i:
~-
2.2 The Station Superintpndent'; aching as Emergency Director has the same'res # sibilities as in 2.1.
\'j i, ' U-r t 3.0 APPENDICES
" W"ll'y.
C W"UR g,g g , ,_ ,,1 3.1 EP-101-1 Hazards to Station Operation 3.2 EP-101-2 Environmental I 3.3 EP-101-3 Loss of Power () 3.4 EP-101-4 Personnel Injury 3.5 EP-101-5 Fire 1 l
r 1
. . 1 O' EP-101 Rev. 1
- l Page 2 of 20 VAW/ MPG /r.la
. 3.6 EP-101-6 Radioactive Release 3.7 EP-101-7 Evacuation of Control Room 3.8 EP-101-8 Damage of Fuel
,- 3.9 EP-101-9 Instrument Failure 3.10 EP-101-10 Scram Failure 3.11 EP-101-ll Boundary Degradat' ion /LOCA 3.12 EP-101-12 Unusual Shutdown 3.13 EP-101-13 Loss of Hot or Cold Shutdown Capacity l 3.14 EP-101-14 Security 4.0 PREPIOUISITES .
.. None
%d S 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT None 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented whenever Shift Supervision detects conditions which meet the Emergency Action Levels in Appendix EP-101, Classification Table.
IMPLEMENTATION OF THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE EMERGENCY PLAN.
_n._ _ _ e ;
, l EP-101 Rev. 1
- Page 3 of 20
/R VAW/ MPG /mla
/ \
, 8. 0 PRECAUTIONS THE JUDGEMENT OF THE (INTERIM) EMERGENCY DIRECTOR IS VITAL IN PROPER CONTROL OF AN EMERGENCY AND TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER GUIDANCE IN THIS EMERGENCY PLAN PROCEDURE.
9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS i 9.1.1 Shifc Supervision or Emergency Director 1 shall: l 9.1.1.1 Select categories related to station events or conditions. Pace Number Hazards to Station Operation 6
~
Environmental 7 l EC Loss of Power 8 Personnel Injury 9 Fire 10 Radioactive Release 11 ; Evacuation of Control Room 12
- Damage of Fuel 13 Instrument Failure 14 l l
Scram Failure 15 Boundary Degradation /LOCA 16 Unusual Shutdown _ 18 1 Loss of Hot or Cold Shutdown 19 l Capacity l l l Security 20
) 9.1.1.2 Beginning at the indicated page in Appendix EP-101, review the Emergency Action Levels for categories selected.
-- ~ _ _a -
=-m . _ - _ . . _ _
e . . l EP-101 Rev. 1 g. Page 4 of 20 () VAW/ MPG /mla
- . 9.1.1.3 If the most severe events or conditions are classified as an Unusual Event, im EP-102, " Unusual Event Response." plement 9.1.1.4 'If the most severe events or conditions are classified as an Alert, i'mplement EP-103,
,- " Alert Immediate Response."
9.1.1.5 If the most severe events or conditions are classified as a Site Emergency, implement EP-104, " Site Emergency Response."
~
9.1.1.6 If the most severe events or conditions are classified as a General Emergency, implement EP-105, " General Emergency Response." l 9.2 ACTIONS 9.2.1 If event is classified as Alert, Site
. Emergency, or General Emergency, Shift Supervision or Emergency Director shall 9.2.1.1 Periodically evaluate the event 4 {, ;.'
classification as listed on attached Appendix EP-101. Based upon results of corrective action taken to recover from the emergency situation, escalation or de-escalation of the emergency classification will be decided upon by the (Interim) Emergency Director. (It is preferable, but not mandatory, to obtain concurrance from the Site Emergency Coordinator and Corporate
- Headquarters prior to classification reduction) . The NRC and appropriate of f-site authorities shall be informed of the
. decision to move from one emergency class to the next. As appropriate, agencies or personnel listed in checkoff lists of EPs 102, 103, 104, and 105 shall be informed.
Notified within 15 minutes once the i emergency level is declared. 9.2.1.2 Have a written summary sent to the NRC within eight hours of closeout or reductin of the emergency clasification in accordance with EP-106, Written Summary Notification. h))
\
- - . . --n =a- .s .
.nn. . ,.:.. _ ..: . = = - -
l EP-101 Rev. 1 Page 5 of 20 VAW/ MPG /It.la
,. 9.2.2 When the emergency has been controlled and the power plant and auxiliaries have been placed in a safe shutdown condition, only then will a decision be made as to whether a recovery phase is justified. To enter the recovery phase af ter the bmergency or r accident situation is considered no longer in effect, the concurrence of the Site Emergency Coordinator, Emergency Director, the Emergency Support Officer at Corporate Headquarters, and Federal and State l Government Liaison is required per EP-410.
The recovery phase is a departure from an emergency situation. The Site Emergency Coordinator and Emergency Director evaluate plant operating conditions as well as the in-plant and out-of-plant radiological conditions in this decision. Notifications to the various individuals and agencies that the recovery phase has been implemented is the responsibility of the Site Emergency Coord ina tor .
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG 0654 Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation Rev. 1 of R#diological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants
- 10.3 EP-102 Unusual Event Response 10.4 EP-103 Alert Response 10.5 EP-104 Site Emergency Response )
10.6 EP-105 General Emergency Response l l 10.7 EP-410 Recovery Phase Implementation l l
)
l l
I l
...=. -~ -
- - - . . - . - _-- ===.......__
2 l EP-101, Rev. 1 Appendix EP-101-1 Page 6 of 2C VAW/!'PG/r.ic HAZARDS TO STATION OPERATION UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT h"IEN BOTH UNITS, ARE IN COLD SHUTDOW!:
; 1. Aircraft crash in or unusual 1. Aircraf t crash or missile impact aircraft activity over the on the Reactor Enclosure, Contre.
site. Enclosure, Turbine Enclosure, Diesel Generator Enclosure or
- 2. Train derailment within the Spray Pond Pump House.
site boundary.
- 2. Known explosion danage affecting
- 3. Explosion within or near the plant operation.
site boundary.
- 3. Toxic, flammable gases or chlorir.
- 4. Toxic or flammable gas release detected in the Control Room within or near the site as indicated by 'High boundary. Toxic Chemical Concentration' Alarm or ' Control Room Chlorine Isolation Initiated' Alarm on 00C881.
h) / RJ Q SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY WHEN EITHER UNIT IS NOT IN COLD ' SHUTDOWN
- 1. Aircraft crash or missile impact on the Reactor Enclosure, Control Enclosure, Turbine Enclosure, Diesel Generator Enclosure or Spray Pond Pump House.
- 2. Known explosion damage af fecting plant operation.
- 3. Toxic, flammable gases or .
chlorine detected in the Control Room as indicated by *
'High Toxic Chemical Concentration'
, Alarm or ' Control Room Chlorine Isolation Initiated' Alarm on h 00C881.
r-
--.n...--. - . , - , . n -- -
l EP-101, Rev. 1 Appendix EP-lCl-: Page 7 ef 20 VAW/ MPG /tir ENVIRONMENTAL UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. An actual earthquake detected 1. An actual earthquake detected by the Seismic Monitoring by the Seismi,c Monitoring l System (00C693) at or below System (00C693) beyond the operating basis earthquake operating basis earthquake
(.0759). (.0759).
- 2. Tornado strikes the Reactor
- 2. A tornado is observed within or Enclosure, Turbine Enclosure, near site boundary. Spray Pond Pump House, Control Enclosure or Diesel Generator
- 3. A hurricane is expected to Enclosure.
be in the vicinity of the site. 3. Sustained high winds greater than 70 mph as indicated on OBC 699.
'> (;
SITE EMERGENCE GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Sustained high winds greater 1. Earthquake beyond the safe than 90 mph as indicated on shutdown earthquake ( .159 )
OBC 699 if either unit is not which causes massive damage in Cold Shutdown. leading to other General - Emergencies.
- 2. An actual earthquake detected by the Seismic Monitoring System (00C693) beyond the l safe shutdown earthquake (.159) if either unit is not in Cold Shutdown.
O O (.,_\ J
r-
- . .._ a - _ _ _ .
l EP-101, Rev. 1 Appendix EP-101-2 Page 8 of 20 VAW/ MPG /r.it LOSS OF POWER UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Loss of all off-site power or N/A loss of all on-site AC power ,
,. for greater than 60 seconds.
SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Loss of all on-site AC power N/A f.,. and loss of off-site power Q:;
- 2. Loss of all safety-related .
DC power as indicated by: a) Loss of all Control Room annunciators. O e e e n . .x LJ :- -
... .. .. _ _ . ,. - - - . . _ = - . . . . _ _ ---_.-.n...:___ ~~
j EP-101, Rev. 1 Appendix EP-101-4 ' e Page 9 of 20 w _, VAW/ MPG /mic PERSONNEL INJURY UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Transportation of contaminated N/A injured individual from site ,
.. to off-site hospital.
W u" SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY N/A N/A 9 a S g se en () -)
r
-- 1 EP-101, Rev. 1 l Appendix EP-101-5 l . Page 10 of 20 l '^; VAW/ MPG /r.lc :
(J
' '- FIRE
.W ALERT UNUSUAL EVENT
- 1. Fires invciving permanent plant 1. Fire which could make an structures within the protected ECCS inop as, indicated by area lasting 10 minutes or more observation.
- after initial attempts to extinguish it.
- SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
;s.
N/A
- 1. Fire which makes an ECCS inop and requires or causes immediate plant shutdown as indicated by observation.
0 9 9 OO
. . EP-101, Rev.
] Appendix EP-101-6 RADIOACTIVE RELEASE Page 11 of 20 VAW/ MPG /mla
% i t\ ALERT
\c UNUSUAL EVENT
- 1. Repor t indicates liquid 1. Radiological effluents release effluent release exceeds greater than 0.5 mR/hr at site technical specification boundary as indicated by an un-controllablesrelease for greater 3.11.1.1 or 3.11.1.2. than 20 minutes with:
?*
- 2. Repor t indicates gaseous a) North stack effluent radiation ef fluent release exceeds monitor exceeds 1.0N2 uCi/cc or technical specification South stack effluent radiation 3.11.2.1 or 3.11.2.2 or b) f 3.11.2.3 monitor exceeds 1.2N2 uCi/cc.
?
SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Radiological effluent release 1. Radiological effluent release greater than 50 mR/hr at site greater than 500 mR/hr at site f boundary as indicated by boundary as indicated by an an uncontrollable release for uncontrollable release for greater than 20 minutes with: greater than 20 minutes with:
a) North stack effluent radiation a) North stack effluent radiation ll monitor exceeds 1.0 uC1/cc. monitor exceeds 10 uC1/ce. :
- 2. Projected whole body dose 2. Projected whole body dose f greater than .1 rem or thyroid greater than 1 Rem or thyroid dose greater than .5 Rem at or dose greater than 5 Rem at or beyond the site boundary over beyond the site boundary over course of the event utilizing course of the event utilizing RMMS procedure calculating RMMS procedure calculating offsite doses. offsite doses.
O OW 4 95 & O
--,-,-_._,,,~p._ y, ~ . _ . . . - . _ , _ _ , , _ _ , . . , ,,,%. , ,..ym__ ww,-.,r-,m.y._,.-.c,,,,.-.w_%.%,c,.,.,%. , , _ . . , ---,,,,,-,,.,rm._.._.w.,,,,-.
7 _ EP-101, Rev. 2
'} Appendix EP-lCl-T Page 12 of 20 VAW/ MPG /nla f ! EVACUATION OF CONTROL ROOM i
f ALERT l UNUSUAL EVENT N/A 1. Evacuation of Control Room anticipattd or required with control established at remote
~
shutdown panel. 1 ( i SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Evacuation of Contol Room- 'N/A and control of shutdown systems not established from remote shutdown panel in 15 minutes.
-I f';
y i Oy j
f
. - .= .--.- .. .. .
l EP-101, Rev.
.. Appendix EP-101-E se- Page 13 of 20 Q- DAMAGE OF FUEL VAU/ MPG /mic ,
l I UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Steam Jet Air Ejector Discharge 1. Steam Jet Air Ejector Discharge radiation monitor exceeds radiation monitor exceeds i
2.1P4 mR/hr. 2.1P5 mR/hr l
- 2. Steam Jet Air Ejector Discharge 2. 1-131 dose equivalent in the radiation monitor has an un- reactor coolant exceeds 300 uCi/g expected increase of 4000 mR/hr from sample and main steam l over 30 minutes. line high-high radiation with l resultant scram. ;
- 3. I-131 dose equivalent in the 3. Spent fuel damage resulting in a reactor coolant exceeds refueling floor area ventilation i 0.2 uCi/g f rom sample exhaust monitor alarm.
analysis.
- 4. Containment Post LOCA Radiation l Monitors greater than 1P2 R/hr.
SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY ___
- 1. Major damage to spent fuel: 1. Containment Post LOCA Radiation a) Observation of major damage i to spent fuel 21 * '
b) Water loss below fuel level in spent fuel pool.
- 2. Containment Post LOCA Radiation Monitors greater than 1P3 R/hr. ;
1 9 9 h Ok.-
r- ,
- - - ~ ~ - .
_~m
- ~_ -. - - _ , . , -
- l EP-101, Rev.
Appendix EP-101-5 l Page 14 of 20 ' VAW/ MPG /mla t( INSTRUMENT FAILURE UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
- 1. Complete loss of all Main N/A Control Room communication .
equipment.
- 2. Significant loss of assessment capability in the Main Control Room as indicated by:
a) Loss of all flow or all radiation monitors for the North, South stacks or radwaste discharge while a release is in progress, s SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY N/A N/A '. 9 0
\s] !
I 1
r -
.,= = = - -- -~ - - --.
u EP-101, Rev. 1 l
. Appendix EP-lCl-lC Page 15 of 20 VAk*/MP 0/r.1:
SCRAM FAILURE UNUSUAI. EVENT ALERT N/A 1. Failure of the Reactor protectier.
. system to automatically initiate and complete a scram and Scram fails to bring Reactor suberitical as indicated by APRM's greater than 44, one minute after scram.
[ ( W ~ . SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
- 1. Transient requiring standby 1. Transient requiring standby liquid control system to liquid control system to initiate with f ailure to initiate with failure to scram, scram and Reactor does not become sub-critical. As indicated by APRM's greater than 4% 10 minutes after scram.
S S (. (^') v C'
r '3 l EP-lCl, Rev. 1 Appendix EP-101-ll Page 16 of 2C BOUNDARY DEGRADATION /LOCA UNUSt> AL EVEN" ALERT
- 1. Failure of a main steam relief 1. Scram with small leak as valve or ADS valve to close indicated by1 following reduction of a) Scram alarm and applicable pressare.
b) Reactor level less than -129" l As indicated by: and a) SRV tailpipe hig.". temperature c) Containment pressure greator alarm or thar.1.68 psig and prt ssure is increasing. b) Acoustic monitor valve 2. Reactor coolant leak ste exceeds position indication or 60 gpm total leakage nsoraged over any 24 hour period as c) Increase in suppression indicated by surveillence pool temperature and test report. d) ' Reactor pressure below 3. High. airborne contamination in the
,. 1130 psig Reactor Enclosure exhaust f3
() /.: a) Reactor Enclosure exhaust high Ks' 2. Reactor coolant leak rate radiation causing Reactor exceeds 30 gpm total Enclosure isolation or leakage average over any ' hour period as indicated b) 1000 fold increase of airborne by surveillance test radiation in a major area of report. the reactor enclosure as determined by health physics. 1 e l
. 1 <Ob
c,; ._ . . _ . _ - _ - - _-m_--.---.. -
- _ _ _ _ _ . ~ _ _...__
EP-101, Rev. 1 l Appendix EP-101-11 lC
'Q Page 17 of 20 VAU/ MPG /itit.
BOUNDARY DEGRADATION /LOCA SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY , 1. Scram with LOCA as 1. Scram with LOCA & no ECCS as indicated by: indicated byt a) Scram alarm and , a) Scram alarm and b) Reactor level less than -129" b) Reactor level less than -129" ads. ads. c) Containment pressure greater c) Failure to bring Reactor levc1 than 10 psig above -129" after 3 minutes n d) Containment pressure greater than 20 psig
- 2. Main steam line break outside 2. Scram with LOCA & Containment containment without isolation Failure as iridicated bys as indicated by a) Scram with Reactor level lesc than-129" gaj, I a) High Main Steam Line Flow N. (140%) gad, b) Reactor Enclosure Exhaust Righ Radiation causing Reactot
. Enclosure Isolation.
b) Migh Steam Tunnel Temp (165 deg F) AD$. c) Main Steam Line Low t Pressure (831 psig) - I 4
e l EP-101, Rev. 1 Appendix EP-101-1 Page 18 of 20
.I UNUSUAL SIIUTDOWN UNUSUAL CVEt:T ALEPT
- 1. Controlled shutdown due to N/A failure to meet limiting .
condition of operation.
- 2. Shutdown other than normal l controlled shutdown and for the purpose of placing the plant in a safer condition.
- 3. Cooldown rate exceeds technical specification limits.
ri, STTE EMERCE!!CY GENERAL EMERCEt1CY {) . N/A . N/A 8 9 a S l I
r
. , , , - -- u, ., . . .w , - w .%, ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ mer. .. . . , . .
e 0 l EP-101, Rev. 1 Appendix EP-101-12 Page 19 of 20 VAW/MPC/ela
/
LOSS Or HOT OR COLD S!!UTDOWN CAPADILITY t. UNUSUAL tytNT AttRT N/A 1. Complete loss of any function needed for plant Cold Shutdown
~
and main condenser unavailable I as indicated by: l a) Loss of RifRSW EI b) Loss of shutdown cooling. O
\.__) ,
Dfit EMED0tnCY CttttpAL_EMtPotNCY
- 1. Complete loss of any function 1) Shutdown occurs but Decay needed to maintain the plant Meat Removal Systema not in flot Shutdown if Hot Shutdown available as indicated by condition is required as indicated by a) Reactor operating and
- a) HPCI and RCIC not available 21 scram occurs gni b) All Reactor vessel relief b) RNR shutdown cooling valves inoperable 21 not available and c) Loss of Suppression Pool c) All CRV's INOP ggd cooling.
d) HPCI and RCIC not available G
- a. .- u a . = - .
. . ~ . - -
_~ - e s* . EP-101, Rev. 1 l Appendix EP-101-13 O Page 20 of 20
\/.: SECURITY VAW/ MPG /mla l UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT
' l. Security threat or attempted 1. Ongoing security compromise entry or attempted sabotage. ,
Event 1 - Sabotage or Bomb Threat Event 2 - Intrusion and Attach Threat Event 7 - Suspected Intrusion Event 8 - Actual Intrusion Event 9 - Suspected Bomb or Sabotage Device Discovered Event 15 - Guard Strike Event 16 - Onsite Hostage Situation I
~l SITE EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
%!# 1. Imminent loss of physical 1. Loss of physical control of i,
control of the plant. the facility... Escalation of Escalriion of Event.8 - Event 8 - Actual Instrusion Actual Intrusion or Event or Event 9 - Suspected Bomb 4 - Suspected Bomb or or Sabotage Device Discovered Sabotage Device-Dis- depending on location and covered depending on size of device and radio-
- location and size of logical consequences.
device and radiological - consequences. 4
- . , ~ ~ _ - _ = _ = - - - - --
3840090120 EP-102, Rev. 3 Page 1 of 8 VAP p G/rgs (q/
\~ k:.
g PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-102 UNUSUAL EVENT RESPONSE 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for site response to an Unusual Event. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 Shif t Supervision shall assume the role of the Interim
. Emergency Director when an Unusual Event occurs, unless Emergency Director is present, and perform the necessary steps in this procedure.
9 2.2 The Station Superintendent may assume the role of the (f7?j Emergency Director and relieve the Interim Emergency W Director, if necessary. 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-102-1 Unusual Event Notification Message EP-102-2 Unusual Event De-Escalation Message 3.2 3.3 EP-102-3 Unusual Event Phone List 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4.1 EP-101, Classification of Emergencies has been completed. e 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 1 l None
.. -a d
s {i'] m P' E h
.o 0 4wD M U h n" w
-- n , ,,-,w--s r,-e
-~
_ . .m ; . . - - - - - - - - _ i -- _T f {. - 2 , l . EP-102, Rev. 3 l Page 2 of E
} VAW/ MPG /rgs O.U' r
.- 6 . O SYMPTOMS None r 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented when an event occurs that is classified as an Unusual Event per procedure EP-101 Classifications of Emergencies.
1 8.0 PRECAUTIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS Q.j 9.1.1 (Interim) Emergency Director shallt l 9.1.1.1 Verify the emergency c'lassification as
- determined in EP-101, Classification of Emergencies "unless determination has just been made.
9.1.l.2 Complete Ap*pendix EP-102-1, Unusual Event - Notification Message, and give it to a , communicator and direct the communicator to complete notification of the appropriate parties in Appendix EP-102-3, Unusual Event Phone List. 9.1.1.3 Direct Shift Supervision to initiate evacuation of affected areas, as necessary. Refer to the following procedures l EP-303 Local Evacuation 9.1.1.4 Contact the Station' Superintendent, if necessary, and the Shift Technical Advisor, f inform them of the situation. I j ! i O@ l
. 1
.)
EP-102, Rev. 3 1 Page 3 of S l VAW/ MPG /rgs 9.1.1.5 For samoles, contact the Shift Chemistry Technician. If necessary, implement EP-230, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation. 9.1.1.6 For in-plant surveys, or' contaminated I injury, contact a Shift HP Technician. If necessary, implement EP-250, Personnel Safety Team Activation. 9.1.1.7 For fire / damage repair, contact the Maintenance Shif t Assistance Foreman. If necessary, to implement EP-260, Fire and Damage Team Activation and/or EP-261, Damage Repair Group. 9.1.1.8 For a liquid release, implement EP-312,
]
Radioactive Liquid Release, if required. 9.1.1.9 For security matters, implement EP-208, Security Team Activation, if required. 9.1.1.10 For airborne releases, contact Shif t Technical Advisor. If necessary, implement
-h 9.2 FOLLOW-UP EP-210, Dose Assessment Team Activation.
l 9.2.1 (Interim) Emergency Director shall: 9.2.1.1 Periodically evaluate the event classification in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, and escalate or de-escalate the classification, as necessary. 9.2.1.2 If classification is de-escalated fill out Appendix EP-102-2, Unusual Event De-Escalation Message and give it to the communicator and direct the conn.unicator to perform notification of the appropriate parties listed in Appendix EP-102-3, Unusual Event Phone List. , 9.2.1.3 Obtain the following information as necessary to formulate further actions:
, A. Sample analysis from Shift chemistry
' Technician or Chemistry sampling and h Analysis Team Leader.
EP-102, R3v. 3 l l Page 4 of E
- VAW/ MPG /rgs I
. B. In-plant surveys or status of contaminated injury from Shift EP Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader.
C. Fire / Damage Repair st'atus from the Maintenance Shif t Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader. D. Airborne releases calculation from Shift Technical Advisor or Dose l Assessment Team Leader. l E. Notification Results from Communicator. 9.2.1.4 Determine which suppor t personnel are necessary for emergency functions and direct the Shift Clerk to contact those personnel. If Shift Clerk is not available, this function shall be
] assigned to an available individual.
. ] 9.2.2 The Communicator Shall:
; 9.2.2.1 Inform (Interim) Emergency Director when 0',-(U" appropriate notifications have been made and submit completed copy of Appendix EP-102-3, Unusual Event Phone List, for (Interim) Emergency Director's Signature.
- 10. REFERENCES -
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG-0654, Criteria For Preparation and Evaluation Rev. 1 of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. 10.3 EP-303 Local Evacuation 10.4 EP-101 Classification of Emergencies 10.5 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Tenz Activation i 10.6 EP-250 Personnel Safety Team Activation Fire and Damage Team Activation l 10.7 EP-260 10.8 EP-261 Damage Repair Group 10.9 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release. 1
. . - . _ . . . _ , . . _ . , _ . . . _ . . ,1
v .. EP-102, R2v. 3 .
- Page 5 of 8
, VAW/ MPG /rgs ! (b9- . APPENDIX EP-102-1 UNUSUAL EVENT NOTIFICATION MESSAGE I I
. l MESSAGE: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. ;
l This is the Limerick Generating Station calling to report an Unusual My name is telephone l Event. , l . Limerick Generating Station is reporting an l l Unusual Event declared at Unit No. . Time and date of l Unusual Event classification are (24 Br Clock Time) (Date) l The basic problem is ,
,i l There (has been) (has not been) an (airborne) (liquid) radioactive
) b: l release from the plant. The plant status is (stable) (improving) l (degrading) (not known) . There is no protective ' action recommended.
l This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. S O (( )IES r
-- -__,-,---,n. . - , - , - - - - - ~ _ . , , , -.-..-n,-
EP-102, Rev. 3 Page 6 of 8 ; VAW/ MPG /rgs k_ l, , ANPENDIX EP-102-2 UNUSUAL-EVENT DE-ESCALATION MESSAGE
. l MESSAGE: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is' not) a drill. l l
This is Limerick Generating Station calling to de-escalate an Unusual Event. Please connect me with the appropriate authority. This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report the termination of an Unusual Event. My name is . ; Time and date are . This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. s 9 9 9 e l
?
\
t':f >\ l l I
)
i
i O ' '; ' j s#U Q-c EP-102, Rev.43 Page 7 og g l e VAM/ mpg /rgs , l APPENDIX EP-102-3 UNUSUAL E_V_ENT Pi_lO_N_E LI_S_T i Time Initiated
- Personnel / Agency To Be Notified Phone Number Time Person Responding i
- a. Emergency Director Home j G. M. Leitch Office Alternate Home J. F. Franz Offi
- b. Load Dispatcher Office
- - - - - = - - - _ _ _ - - - --
- c. Montgomery County Office of Emer. Preparedness and Medical Services
- d. Pennsylvania Emergency Management A en _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- e. Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation Protection Harrisbu PA f.- Manager - Public Information Ronald Har
- g. Director - Emergency Home
- Preparedness Offic l Roberta Kankus i
i ' i _ _ - m _z .
O O . .: 0 t f'"' EP-to2, 'tev . k 3 Page 8 of'8 - VAW/ MPG /rg s l 9 APPENDIX EP-102-3 UNUSUAL EVENT PIIONE LIST g ne Initiated (INITIAL NOPIPICATION) Personnel / Agency To Be Notified i Phone Number 7 Time Person Responding ,
- h. NRC Operations Center
- Be thesda , MD l
I I l
- Person contacting NRC must be
! - Licensed rator l l Agencies to be contacted after the above personriel/ agencies have j f l 1. Berks County Emergency l Management Agency _. __ l j. Chester County Emergency l Services lh Completed By: Time /Date ___ Verified By: (INTERIM) EMERGENCY DIRECTOR
3840090130 ,,_1o3, 3,y, 3
. Page 1 of 15 VA ' F G/rgs
~
- PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION E.IERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE
?
EP-103 ALERT RESPONSE 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for 1 site response to an Alert. ! l
)
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 Shift Supervision shall assume the role of the Interim Emergency Director when an Alert occurs, unless the Emergency Director is present, and per form the necessary steps in this procedure. i 2.2 The Station Superintendent or Alternate shall assume c :.- the role of the Emergency Director, report to the F Technical Support Center or Control Room and relieve the Interim Emergency Director. l 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-103-1 Alert Notification Message - r,1 3.2 EP-103-2 Emergency E , a :
. u. .n -
3.3 EP-103-3 Alert De-Es Nb fic R.%)4 tion y Message l 3.4 EP-103-4 Alert Phone List (I i No fication) 3.5 EP-103-5 Alert Phone List (Escalatio,q.or g pe;.7,'ij escalation) ') j'j f .; g h U 4.0 PREREQUISITES l 4.1 EP-101,ClassificationogEmergencifs,56 feted
, h: y >b1 p 0<1.h h.h;' w y n D t pl g[L:n b I l I y fa i ;
w i i I
~
__n . . .
** EP-103, Rav. 3 Page 2 of 15 ,
. VAW/ MPG /rgs i 7
% , 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT None 6.0 SYMPTCMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented when an event occurs that is classified as an Alert per procedure EP-101 Classification of Emergencies.
8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Planned radiatio 7 exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-103-2,
; Emergency Exposure Guidelines.
4 . 9.0 PROCEDURE j 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 (Interim) Emergency Director shall: - 9.1.1.1 Verify the Emergency Classification as determined in EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, unless determination has just been made. 9.1.1.2 Fill out Appendix EP-103-1 Alert . Notification Message and give it to the j communicator. o O . s l r
- - _ . _ _ . _ _ ~ . . . _ . , . , - , . - - . _ _ . , . _ _ _ . , - _ . - , . . . _ . _ - . . , , _ . - , - . . _ , . _ _ _ _ . . . , . - - . - - . _ _ , - , . . . - - . .
. - _ = _ , - _, , _ _ _ - _ _ _
9 . A EP-103, Rev. 3 p Page 3 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs U Direct the communicator to complete 9.1.1.3
'. notification of the appropriate parties as specified in Appendix EP-103-4, Alert Phone ' List, (Initial Notification) or Appendix EP-103-5, Alert Phone List ($scalation or De-i l escalation). The Communicator shall man the NRC RED telephone on a continuous basis l g
until the NRC disconnects. If the
' communicator is required for urgent plant operations related to the emergency, the f concurrence for securing the phone should be f - obtained from the NRC prior to securing this telephone.
9.1.1.4 Contact the Station Superintendent and the Shift Technical Advisor, inform them of the situation. 9.1.1.5 Direct the Information Center Staff (4256, 495-6767) to implement EP-306, Evacuation of The Information Center. Inform the Staff of the wind direction if there is an airborne release. 9.1.1.6 If there is a radiological release, V implement EP-305, Site Evaluation. 9.1.1.7. If there has not been a radiological release, q A. Evacuate all construction rsonnel by fcontactingBechtelSafety . Direct them to call for a
- a Project Evacuation
- in accordance with Bechtel procedures.
B. $ COff-Hour ontact Yoh Construction and informSecurity them tha t a Total Proje acuation of Bechtel Construction personnel is being l Japlemented. THIS WILL CALL FOR THE ASSEMBLY OF PERSONNEL AT THE UPPER PARKING LOT AND l POST 63. IF IT IS DESIRED THAT THEY LEAVE THE SITE, INFORM BECHTEL COMPAND l POSTS AT THE UPPER PARKING LOT. k O
a p EP-103, Rev. 3
Page 4 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs C. Select the type of accountability desired for personnel in the protected area and implement the required actions below:
_ l. Emergency Assembly Without Accountability l -Make the following announcement "THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. DESIGNATED EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO ASSIGNED ZMERGENCY RESPONSE FACILITIES. ALL OTHER PERSONNEL STAND BY FOR FURTHER ANNOUNCEMENT. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL." l 2. Emergency Assembly With Accountability
- a. Select Unit 1 exit points as follows:
Day Shift - TSC and Administration Building Afternoon Shift - Administration Building "i" Night Shif t - Administration Building
. b. Contact the (Interim) Security Team Leader. Inform him of the selected exit point (s), that emergency assembly with accountability is going to be implemented, and to activate the Security Team (EP-208) and to perform personnel -
accountability in accordance with EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability.
- c. Contact Yoh Construction Security and inform them that personnel leaving Unit 1 will. be reassembling l
at the Personnel Processing Center (PPC).
"THIS (IS) (IS -NOT) A DRILL, THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. DESIGNAT.T EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO ASSIGNED EMERGENCY RESPONSE FACILITIES. ALL OTHER PERSONNEL LEAVE THE PROTECTED AREA (y;;, IMEDIATELY THROUGH THE (name of exit U'+ area or areas) AND REASSEMBLE AT THE
)
s PERSONNEL PROCESSING CENTER. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. "
"" EP-103, Rev. 3 Page 5 of 15 i' VAW/ MPG /rgs
) J
,)
] 9.1.1.8 Direct the Shif t Clerk to activate the 60 minute call list using EP-291, Staffing Augmentation. If Shift Clerk is not available, this function shall be assigned l to any available individual.
- 9.1.1.9 Direct the activation of the Technical Support Center in accordance with EP-201, Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation.
9.1.1.10 If necessary, activate the Emergency Operations Facility in accordance with EP-
~
203, Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activa tion.
] 9.1.1.11 Assign an Operations Support Center Coordinator (PO) to direct available personnel to report to the Operations l Support Center on 269' Elev. Turbine Bldg.
- and to activate it in hecordance with EP-202, Operations Suppor t Center (OSC) l Activation. 9.1.1.12 For samoles, direct the Shif t Chemistry
- "(j Technician or Chemistyy Sampling and Analysis Team Leader to implement EP-230, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation.
f l 9.1.1.13 For in-clant surveys, direct a Shif t HP Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader l to implement EP-250, Personnel Safety Team Activation. '. l 9.1.1.14 For field surveys, when a release of gaseous radioactive material has occurred or is suspected, direct the Dose Assessment Team Leader to implement EP-210, Dose Assessment Team Activation. ! 9.1.1.15 For a release at or greater than the Alert l 4 level in EP-101, Classification of 1 I Emergencies, direct the Dose Assesment Team l l Leader to implemen,t'.EP-210, Dose Assessment Team Activation. On an interim bases, i direct the Shif t Technical Advisor to l perform dose projections using EP-316, Cumulative Population Dose Calculations For Airborne Releases - Manual Method or RMMS Computer and implement EP-317, Determination ()h l of Protective Action Recommendations. l l
-__ :a - ==- _- =,- = - =;.:.: 2 --,- -x_- _ T- - _ . _ _ _ 7
_ ab EP-103, Rev. 3 Page 6 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs l C:) #
. 9.1.1.16 For fire / damage repair direct the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader to implement EP-260, Fire and Damage Team Activation and/or EP-261, Damage Repair Group.. ,
I l 9.1.1.17 For a licuid release, implement EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release, if required. l 9.1.1.18 For Security matters, contact Security Shift Supervision and direct implementation of EP-
- 208, Security Team Activation, unless previously done.
l 9.2 FOLLOW-UP i 9.2.1 (Interim) Emergency Director shall:
- i
- 9. 2 .1.1 Verify that the Technical Support Center,
- the Emergency Operations Facility (if
! necessary) and the Operations Support Center have been activated. ] 9.2.1.2 Periodically evaluate the event
" classification in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emer.gencies and maintain,
- escalate or de-escalate the classification, as necessary.
'. 9.2.1.3 If classification is de-escalated, fill out ! l Appendia EP-103-3, Alert De-Escalation 4 Notification Message and give it to the . communicator and direct the communicator.to ! perform notification of the appropriate l parties listed in Appendix EP-103-5, Alert
- l Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation) .
9.2.1.4 Obtain the following information as necessary to formulate further actions: A. Security status from Security Team . Leader B. Sample analysis .from Shif t Chemist or Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Lead er l l C. In-plant surveys from Shif t EP 3., Technician or Personnel Safety Team i Leader
.() .
.._.---_____-._.__..___.._.___..___..___._____,___.__.__..m___ . _ _ _ , _ , ,
. l dbk -
EP-103, Rev. 3 Page 7 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rge N- .. [ D. Field surveys from Dose Assessment Team Lead er E. Dose projections and protective action recommendations from Shift Technical Advisor or Dose Asses'sment Team Leader F. Fire / damage repair status from the Maintenance Shif t Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader
, l G. Notification results from Communicator 9.2.1.5 Determine which additional support personnel are necessary for emergency functions and direct the Shift Clerk or other assigned communicator in TSC to contact those personnel.
9.2.1.6 Provide site personnel with public address (PA) announcements for any major changes in plant emergency status, such as changing emergency action levels and evacuations.
^
o..; 9.2.1.7 Evaluate the need and order evacuation of ' Z>' effected areas as necessary. Refer to the following procedures:' EP-303 Local Evacuation, EP-304 Partial Plant Evacuation, EP-305 Site Evacuation. i l 9.2.2 The Communicator shall: i 9.2.2.1 Inform (Interim) Emergency Director when',
, appropriate Notifications have been made and submit completed copy of Appendix EP-103-4 ;
Alert Phone List (Initial Notification) or Appendix EP-103-5 Alert Phone List (Escalation or De-Escalation) for (Interim) Emergency Director's Signature.
- 10. REFERENCES ,
10.1 Limerick Generating Station )mergency Plan l 10.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological ' ( Emergency Response Plans and Prepardness in Support of
,O(}) Nuclear Power Plant.
,s- , -----e=--r---- t----- n,e-- ,--1,-+ --g - --- - y- , ,-- ,+=----- - - - -, ---.+--%- -*--re-e- r,- yyg--g- e,-
-, -- --- . . . - ~ . - . - ~ . - - . .
.~ .- -- n . .
EP-103, R2v. 3 Page 8 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs h ( ,, 10.3 EP-303 Local Evacuation 10.4 EP-101 Classification of Emergencies 10.5 EP-304 Partial Plant Evacuation 10.6 EP-305 Site Evacuation ' 10.7 EP-306 Evacuation of the Information Center 10.8 A-31 Procedure for Prompt Notification
, l 10.9 EP-291 Staffing Augmentation 10.10 EP-201 Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation l 10.11 EP-202 Operations Support Center (OSC) Activation 10.12 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF)
Activation 10.13 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action Recommendations 10.14 EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calculations ({j for Airborne Release - Manual Method 10.15 EP-110- Personnel Assembly and' Accountability 10.16 EP-208 Security Team Activation 10.17 EP-210 Dose Assesment Team Activation 10.18 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team . Activation l 10.19 EP-250 Personnel Safety Team Activation l 10.20 EP-260 Fire and Damage Team Activation l 10.21 EP-261 Damage Repair Group l 10.22 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release
- O G
JD 1 l 1 I
EF-103, R2v. 3 ' Page 9 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs (k APPENDIX EP-103-1 ALERT NOTIFICATION MESSAGE
, l MESSAGE: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is Not) a l drill. This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report an Alert.
l My name is , telephone . Limerick Generating
. l Station is repor ting an Alert declared at Unit No. . Time and date of Alert classification are , . The basic (24 hr. clock time) (date) l problem is _. There (has been) (has not been) l an (airborne) (liquid) radioactive release from the plant. The plant j status is (stable) (improving) (degrading) (not knwon) . There is no protective action recommended. This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is)
, (is not) a drill.
e tO
EP-103, Rev. 3 Page 10 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs b.T u g APPENDIX EP-103-2 Emergency Exposure Guidelines Projected .
.- Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Life Saving and (Interim)
Reduction of Injury 75 REM
- 375 REM Emergency **
Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an (Interim)
Emergency 25 REM
- 125 REM Emergency **
Director
- 3. Protection of Health (Interim) and Safety of the Public 5 REM 25 REM Emergency **
Director
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 (Interim)
Activities limits limits Emergency Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery, Station Station Activities . Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A
- References EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1 -
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis i ,OO l
= .-
EP-103, Rev. 3
- Page 11 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rgs ,
C, g. APPENDIX EP-103-3 ALERT DE-ESCALATION NOTIFICATION CHECKOFF LIST MESSAGE: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is n ' ot) a drill. This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report a change in emergency classification. The Alert has been (de-escalated to an Unusual Event) (Terminated) . Time and date are , .
~
(24 Br Clock Time) (Date) The plant status is (stable) (improving). My name is . This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill.
- l m
OG
-rw -ww----r-=+vu --W--M=ppw--we- m - *=p+-wwee.w-= y5-g,wv--.t e---,--ow .
wee.w--w ep-.mva,e-er-g---- ypov,-e-,evm--,ay-wggyp-4.
O O' - O El 1, Rev. 3 i;. i Page 12 of 15 VAW/ MPG /rg s APPENDIX EP-103-3 AI.ERT PilON8 LIST , l Time Initiated (INITI AL NOPIFICATION) l Phone Number Time Person Responding l Parsonnel/ Agency To Be_ Notified Emergency Director Home
- a. ,
G. M. Leitch Office Alternate Home l J. F. Franz Office
- j Load Dispatcher Office l b. __
i l ! l c. Montgomery County Emergency _ _ ,,,_____,___,.___ _ en (
- d. Pennsylvania Emergency _
Mana n t
- e. Pennsylvania. Bureau of Radiation P'rgtection _ _ _
PA
- f. Manager - Public Information __
i l l Ronald Ha r Director - Emergency Home ' : g. Preparedness Office ! l Roberta Kankus w l Q
O O - O ~~ :- p.. l 8 EP ..,3, Rev. 3 l f Page 13 of 15 l VAW/ MPG /rgs I t APPENDIX EP-103-3 . ALERT PilONE LIST
, Time Initiated (INITI AL NUPIFICATION)
Phone Number Time Person Responding i l Personnel / Agency To Be Notified
- h. NRC Operations Center
- j Bethesda, MD !
I f Make this call last and remain on
; telephone until NRC disconnects
- Person contacting NRC must be Agencies to be contacted after '
the above personnel / agencies have been notifed _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ l 1. Berks County Emergency ! Man ment A c __ l l j. Chester County Emergency Se rv ices _ _ _ _ _
~
l m e Completed By: __ Verified By: _ 3 (INTERIM) EMERGENCY DIRECTOR f i
F 35s _ 1g -
. r vf/
eoG . . ~ R P . _ 4M g_ _
,1/ n W i G - A e
gV a P d n o p_ E s - e - R - n - - _ o - - s - r . e . P - e - m - i - T -
)
N O I . 5 T -
- TA 3SL 0IA 1LC
- S PEE EN-OR r XHD e I P b D R m 8 NT ER PE N PL O AAI O
T N u e n o A h L P A ; C S e e e E c c c ( ei ei i mf mf f ._ of of f HO H O- O s t c d e e nn e i i n b f ao t i mc s t f
- es o o r ri u N n e d m uo t d e r ai n nC C B o et e aR R t rc C N N o c r ue t T e e BtA s sl gr r h oP n. ai no y ih c ar oD lt n
it c Dc z t iP , iM ta d n t n a n g t lu cr e e yi ea p anr a, l ae t g ce tr s vou ra ae t p a A nL aF i lib ed cn nO i t i
/
l e e g . rM n. E eF d D yts sai nir ps Oe h sh ip o o cd e o I n e
~
n n o s r e m. EG t l . AJ a o L ndr eaa PRH Ct Re NB he tl et e ns on se rc ei m k i e . . . . an PL T P a b c d Mo
- ll I L
N 1 lll lll
e Co . . O - ff-I EP-to3, Rev."3 l Page 15 of 15
- I '
VAW/ MPG / cgs, l \ APPENDIX EP-103-5 . ALERT PHONE LIST Time Initiated (ESCALATION OR DE-ESCALATION)
], Porsonnel/ Agency To Be Notified Time Person Responding Agencies to be contacted after
- the above personnel / agencies have l been notifed i
! l e. Montgomery County Of fice i ! of Emergency Preparedness and Medical Services _ _
- f. Pennsylvania Emergency l Management Agency __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ l
- g. Berks County Emergency
- h. Chester County Emergency Services _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
j Completed Byi /Date i i verified By: * { (INTERIM) EMERGENCY DIREC'IOR i f I I
n 4 A. - s 3840090140 g EP-104, Rev. 3 l
- Page 1 of 16 VA '/ PPG /rg e C . gjf PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE 89 EP-104 SITE EMERGENCY RESPONSE
- 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the site response to a Site Emergency.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 Shif t Supervision shall assume the role of the Interim Emergency Director when a Site Emergency occurs unless the Emergency Director is present and perform the ( necessary steps in this procedure.
~u 2.2 The Station Superintendent or Alternate shall assume the role of the Emergency Director, report to the Technical Support Center or control room and relieve the Interim Emergency Director.
2.3 The Site Emergency Coordinator shall report f.o the Emergency Operations Facility and p Eh - . necessary steps in this p Coy
}g \p)i
.s-
~
, t bl d
APPENDICES '- 3.0 . 3.1 EP-104-1 Site Emergency Notifi $Mssage.. '
- c r. ; bc_e 3.2 EP-104-2 Emergency Exposu u eg;d:, t,7 3.3 EP-104-3 Site Emergency calation Notification Message ,
3.4 EP-104-4 Site Emergency Phone List l (Initial Notification) 3 l 3.5 EP-104-5 Site Emergency Phone List (Escalati or De-p c % tion , O fm l p
) q p ij1 ,f) f y
7 V M] (l W h f L B d
l e; . 4
- g l EP-104, Rev. 3
. Page 2 of 16
. VAW/ MPG /rgs I
't Q
' 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4.1 EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, completed
.. l I
'. ~
5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT I None- ! 1
~
! 6.0 SYMPTOMS None ; a t j 7.0 ACTION LEVEL - 4 This procedure shall be implemented when an event occurs that i l is classified as a Site Emergency per EP-101, Classification 4 of Emergencies. j ., 8.0 PRECAUTIONS . i 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the ! l administrative guide levels in Appendix *?P-104-2,
! Emergency Exposure Guidelines.
I r i j 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS- ! 9.1.1 (Interim) Emergency Director shallt i
- 9.1.1.1 verify the emergency classification as I determined in EP-101 Classification of
- Emergencies unless determination has just
. been made. . i i 9.1.1.2 Fill out Appendix EP-104-1, Site Emergency l Notification Message, and give it to the ' i Communicator, O
.J
- . i I EP-104, Rev. 3 Page 3 of 16 fj,~h VAW/ MPG /rgs
-V j 9.1.1.3 Direct the communica tor to complete notification of the appropriate parties as specified in Appendix EP-104-4, Site Emergency Phone List (Initial Notification) or Appendix EP-104-5, Ale,pt Phone List
- (Escalation or De-escalation). The Communicator shall man the NRC RED Telephone until the NRC disconnects.
} 9.1.1.4 Contact the Station Superintendent and the Shift Technical Advisor, inform them of the ,
, I situation, if not already done.
l 9.1.1.5 Direct the Information Center Staff (4256, 495-6767) to impleLent EP-306, Evacuation of
- the Information Center, if not already done.
Inform the staff of the wind direction, if there is an airborne release. 9.1.1.6 If there is a radiological release, implement EP-305, Site Evacuation. 9.1.1.7 If there has not been a radiologi release,
'/-
/ #
A. Evacuate all construction rsonnel by contacting Bechtel Safet Direct them to call for a " Tota Project Evacuation" in accordance with Bechtel procedures. B. Contact Yoh Construction Security , ta off-hour 'nd informofthem a Total Pro @jecTEvacuation Bechtel Construction personnel is being implemen ted . s THIS WILL CALL FOR THE ASSEMBLY OF PERSONNEL AT THE UPPER PARKING LOT AND POST #3. IF IT IS DESIRED THAT THEY LEAVE THE SITE, INFORM BECHTEL Com!AND POSTS AT THE UPPER PARKING LOG. C. Select the type of accountability desired for personnel in the protected area and implement the required actions below s -9 i x_s\ l L_
l EP-104, Rev. 3 Page 4 of 1( VAW/ MPG /rgs
, 1. Emergency Assembly Without Accountability l - Make the following announcer.ent "THIS (IS) (IS DOT) A DRILL.
a- DESIGNATED EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO ASSIGNED EMERGENCY , RESPONSE FACILITIES. ALL OTHER PERSONNEL STAND BY FOR FURTHER ANNOUNCEMENT. THIS (IS) (IS NOT) i . A DRILL. *
- 2. Emergency Assembly With Accountability
- a. Select Unit 1 exit points as follows:
Day
- Shift - TSC and Administration Building Afternoon Shift -
Administration Building Night Shift - Administration Building
) (,j.
- b. Contack the (Interim)
Security Team Leader. Inform him of the selected point (s), that emergency assembly with accountability is going to be li implemented, and to activate the Security Team (EP-208) i j and to perform Mrsonnel l accountability in accordance with EP-llo, Per sonnel Assembly and Accountability .
- c. Contact Yoh Construction '
Security and inform them that personnel leaving Unit I will be reassembling at the ' Personnel Processing Center i (PPC), ;
"TS'IS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL, TEIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL.
DESIGNATED EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REPORT TO APSIGNED h EMERGENCY RESPONSE ' O PACILITIES. ALL OTEER PERSONNEL LEAVE TEE PROTECTED
. ~.--.~. , _ . . _ . - - - .
. . , ~~
~
l EP-104, Rev. 3
, Page 5 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rgs
'f . , ARIA IMMEDIATELY THROUGH THE (NAME OF EXIT AREA OR AREAS) l AND REASSEMBLE AT THE PERSONNEL PROCESSING CENTER.
THIS (IS) (IS NOT) A DRILL. THIS (IS) 'lIS NOT) A DRILL. " 9.1.1.8 If not already accomplished at the Alert stage, direct the Shift Clerk to activate the 60 minute call list per EP-291, Staf fing l Augmentation. If Shift Clerk is not available, this function may be assigned to any available individual. l 9.1.1.9 Direct the activation of the Technical Support Center in accordance with EP-201, Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation, if not already activated. j' 9.1.1.10 Direct the activation of the Emergency , Operations Facility in accordance with EP-203, Emergency' Operations Facility (EOF) Activation, if not already activated.
'((])(,, l 9.1.1.11 If the EOF has not been activated earlier, b- during the Alert Response procedure, direct a communicator to call' EOF personnel !
(directing them to report to the EOF) using EP-279, EOF Group Phone List. l 9.1.1.12 Assign an Operations Support Center coordinator (PO) if not already done, to direct available personnel to report to the Operations Support Center and to activate it in accordance with EP-202, Operations i
] Support Center (OSC) Activation.
l 9.1.1.13 For samples, direct.the Shift Chemistry Technician or Chemistry Sampling And Analysis Team Leader to implement EP-230, Chemistry Sampling And Analysis Team , Activation. ' i l 9.1.1.14 For in-plant survey's, direct a Shif t EP j Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader to implement EP-250, Personnel Sr.fety Team Activa tion. EY l
= ._
l EP-104, Rev. 3 Page 6 of 16 f~ VAW/ MPG /rgs - bs , j 9.1.1.15 For field surveys, when a release of gaseous l radioactive material has occurred or is ! suspected, direct a Shift HP Technician o- 1 Dose Assessment Team Leader to implement EP-210, Dose Assessment Team, Activation. r l 9.1.1.16 For a release, at or greater than the Alert level in EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, or at the discretion of the ) Emergency Director, direct the Dose Assessment Team Leader to implement EP-210, ,
. D7se Assessment Team Activation. On an )
interim bases, direct the Shift Technical l Advisor to perform dose projections using i EP-316, Cumulative Population Dose Calculations for Airborne Releases-Manual ; Method or RNHS Computer and implement EP- ' 317, Determination of Protective Action l Recommendations. - l 9.1.1.17 For fire / damage repair direct the Maintenance Shif t Assistant Foreman or Fire and Damage Team Leader to implement EP-260, Fire and Damage Team Activation and/or EP-j) 261, Damage Repair Group. l 9.1.1.18 For a liquid release,' implement EP-312, l Radioactive Liquid Release, if required. 9.1.1.19 For Security matters, contact Security Shif t Supervision and direct implementation of EP-208, Security Team Activation, unless i previously done. . I 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 9.2.1 (Interim) Emergency Director shall: Verify that the Technical Support Center,
~
9.2.1.1 I Emergency Operations Facility and the Operations Support Center have been activated.
~
9.2.1.2 Periodically evaluate the event classification in accordance with EP-101, , Classification of Emergencies and escalate ' or de-escalate the classification, as ( necessary.
, _ _ . _ ._ _ . _ . . _ . - - _ _ - . _ _ _ _ _ __ _ ___._.~.u . _ _ . _ .
]
EP-104, Rev. 2 '- Page 7 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rgs
- 9.2.1.3 If classification is de-escalated, fill out Appendix EP-104-3, Site Emergency De-Escalation Notification Message and give it i to the communicator and direct the L communicator to perform notification of the appropriate parties listed in Appendix EP-104-5, Site Emergency Phone List (Escalation or De-escalation) .
9.2.1.4 Obtain the following information as necessary to formulate further actions: A. Security Status from Security Team Leader B. Sample analysis from Shif t Chemistry Technician or Chemistry Sampling And Analysis Team Leader C. In-plant surveys f' rom Shift EP Technician or Personnel Safety Team Leader
., D. Field surveys from Shif t HP Technician
- 9 l or Dose Assessment Team Leader E. Dose projections and protective action recommendations from Shift Technical Advisor or Dose Assessment Team Leader F. Fire / Damage repair status from the Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman or
. Fire and Damage Team Leader. -
G. Notifica* tion Results from Communicator. 9.2.1.5 Discuss protective action recommendations with the Site Emergency Coordinator. 9.2.1.6 Determine which additional support personnel are necessary for emergency functions and direct the shif t clerk or other assigned communicator to contact those personnel. 9.2.1.7 Provide site personnel with public addres (PA) announcements for any major changes in plant emergency status, such as changing emergency action levels and evacuations. 00
l EP-104, Rev. 3 Page 8 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rgs
. Oi '
, 9.2.1.8 . Evaluate the need and order evacuation of affected areas as necessary.
Refer to the following procedures: EP-303 Local Evacuation " EP-305 Site Evacuation 9.2.1.9 Perform the following until relieved by the Site Emergency Coordinator: A. Discuss protective action recommendations with the Dose l Assessment Team Leader. B. Provide protective action
] .
recommendations, if necessary, to the Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation Protection. C. Inform the various emergency response groups if the recovery phase organization is to be implemented. k ) kkV 9.2.2 The Communicator shall: 9.2.2.1 Inform the Emergency Director when i appropriate notifications have been made and submit completed copy of Attachment EP-104-4 Site Emergency Phone List (Initial Notification) or Appendix EP-104-5, Site Emergency Phone List (Escalation or De , escalation) for Emergency Directors Signature.
- 10. REFERENCES i 10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria For Preparation and Evaluation Rev. 1 of Radiological, Emergency Response Plans and Preparedne.ss in Support of Nuclear Power Plants.
10.3 EP-101 Classification of Emergencies (3) 10.4 A-31 Procedure for Prompt Notification l 10.5 EP-291 Staffing' Augmentation f
. - . - , . ,..--...---..,,_,~,.,y,,--...,-.--,-..y.,---.--,--,_.--,,,-rmy,n.- .._..+v o..o.., --_-...-.,,-,,,,.,-.-mm,.._%.m,-,,,-,e.-
EP-104, Rev. 3
]
Page 9 of 16 j VAW/ MPG /rgs 6_ - - 10.6 EP-201 Technical Support Center (TSC) Activation l 10.7 EP-202 Operations Support Center (OSC) Activation 10.8 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation
- 10.9 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action Recommendations 10.10 EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calucations For Airborne Releases-Manual Method
~
10.11 EP-305 Site Evacuation 10.12 EP-306 Evacuation of the Information Center 10.13 EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability 10.14 EP-208 Security Team Activation 10.15 EP-210 Dose Assessment Team. Activation
.l 10.16 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation J NS) 10.17 EP-250 Personnel Safety Team Act.ivation l
l 10.18 EP-260' Fire and Damage Team Activation l 10.19 EP-261 Damage Repair Group l 10.20 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release l 10.21 EP-279 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Group Phone List l c0 " . _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ -__ _ - _ _ _ w ,+ e-s- w- + c w1 -- - - *
~ - . -
l EP-104, Rev. 3
- Page 10 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP-104-1 l SI*E EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE Message: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. This l is Limerick Generating Station calling to report a Site Emergency. My l name is , telephone . Limerick l Generating Station is reporting a Site Emergency declared at Unit No.
l . Time and date of Site Emergency classification are , (24 hr. clock time) (Date) f l The basic problem is . ("\ ) M- 1 There (has been) th s not been) an (airborne) (liquid) radioactive l release from the plant. The plant status is (stable) (improving) l (degrading) (not known). There is no protective action recommended. l This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. i D
- O i
i i
[ EP-104, Rev. 3 Page 11 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rgs N ,( l eg s APPENDIX EP-104-2 l EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Life Saving and (Interim)
Reduction of Emergency ** Injury 75 REM
- 375 REM Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to (Interim)
Mitigate an Emergency ** Emergency 25 REM
- 125 REM Director
- 3. Protection of (Interim)
Health 7.J Safety Emergency ** of the Public 5 REM 25 REM Director
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 (Interim)
Activities limits limits Emergency l O., g %
.. '.2/ Director
- 5. Re-Entry / Station Station Recovery Administrative Administration Activities Guide Lines Guide Lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1 i ** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis i l l
. \
.OU t
l EP-104 Rev. 3 Page 12 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rgs g Y - APPENDIX EP-104-3 SITE EMERGENCY DE-ESCALATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGE
- MESSAGE: This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill.
This is Limerick Generating Station calling to report a change in emergency action level. The site emergency has been (de-escalated to an) (Unusual Event) ( Aler t) (Termina ted) . Time and date are
, . The plant status is (stable)
(24 Hr Clock Time) (Date) (improving). My name is . This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is mot) a drill. I
~
I 1
. . t Os
?
i e -.,,,,--,_,n- -- ,s-- .y ,---,.m e p----,e.. . w-,- -,a.,y---~----a--+wr w_ p w ,wem-www-,-,- -&-m s ,m wwg, se- m nemem---m,+-
O O . , d l ( ' EP-104, Rev. 3 Page 13 of'16 , VAw/Mec/rgs ' e lt APPENDIX EP-104-4 I SITE EMERGENCY PilONE LIST (INITIAL NOTIFICATION) Time Initiated Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone Number Time Person Respond ing
- a. Emergency Director Home -
vD M G. M. Leitch Office -
) Alternate Home - j J. F. Franz Office -
q l b. Load Disp 5tcher Office - ' i I c. Montgomery County Of fice of Emerg. ,
- Preparedness and Medical Services l d. Pennsylvania Emergency Management i Agency i
- e. Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation Protection, Harrisburg, PA I
I f. Manager - Public Information Ronald Harper
- g. Director - Emergency Home - .
Preparedness Office -
- Roberta Kankus l
I -- -_____. - _ _ _ - _ . - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - - _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _
, _ 7 __
O O . : D : ;
.. v --
C ' l EP-104, Rev. 3 Page, 14 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rgs IlI APPENDIX EP-104-4 (CONT'D) SITE EMBRGENCY PilONE LIST (CONT'D) (INITI AL NOTIFICATION)
- l Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone Number Time Person Responding Agencies to be contacted after the ,
above personnel / agencies have been i notified i4
- h. MRC Operations Center
- Bethesda, MD l Make this call last and remain on telephone until NRC disconnects l
- Person contacting NRC must be licensed.
- 1. Berks County Emergency Management Agency
}
- j. Chester County Emergency Services I
Completed By: - Time /Date verified By: --~~~-~~~~~-- (Interim) Emergency Director l.
l O C . , O : EP-104, Rev'. 3 l l l Pagg 15 of 15 i VAW/ MPG /rg s l APPENDIX EP-104-5 j SITE EMERGENCY PHONE LIST (ESCALATION OR DE-ESCALATION) Time Initiated p___ Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone Number Time Person Responding l l
- a. Emergency Director Home -
G. M. Leitch Office - Alternate !!ome - J. F. Franz Office - I l I b. Load Dispatcher Office - f
- c. Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation !
Protection, Harrisburg, PA , l t I 3 H l d. MRC Operations Center * ! Bethesda, MD ; l5 l V l Make this call last and remain on telephone until NRC disconnects f l
~ '
l
- Person contacting NRC must be licensed operator s
O O - - D b c* - < e :. l EP-104, Rev. 3 Page 16 of 16 VAW/ MPG /rg a APPENDIX RP-104-5 (CONT'D) SITE EMERGENCY PIIONE LIST (CONT'D) (ESCALATION OR DE-ESCALATION) l Personnel / Agency to be notified Phone Number Time Person Responding Agencies to be contacted after the above personnel / agencies have been notified
- e. Montgomery County Of fice of Emergency Preparedness and Medical Services
( f. Pennsylvania Emergency
) Management Agency
- g. Berks County Emergency Management Agelscy
- h. Chester County Emergency Services '
i Completed By: Time /Date ~~~
- Verified By
- :
l (Interim) Emergency Director r I
_ _ _ . _ = . - . . . - .-= = w .a -
, , 3840090150 l
' EP-106, Rev. 1 i 'y .
Page 1 of 6 VA ' iPG/res NW
,, PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-106 WRITTEN
SUMMARY
NOTIFICATION 1.0 PUP. POSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for
~
the eight hour written summary notification to the NRC following closeout or de-escalation of an Alert, Site Emergency or General Emergency Classification. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The (Interim) Emergency Director shall direct the Shift Technical Advisor or other assigned engineer to prepare the written summary report following the - closecut or de-escalation of an Alert, Site Emergency h, or General Emergency. 2.2 The Shift Technical Advisor or other assigned engineer shall prepare the written summary report. 3.0 APPENDICES Ib 3.1 EP-106-1 Emergency Class So$ e Iphc 1 icm Repor t 4.0 PREREOUISITES 9 S '.
. ij - ,
r . None Q .\,.( % - 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT P ht None l (' 6.1 Closeou :ot e-j c f at n f n! e ): IE E ' , f n'pf or Gen 1 *er e C sif ion ' h*- V di G U Ut db diludL [
~
7
. s l
- EP-106, Rev. 1 (
l ! Page 2 of 6 l N VAW/ MPG /rgs v ~
. 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented following a closeout or de-escalation of an Alert, Site Emergency or General Emergency Classification per $
EP-101 Classification of Emergencies. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Immediate Actions 9.1.1 'The (Interim) Emergency Director shall: 9.1.1.1 Direct the Shift Technical Advisor or other assigned engineer to prepare the written summary in accordance with this procedure. I 9.1.2 The Shif t Technical Advisor shall: 9.1.2.1 Obtain the necessary information to complete Appendix EP-106-1 Emergency Class Closeout / Reduction Report. 9.1.2.2 Fill in the following information on the form: '
- a. Item 1 - Enter the number of the affected units. If the event occurred at i both units, enter Unit 1. i
- b. Item 2 - Enter the docket number of the unit listed.
LGS UNIT 1 05000- (352) LCS UNIT 2 05000- (353)
- c. Item 3 - Enter,the total number of pages.
- d. Item 4 - Enter a concise description of
, the event.
- e. Item 5 - Enter the date of the event.
O(}) f. Item 7 - Enter the date od the report.
. s l EP-106, Rev. 1 Page 3 of 6 VAW/ MPG /rgs
. g. Item 8 - Enter name and docket number of Unit 2 if the event occurred at both units.
I' LCS UNIT 2 0,5000- (353)
- h. Item 9 - Enter the operating mode.
- 1. - Power Operation
- 2. - Startup
- 3. - Hot Shutdown i
, 4. - Cold Shutd own
- 5. - Refueling
- 1. Item 10- Enter the percent of licensed thermal power at which the reactor was operating when the event occurred.
- j. Item 12 - Enter the name of the Shift Superintendent.
- k. Item 17 - Enter a brief description of the circumstances and reasons hgj behind the closeout or de-escalation of the Alert, Site
, Emergenc'y or General Emergency.
9.1.2.3 Submit the report to the (Interim) Emergency Director. 9.2 Follow-Up Actions 9.2.1 The (Interim) Emergency Director shall: 9.2.1.1 Review the report for completeness and accuracy. l 9.2.1.2 Have the Station Superintendent or Assistant ; Station Superintendent and the' Operations Engineer or Technical Engineer review the report. This may require review over the telephone . , 9.2.1.3 Have the report telecopied within eight hours to the NRC Operations Center or Region I office via the following phone number NRC Operations Center d I (([) Region 1 Office w # L
EP ~06, Rev. 1
'l -
r3?e 4 of C VM;/!iPG/rg s ( . 9.2.1.4
~7 Call and verify that the report was received: 7' e
NRC Operation Center i Region I Office , 9.2.1.5 If the report cannot be telecopied, have the report hand delivered within eight hours to ' the: Region I Office
- 631 Park Ave.
King of Prussia, PA 19406 1 l
10.0 REFERENCES
1 l 10.1 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation ; Rev. 1 of Radiological Emergency Response Plans ' and Preparedness in Suppor t of Nuclear Power Plants
,( 10.2 EP-101 Classification of Emergency O
e t l
,,',,,,,,, EP-106, Rev. I
- m. Page 5 of 6 APPENDIX CP-106-1 EMERCENCY CLASS CLOSCOUT/DE-ESCALATION REPORT yggj,9377 ,
i [x . c u,, n, Limerick Cenerating Station Unit occaav a ai .aa i i (; .ru ot5to10toI l l 1 lod ! l l l evinv an n. .woar o.ri ni orn.= ,aciutiu m.vo6vio .. 4 l o., ..c u v . -= [ ,,, . ,. o .o.,1. ... oocaav avi sa.: [ 3 a15fo1o,ot i i l k . I I
.....-,.. _ .o - ,o I
I I z ,,, oisioicioi , , l
,,,,,,., i
.ooe ,
q , , , , , ,
,s,, ,,
R S.amasHtHe 80.NeeH13 90 79esM3H.t F1716s4 n., , i . .in H.,
.2s .,
~ . . . L ory.; ,;,gg m anwn n.,
esmmHu _ se.rewan nw assae se ass.Hituet go.73entgH.4 M.f teslGHe.BHSD M amesett H.e go 73enemusu es.73a.4GHas Lacsa g on., TACT 808 flem 48 A 1181 'I M
=4.s viu, o. v . a 3 AA&. GOO 4 Shift Superintendent t
?
hf t M tE.fi,T.L at.Omt SEPtCT$oit. 0= t se o.. =.t.8 k . .o N vis ,,,- .- awe-rreew u m Y] = a^ r* " s' aarvaaet ,6 . < <e a. = - , - ,, , n.i Th2 3 report is to satisfy the 8 hour written summary requirement for a closecat of an Alert. Site Emergency or General Emergency, in accordance with l h'JREG-0654 Appendix 1. Item 17 of this report is a brief description of the closecut of the event. If applicable, a LER will follow in the required time frame. l
~
e i ( O43I
EP-106, Rav. 1
..c , Page 6 of 6
** APPENDIX EP-106-1 EMERCENCY CLASS CLOSEOUT /DE-ESCALATION REPORT VAk'/ MPG /rgs I TEXT CONTINUATION DaC6LaTV sea.st tu OOCali .Wesen as pagg g
(,m-d , o Is 10 lo 18 I I I i OF I l rm ,. _ . - - = , ., , u,
~ l i
1 (-
-" r e
8 9 e e
=,
^ ^ ^ ^ ~~
~
r 3840090160 3 EP-110 Rev. 2 l ( . d Page 1 of 9 VA / PG/mgd I l PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE _ EP-110 PERSONNEL ASSDGLY AND ACCOUNTABILITY 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide the steps necessary for personnel assembly and accountability. This procedure does not apply to Unit 2 Bechtel and sub-contractor personnel since they will be assembled per Bechtel procedures. , 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 Personnel shall report to designated Emergency Assembly Areas or as otherwise directed. 2.2 Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators shall, when required, perform an accountability check of personnel at their areas. 2.3 When personnel accountability is required, Bechtel and sub-contractor personnel shall account for their personnel in accordance with Bechtel procedures and make reports to their command posts. at Post #3 and the North Parking Lot. 2.4 Security shall assemble a list 'k'tedfor persons, when accountabil r f.equired, for the (Interim) Eme '
'Inte r im)
Personnel Safety T Dterim) Security Team Lead 4 2.5 The (Interim) Emerge cy Dir .sha h dir Q he (Interim) Personnel Safety ef.eadeg .tp ate the First Aid / Search and Res
- eG
*$ g' Y. slo e unaccounted for personnel.
'h'
! l 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-ll 1, Ene encIAsse_mblyArgare I ~. i~ k. y p1 a i r h m f, fhJb )f Ig 0
l 1 e EP-110 Rev. 2 t Page 2 of 9 VAV/ MPG /mgd L_J( , 4.0 PREREQUISITES None ,, 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT None 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure should be implemented whenever an Alert,
, l Site Emergency, General Emergency, or Site Evacuation is declared and may also be executed when an Unusual Event is (f)(-. l declared at the discretion of the Emergency Director.
8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Only the following personnel may authorize suppor t personnel without Limerick badges access to the - site at an Alert, Site or General Emergency. 8.1.1 Site Emergency Coordinator l 8.1.2 (Interim) Emergency Director 8.1.3 Security Team Leader 9.0 PROCEDURE . - 9.1 ACTIONS i THESE ACTIONS WILL IMMEDIATELY FOLLOW THE ASSEMBLY l ANNOUNCEMENT MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY OF THE l FOLLOWING: l () EP-103 - Alert Response EP-104 - Site Emergency Response i l
_~ EP-110 Rav. 2 e Page 3 of 9 ) VAV/ MPG /mgd 4d. l EP-105 - General Emergency Response EP-305 - Site Evacuation ..
, l 9.1.1 For assembly WITHOUT accountability ch eck .
9 .1.1.1 Designated Emergency Response personnel shall report to their assigned assembly areas (see Appendix EP-110-1) . 9.1.1.2 Other personnel shall remain at their normal positions until receiving further instructions. 9.1.2 For emergency assembly WITH accountability l 9.1.2.1 Personnel shall report to their designated Emergemcy Assembly Facility / Area (see Appendix EP-110-1) . If not assigned to an Emergency Assembly
- Facility / Area, exit the Protected Area, and report to the Personnel Processing Center.
9.1.2.2 Personnel escorting visitors shall: A. Escort visitors to Administration Building Guard Station B. Report to their Emergency Assembly Facility / Area (see Appendix EP-110-1) or, if not assigned to an emergency assembly area, exit the Protected Area, and report to the Personnel Processing Center. 9.1.3 Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators shall: 9.1.3.1 For Assembly without an accountability checks , A. Maintain a log of names and badge
. numbers of all personnel. leaving and
' returning to assembly areas.
1 (O
a e EP-110 Rev. 2
, Page 4 of 9 VAV/ MPG / mod 9.1.3.2 For Assembly with an accountability check:
A. Record names and secu'rity badge v numbers of all individuals reporting to the assembly area. Conduct a roll call (if necessary) to verify an accurate listing of personnel. B. Report names of accounted for personnel to Security when contacted. C. Maintain a log of names and badge numbers of all personnel leaving and returning to assembly areas. D. If the entire group of assembled personnel are to move to a new
. location, perform steps A through C f main a ned
}(
l 9.1.4 Plant Security Group shall: l 9.1.4.1 For Assembly with Accountability: A. Report to the appropriate personnel exit areas. B. Ensure that personnel exiting the Protected Area follow the normal
" Card-Out" procedure and utilize the portal monitors while exiting.
l C. If the COMPUTER is NOT operating:
- 1. Obtain a copy of the Master Badge List.
- 2. Collect the badges of all existing per'sonnel. Using the Master Badge List, check OFF the numbers of all the collected badges and those not in use at the time of the evacuation. ,
( (("/S kal x _
e %
- EP-110 Rev. 2
- Page 5 of 9 VAV/ MPG /mgd
- 3. Give the completed Master Badge List to the Personnel Accountability Gr,oup Leader as auickly as possible.
l 9.1.4.2 For Site Evacuation: A. Report to the appropriate personnel exit areas and set out buckets or other containers to collect security badges. B. Have exiting personnel deposit their security badges and dosimetry in the appropriate containers, and utilize the portal monitors. IF PORTAL MONITORS ALARM, PERSONNEL SHOULD BE INSTRUCTED TO REPORT TO : HEALTH PHYSICS AT THE OFFSITE ASSEMBLY AREAS. Emergency workers may be required to ( ) (.- retain dosimetry.- Prior arrangements i should be made through (Interim) Security Team Leader. C. If the Security Computer System is operable, badges will be carded out by security using the exit lane card readers. . , D. If the Security Computer System is NOT operable, perform the steps detailed in 9.1.4.1 C of this procedure.
] 9.1.5 Personnel Accountability Group shall:
l 9.1.5.1 For Assembly with Accountability: A. Report to the, Administration Guard Station. . B. Contact the Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators for accountability reports utilising Appendix EP-110-1, h; Emergency Assembly Areas.,
._:~.....,. . _ _ . - _
-. ? -
. <g
. EP-110 Rev. 2 Page 6 of 9 VAV/ MPG /mgd C. Compite a list of personnel in the Protected Area using information received from the Emergency Assembly Area Coordinators and .the Security
.. Computer System.
IF THE SECURITY COMPUTER IS NOT OPERABLE, THE PLANT SECURITY GROUP WILL PROVIDE A MASTER BADGE LIST WITH ALL BADGES TURNED IN AND BADGES NOT
- IN USE CHECKED OFF.
- D. Compare the list of personnel remaining in the Protected Area with the Emergency Assembly Area
- Coordinators accountability reports
. to compile a list of unaccounted for
. perconnel.
l E. Within 30 miner.tr. from the time s. the evacuation and assembly announcemen t, report the l 0 ' '. l accountability STATUS and the names of the unaccounted for personnel to the (Interim) Security Team Leader. F. Contact the Bechtel' Command Posts at i Post 93 and the North Parking Lot to ! determine if any Bechtel or subcontractor personnel are unaccounted for and inform the - (Interim) Security Team Leader. G. As unaccounted for personnel are
- located, immediately provide an update of the accountability STATUS
> to the (Interim). Security Team
- Leader.
I j l 9.1.5.2 For Site Evacuation 1 A. Report to the Administration Guard Station. , B. If the Security Computer is NOT operating, obtain the Master Badge List from the Plant Security Group. t 1 l ! l l
.. *. -3 EP-110 Rev. 2 Page 7 of 9 VAV/t!PG/mgd C. Complete steps 9.1.5.1 B through G of this procedure.
l 9.1.6 (Interim) Security Team Leader shall 9.1.6.1 Report the names of unaccounted for personnel to the (Interim) Emergency i Director. 9.1.6.2 Forward a list of unaccounted for personnel to the (Interim) Personnel 1 Safety Team Leader at the following i locations: l A. Operations Support Center (If . i Technical Support Center is not
! activated).
i B. Technical Support Center (If Technical Support Center is a ac tivated) .
% (- 9.1.6.3 As unaccounted for personnel are located, immediately provide an update of the accountability status'to the (Interim)
Emergency Director and -(Interim) Personnel Safety Team Leader. i i 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 1 9.2.1 (Interim) Emergency Director shall . 9.2.1.1 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader 1 to activate the Search and Rescue Group i if required to locate unaccounted for
- personnel.
i 9.2.1.2 Contact the (Interim) Personnel Safety Team Leader for status updates. 1 10.0 REFERZNCES - .i 10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan , j i l l ' l _ . _ . _ . _ _ _ . . ~ . _ . . , . . - . . . . _ . , . _ . _ . , _ . _ - , _ , _ . _ .m_-._'
o 6 . , o F .10 Rev. 2 eage 9 of 9' VAV/ MPG /mgtf APPENDIX EP-110-1 y EMERGENCY ASSEMBLY AREAS ,
. PRIMKRY KENEMELY KREKS ALTERRKf1T KENEMBLY AREAS GROUP AND TELEPHONE NUMBERS AND TELEPHONE NUMBERS ASSEMBLY AREA COORDINATOR (S)
Control Operators Safe Shutdown Panels Shift Superintendent For Units 1 and 2 Alt: Shift Supervisor Acsit. Control Operators Shif t Supervisfor; (Only if Control Room STA uninhabitable) e 3 d floor Admin Chemist Technicians Chemistry Station Phone - Ext. 2296 Instrusment & Control Senior Person Present l Technicians j
^ ---
2 PRCO E neers _ Escort t Visitors _ _ _ _ _ _ i ra ve . Staff and Unescort'ed Visitors --
- ec t or W Isors
- Subcontractors
- in Restricted ntenance Personne
% p Notes:
(2) If accountability is ra<ps tred they will leave the Protected Area. Otherwise, they will receive further instructions and directions.
=-_- _me . -
6 o . . & , E O Rev. 2
- rage 8 of 9 '
VAV/ MPG /mgd l APPENDIX EP-110-1 % EMERGENCY ASSEMBLY AREAS , ALTERRKf G EERNEY KRgKR-PRIMKWY KNSEMBLY AREAS GROUP E NUMBERS AN M HONE NUMBERS ASSEMBLY AREA _ COORDINATOR (S) None Personnel Safety Team Leader Technical Support Center Staf f s . k 61ans See Note 1 Senior HP TA7TechnIdian f
~~ ~
P nt Operators MRank ing , Ext. P.O., f..P.O., or A.O. Auxiliary Plant Operators None SenIdr ~~Ra nk ing ur at Security Person
~
Notes (1) If the OSC becomes or is uninhabitable one HP Technician shall accompany each Plant Operator or Auxiliary Plant Operator to the Control Room. All other HP Technicians shall report to Admin Bldg. 2ND Floor, HP Office. l (2) If accountability is required they will leave the Protected Area. Othe rwise, they will receive further instructions and directions. s j
s . w . i ). I 3840090170 *P; 20 me g g VA JM/ejt c( i PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-120 SITE EMERCENCY COORDINATOR 1.0 PUPPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines to delineate the responsibilities and actions of the Site Emergency Coordinator. 2.O RESPONSIBfLITIES 2.1 The Site Emergency coordinator is responsibile for supervising the activation and managing the activities
. of the Emergency Operations Facility.
3.0 APPENDICES , Nono - 4.0 PREREQUISITES . ' 4.1 The Site Emergency C en' notified that an Emergency (Ale ra ) exists at Limerick Generati . ,q")}
?LC re 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPPENT . ,
(% None
- 6.0 SYMPTOMS None
m __ 6 . EP-120 Rev. 1 l k Page 2 of 5 VAW/MJM/ejt CD( 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 The position of Site Emergency Coordinator is normally activated at a Site or General Emergency or at the discretion of the Emergency Director. ,, 8.0 PRECAUTIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 The Site Emergency Coordinator shall direct the Load Dispatcher to activate the Site Emergency Coordinator's call list. 9.1.2 For Site and General emergencies, the Site Emergency Coordinator shall: 9.1.2.1 Proceed to the Emergen.cy Operations
~
Facility. 9.1.2.2 Become cognizant of the situation directly from the (Interim) Emergency Director. 9.1.2.3 Announce to EOF personnel that he is assuming the role of site Emergency . Coordinator and inform the (Interim) Emergency Director that he is assuming control of the emergency response organization. 9.1.2.4 Supervise the activation of the EOF. l 9.1.3 The Site Emergency Coordinator shall as
- appropriate request the collection of environmental station samples per EP-C-315, if there has been a'. radioactive material
^
release. .
] 9.1.4 Through the Dose Assessment Team Leader, direct all radiation surveys conducted in off-site areas. i k'
O a/
n l W . o
'l EP-120 Rev. 1 A Page 3 of 5 VAW/MJM/ejt l
9.1.5 Request activation of corporate support functions through dialogue with the Emergency Support Officer. 9.1.6 Upon completion of EP-317, Determination of Protective Action Recommendations, the Site Emergency Coordinator shall: 9.1.6.1 Obtain protective action recommendations ' from the Dose Assessment Team Leader. 9.1.6.2 Discuss recommendations with the (Interim) ; Emergency Director and Emergency Support l Officer to ensure that all parties are : informed of the recommendations before they l are made to government authorities. l 9.1.6.3 Meet with the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania representatives in the Emergency Operations Facility to ensure that questions on protective actions to be applied are answered prior to formal recommendation. 9.1.6.4 Provide protective action recommendations to ij . Pennsylvania Bureau of Radiation Protection. 9.1.6.5 Update these recommendations as new data become available or conditions change. j 9.1.7 Upon completion of EP-318, Liquid Release Dose Calculations for Drinking Water, notify if appropriate downstream water users per EP-287. ., 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 9.2.1 The Site Emergency Coordinator is responsible for the following: 9.2.1.1 Maintaining awareness of plant status and i being alert to potential off-site i consequences of the. emergency. , 9.2.1.2 Conducting per"iodi'c briefings for Emergency Operations Facility personnel. 'L(J:)(g' ye.---. - - - - w , v=m--- ,- - - - , -.--+-y .-..-e.- , . --,. . . . . b...,-,~--q ..-,,-,,. e.-. -,+,-,,.,eer,---.---.%.-m==.-,,,.
l EP-120 Rev. 1 l Page 4 of 5 l A VAW/MJM/ejt I (k 9.2.1.3 Coordinating between the on-site emergency
=
personnel and the off-site emergency personnel, when activated, to obtain necessary additional facilities, equipment, supplies, personnel, or technical services. 9.2.1.4 Coordinating with the Emelgency Support l
' i Officer concerning personnel, equipment, and materials expected to arrive at the plant site.
i 9.2.1.5 Ensuring preparations are made for check-in of incoming personnel, especially with regard to site area access control, l indoctrination of visiting personnel, maintenance of proper security, issuing dosimeters and preparing exposure records, and distribution of protective clothing and equipment. 9.2.1.6 Providing management direction for the establishment and. functioning of the Emergency Suppor t Center.
. 9.2.1.7 Continuing to supervise the operation of the (Jggs_, Emergency Operations Facility.
9.2.1.8 Reviewing with the (Interim) Emergency Director the current status of information provided to governmental agencies and relieving the (Interim) Emergency Director of this responsibility. The Site Emergency coordinator will then serve as the primary contact for Federal, State, and local - emergency response agencies which dispatch personnel to the plant vicinity, and will provide statua c.no assessment information to
-governmental agencies.
9.2.1.9 Provide direction for Philadelphia Electric emergency response personnel who are dispatched to the plant site and for support personnel activated by Philadelphia Electric company. .
~
9.2.1.10 Keeping the Emergency Support Officer, the (Interim) Emergency Director, Federal, and State Government Liaison appraised of actions taken and of consequences off-site. i (f ) 19 l l l
. . _ . _ ._._,____.o
****l EP-120 R2v. 1 Page 5 of 5 A ,
VAW/MJM/ejt t' ,,
-(f 9.2.1.11 Coordinating with the Federal / State
. Government Liaison, (Interim) Emergency Director and the Emergency Support Officer to determine when to terminate the initial phase and enter the recovery phase, informing various agencies and organizations when the modification is to be implemented.
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 EP-203 Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) Activation 10.2 EP-307 Reception and Orientation of Support Personnel 10.3 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action Recommendations 10.4 EP-287 Nearby Public and Industrial Users of Downstream Water 10.5 EP-C-218 'dcalth Physics and Chemistry Coordinator 7 10.6 EP-C-315 Environmental Sampling Coordinator b l t c:') l 1 l
3
, , l ."
EP-201 R2v. I a 3840090180 PEgo 1 of 20 VA' PG/Jmv f . (
.%yk'.
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-201 TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER (TSC) ACTIVATION 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to describe the instructions and actions required for the activation, manning, and operation of the Technical Support Center (TSC). 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES l 2.1 The (Interim) Emergency Director shall direct the activation of the Technical Support Center by i performing the necessary steps of this procedure. 2.2 Shift I & C Technician shall activate the equipment in the TSC. 2.3 Communicators shall man assigned phones and
'v communications log. -
2.4 Status Board Recorders shall obtain and post information on assigned status boards. 2.5 Health Physics Technician shall perform a habitability check of the TSC. , 3-3.0 APPENDICES h i $. , , T + :t V 3.1 EP-201-1 Technica ,t enlel.HVAC System ' Moddi" s 1 y'f41 .?/ \" _ 3.2 EP-201-2 TSC Equipment Acti do'n i. , ,. l 3.3 EP-201-3 LGS Plant Parameter. tatds d '- l 3.4 EP-201-4 Plant Paramet nd Yoard I l 3.5 EP-201-5 Event Chronolo'gy Status Board l 3.6 EP-2dl-6 Offsite Communications Status Board lS) 1>up p p:o. F,; g y 9 pa b y Ued. N s, s i s j e L 2 5ffhas
- ~=-.-
a 3 g* l EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 2 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jmv i EP-201-7 3.7 Staff Assignment Status Board l 3.8 EP-201-8 Fire / Damage Status Board l 3.9 EP-201-9 Dose Assessment Status Board l 2.10 EP-201-10 TSC Telephone Check List 4.0 PREREQUISITES None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT None 6.0 SYMPTOMS f- None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 Activate the TSC when an event has been classified as an Alert, Site Emergency or General Emergency in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergenc,ies, or at the discretion of the (Interim) Emergency Director. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Verify TSC habitability prior to or during activation. l 8.2 Ensure that TSC ventilation system is operating and that air samples are taken periodically to measure potential airborne contamina.t'on. i l 8.3 Ensure that incoming personnel to the site enter the protected area through the TSC Guard Station. g 8.4 If the security computer is not operable ensure Security maintains a sign-in, sign-out log for ' :O (;T personnel reporting to the TSC.
- s. .
_ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . , _ _ .r_ ,_m-=__m . . - . . . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . - _ . . _ . . _ . . _ ,
o l EP-201 Rev. 1
. Page 3 cf ::
I') VAW/ MPG /jev
.j
~~
~
- 9. 0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS l 9.1.1 (Interim) Emergency Direc, tor shall:
9 .1.1.1 Assign a Shift I & C Technician to perforr the steps in Appendix EP-201-1 Placing the Technical Support Center HVAC System in the
' Eme rg en cy ' Mod e a nd to per form the stepr ir Appendix EP-201-2, TSC Equipment Activation.
9.1.1.2 Assign an individual the duties of Emergency Director's Communicator and direct the individual to per form the steps outlined in Section 9.1.3 of this procedure. 9.1.1.3 Direct a BP Technician to perform a habitability check of the,TSC per EP-330, Emergency Response Facility Habitability, if not already completed. _ 9.1.2 The Shift IEC Technician shall: 0],
. 9.1.2.1 Use attached Appendices EP-201-1 and EP-201-2 to turn on lighting, and Particulate, Iodine and Noble Gas (PING)
Monitor, and to place the HVAC in Emergency Mode. l THE TSC HVAC SYSTEM SHOULD BE OPERATING IN THE " NORMAL" MODE, IF NOT, START UP THE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH S81.1.B STARTU'? OF THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. 9.1.3 Emergency Director's Communicator shall: l 9.1.3.1 Using Appendix EP-201-10, TSC Telephone Checkoff List, verify communications capability exists from the Technical Support Center. . f . l l 9.1.3.2 Inform the (Interim) Emergency Director wher. the communications capabilities have been verified or of any discrepancies. If there are any problems have the Shift IEC technician call 'nd ask for y j telecommunications on-call personnel. s/ , I i t--_---_------ - . -- . .. - -
l' l EP-2Cl Rev. 1 j Page 4 of 20
' VAW/ MPG /jmv
(_T fi
/
V - 9.1.3.3 Man communications lines as directed by the (Interim) Emergency Director and maintain a l communications documentation containing information received from and sent to l emergency response personnel and offsite agencies. ! { The log shall include as a minimum the following information: A. Date and Time (use 24 hour time notation) 1 B. Messages received or sent C. Name of person information was received or sent to and location D. Name and initials of person making entries 9.1.3.4 Inform the (Inter im) Emergency Director promptly of all significant information ( received from other emergency response ("/ \ personnel and offsite . agencies. l . l 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 9.7.1 Emergency Director shall: 9.2.1.1 Ensure that the TSC Guard Station is activated, in accordance with EP-208, Security Team Activation. 9.2.1.2 Direct the commonicator to call in additional personnel if ne9ded. Use EP-280, Technical Support Center Group Phone List. 9.2.1.3 Assure that individuals are available as Status Board Recorders for necessary status boards. l A. LGS Plant Parameter Status Board l B. Plant Parametet Trends Board f l C. Event Chronology Status Board J l D. Offsite Communications Status Board i l E. Staff Assignment Status Board I- _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -
- y _ , l EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 5 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jmv gg(!'
{ F. Fire / Damage Status Board. l G. Dose Assessment Status Board. WHERE APPLICABLE, MAINTAIJJ DOCUMENTATION ON STATUS BOARDS
~
9.2.1.4 Direct the Status Board Recorder (s) to perform the steps outlined in Section 9.2.2 of these Follow-up Actions.
~
9.2.1.5 Assign an individual to man the communication lines to the Control Room and Operations Support Center and direct the individual to perform the steps outline 6 in Section 9.2.3 of this procedure. 9.2.1.6 If necessary, assign two individuals to man the telephone consoles and direct the individuals to perform the steps outlined in Section 9.2.3 of this procedure. 9.2.1.7 If necessary, assign a communicator to the Field Survey Group Leader for sending field (('}
,~j ( , survey data, and other information to the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) and to perform the steps outlined in Section 9.2.3 of this procedure.
9.2.1.8 Assign individuals to be data display operators.
~
9.2.1.9 Inform the Control Room when the Technica3 Suppor t Center is operational and manned, assuming control of its des!gnated responsibilities. 9.2.1.10 Brief the TSC staff on their arrival and periodically (normally every 30 minutes) on the status of the pertinent plant conditions. 9.2.1.11 Contact the various Team Leaders for periodic status updates as necessary. 9.2.2 Status Board Recorders shall: j 9.2.2.1 Fill in their assigned status board (s) . ( ) (;f Format and content of the status board are l given in the following appendices:
l EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 6 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jmv j A._ Appendix EP-201-3, LGS Plant Parameter Status Board B. Appendix EP-201-4, Plant Parameter Trends Status Board ., l C. Appendix E'-201-5, Event Chronology Status Board l D. Appendix EP-201-6, Offsite Communications Status Board l E. Appendix EP-201-7, Staff Assignment Status Board l F. Appendix EP-201-8, Fire / Damage Status Board l G. Appendix EP-201-9, Dose Assessment Status Board 9.2.2.2 Contact the following individuals for the various status board information. f )(;j A. Data Display Operators for plant parameter status and plant parameter trend information. l E. Emergency Director's communicator or Control Room for event chronology information. C. Emergency Director's Communicator for offsite communication information. D. Emergency Director's Communicator for staff assignment information. E. OSC Coordinator for site radiological status. F. Field Survey Group Leader for field survey status. . G. Fire and Damage Control Team Leader for Fire / Damage Status Board. H. Dose Assessment Team Leader for Dose
, Assessment Status Board.
a
~
l
--....-___...-_----_..,~.__,.__.,,.-._.--_,_.__.$.._,__.,_.,,,_....--_..
-.._,--.,._,.__.m_,,,__ . _ , -
. i r_. _ .-- -
l- EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 7 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jmv i (0 - 9.2.2.3 Ac-information is received, post on assigned status board and maintain documentation of appropriate status board entries. 9.2.2.4 Transmit plant status information and event chronology information to appropriate Status Board Recorders at the EOF, if activated. 9.2.2.5 Review and update the status board as changes in plant conditions or information warrant. ' ~ l 9.2.2.6 Inform the appropriate Team Leaders as significant changes in status board information are noted. 9.2.3 Communicators shall: 9.2.3.1 When directed, use EP-280, Technical Support Center Group Phone List to call in additional personnel. 9.2.3.2 Man assigned communication lines or gg consoles. h / N;f Maintain a communications log containing 9.2.3.3 information received from and sent to other energency response facilities and other-support organizations. i The log shall include as a minimum the following information: , A. Date and time (use 24 hour time notation) B. Summary of messages received or sent C. Name of person information was received
- from or sent to i
. D. Name and initials of person making i entries ,
, 9.2.3.4 Inform the Emergene'y Director or appropriate l Team Leader promptly of all significant information received from or sent to members
, of the emergency response organization or suppor t organizations.
x l l I i
l EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 8 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jmv (3_:' > v l
'(
9.2.4 HP Technician shall: 9.2.4.1 Periodically confirm habitability per EP-330, Emergency Response Facilities Habitability. re
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1. Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG 0654 - Criteria for Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Nuclear Power Plants. 10.3 NUREG 0696 - Functional Criteria for Emergency Response Facilities. 10.4 EP-280 - Technical Support Center Group Phone List. 10.5 EP-330 - Emergency Response Facilities Habitability 10.6 S81.1.B - Startup of the Technical Support Center i Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning System - e 0 v 4 e e t 06
l EP-201 Rev. 1 - Page 9 of 2C VAW/t:PG/jmv (e a. i APPENDIX EP-201-1 TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER HVAC SYSTEM EMERGENCY MODE' l 1. When the Shif t I&C Technician arrives at the TSC, EVAC System should be operating in the ' Normal' mode per procedure S81.1.E _ Startup of The Technical Support Center Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning System. If not, start up the system per S81.1.B. A TWO POSITION MANUAL SWITCH, LOCATED IN THE DISPLAY AREA ON THE EASTERN COLUMN IS PROVIDED FOR SWITCHING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT
- CENTER'S EEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FROM THE NORMAL MODE OF OPERATION TO THE EMERGENCY MODE OF OPERATION.
- 2. Turn the control switch on the eastern column of the display area to its " EMERGENCY" position in order to actuate the emergency mode.
- 3. Inform the Emergency Director that the HVAC System is functioning in the ' Emergency' mode.
l VERIFY THE FOLLOWING:
- 4. Fan ME-03 is activated.
[))
~ l
- 5. The fan flow rate is 3000 cfm as read on the airflow monitor panel in the mechanical equipment room.
I 6. MSl closes. l 7. Exhaust Fan ME-07 stops. D I
O C) . . % . l [' - EP- [ A ev. 1 Page of 20 , VAW/ MPG /jmv i APPENDIX EP-201-3 , LGS PLANT PARAMETER STATUS - UNIT NO. . Radiological Parameters Time Reactor Parameters Time DATE: ________ North Stack uC1/cc uCi/sec Power North Stack FT6w crm Level inches i South Stack uCi/cc uCL/sec Pressure psig ' South Stack Flow cfm D/W Rad Monitor R/hr Level Control Time ' R/X Encl Exh ar/hr Reactivity Control Time Refuel Floor Exh. mr/hr Air Ejector Offgas ar/hr i Of Rods not inserted F.W.A. on Unavail/ Reason cpm B R/W Monitor C SBLC Ini. Unavail/ Reason CRD A ,l Meteorological Parameters Time A _ B B HPCI C RCIC Ave. Wind Direction (from) Cond. A Ave. Ambient Temp. degrees P B Precipitation __ C i Stability Class C.S.A Wind Speed ( ) _ (Tower 1) Pressure Control Time B Wind Speed ( (Tower 2) C
)
Wind Speed ( . - ) (Satellite) IBypass Valves Open D
- LPCI A ,
POWER SUPPLIES Time SRV's A_B CDEFGHJKLMNS B Source Supplying Unavall/ Reason Open C 220 kv Closed D . I 1 offsite was or,en RHRSW A B 500 kV I; 2 offsite C D-1 D D-2 Cond. D-3 Trans. D-4 Refuel Bus Offsite Diesell Unavail Trans. D1 1 , SBLC _ DL 2 D1 3 :I D1_4 ,, 1
m 1 . _ _ . .. _ y- 5 2 l l l EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 10 of 2C VAW/ MPG /jmv
. APPENDIX EP-201-2 TSC'EOUIPMENT ACTIVATION
- 1. Enter the TSC Display area and turn on display area lighting
] switches on the wall by the entry door andby the conference
- c. room.
- 2. Turn on the Particulate-Iodine-Noble Gas Monitor (PING) located in the equipment room.
- 3. Turn on CRT's per posted procedures.
- 4. Check the radios in the equipment room for operability.
l 5. Inform the (Interim) Emergency Director when the TSC Equipment setup is complete and of any equipment problems. 'I 4 4 e e o u' -
,-. , , - - , - . , - . , , - - - -, - ,.. , ,,. ,.,,- . . - . . . , , , , . - , , - . . , . . - . , , , ,, -n ,
l
~
f>- EP- C g ev. 1-
@%'" %. Page . of 20 .
VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-201-3 (CONT'D) , LGS PLhMT PARAMETER _ STATUS - UNIT NO. (C_ONT1D}_ DATE:
- 4
- Containment Parame'ters Drywell pressure psig Containment Control Time Drywell Temp F '
; Suppression Pool Temp f .
- Suppression Pool Level it Sup. Sup. Spray Containment 402 TRT- Pool Pool D/W S/D Unavall/
j RHR Cool Spray Spray Cool Reason , 1 A B C D 4 RHRSM On Unavall/ Reason A B , C
- D Isolations Isolated / Exceptions i I MSIV II RRR j .
III RWCU VII Containment j VII MISC SGTS On Unavail/ Reason l Train A ' B ! Fan A 1 B ! i Containment H2 Recombiners i ON Unavail/ Reason
. A l .B
,' ' i t '
- il .
*; l .}i . '
I'
* - g 10v _ , ,, _ ~ .
2mj _ _ ~ _ vf/ _ _ ~ -
) oG _ -
P _ _
.M _
(b"1/ W , = - eA
- gV Pa EP _
e S D 4 N
- E 1 R 0 T 2 .
- R P E E T E
X M G'# I D A R N A E P P P T A N A . L P t f c F l e e p s s v m r / e e e h 1 g g eL T / C i i r R u s n s gl l p4 i p e o o d d ' . d o o a a s rl s P P R R . s ee s p e w v e m n n t k r o e r e o o n c P P L P Ti iF e a
' s s m t r r r l l s ss n S
" o oo l l e ee i t t t e e r re a h e c cc w w p pr t t m a a a y y p pg n r i e ee r r u ue o o TRRR DDSSd C N l
i I
- - - - - - ~ . - - . '
, , _ . .-~
*
- J ,
l EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 14 of 20 ( 's VAW/ MPG /jr.v O. ) APPENDIX EP-201-5 l EVENT CHRONOLOGY STATUS BOARD ' DAT: .
. TIME EVENT EVENT q . . ,
M l 1
- . l O
4
=._ _ . -- . _ , _ _ _ _ .
s ,.
, l EP-2Cl Rev. 1 Page 15 of 20 m VAW/ MPG /jmv
<{
APPENDIX EP-201-6 OFFSITE COMMUNICATIONS STATUS BOARD DATE: .. OFFSITE TDiE COMMUNICATIONS RESPONSE / COMMENT-t i l
~
I . I I I 9
?
?
l 9 I l 1 j 4 I 9 O b.. . , I _ .-. . - - , . . . . , - . . ....--.....i.-._..,,,-_..__....-.-.,-_,_._.----..--......---,-._---..,__..._,._-
'"**N. . _ 4 . ,;,_ . . ,-7~ .
_ _7' --
, 9 ,
. I EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 16 of 20
(""' . VAW/ MPG /jmv Q~ )) . . % APPENDIX EP-201-7 STAFF ASSIGNMENT STATUS BOARD l l DATE: EMERGENCY TITLE NAME BADGE i EMERGENCY TITLE NAME Emergency Shift Director Superintend en t Personnel Safety Shift Team Leader Supervisor Fire and Damage Team Leader Dose Assessment Team Leader Chem. Sampling & Analysis Team Leader Field Survey Site Emergency Group Leader Coordinator Security Team Leader f Technical Support (- Group Leader US NRC ~ 4 Repre senta tive OSC Coordinator Emergency Support Of fice r i 4 1 l
- l l
- - . -. . . : = :uz -- . _
_, 9 , l EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 17 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jmv
', e APPENDIX EP-201-8 FIRE / DAMAGE STATUS BOARD J DATE:
- TIME LOCATION DESCRIPTION REPAIR STATUS !
1 I l J l 4 e 4 o t.
?
I O ___- _g a l i e G 9 Ob . s t t a 3 i _ -- _ - . . , _,,.._.~,_.~..,_...-,m -......m,w,,.mw,%,_m..,,.,.,.. ._ - _ m %__--,,_y,y. , , , , . , _ , _ , _ , . _ , , , _ . ,,,,..,.w-_-
i f EP-2t Rev. 1 , l l Page 18 of 20 VAW/ MPG /.jmv ,,' d. APPENDIX EP-201-9 ,; l ' DOSE ASSESSMENT DATA STATUS BOARD { L. Wind Direction: NOBt.E GAS IODINE f Turb. Class: T= T= T= T= T= T= T= T= T= T= . Date: Gindepeed (mph) Release Point: l i Dose _ Rate _(ar/hr) __ Integrated _ Dose ( r) _ Est. Release Dose in T+2 hr (r) t l Dose in T+6 hr . (r) __, Potential Release i Dose Rate (ar/ht) Source Term Study i Integrated Dose ( r) , Est. Activity:
! Dose in T+2 hr (r)
Dose in T+6 hr (r) __ Est. Release Rate
! Dose Rate (ar/hr)
Integrated Dose ( r) Dose in T+2 hr (r) _ Highest Off Site Dose in T+6 hr (r) Dose Rate: i 1 Dose Rate (ar/hr) _ i
- Integrated Dose ( r) _
Dose in T+2'hr Cr? Dose in T+6 hr i,r.l ~ i Dose Rate (ar/hr) . i
! Integrate Dose L r) i Dose in T+2 hr I;r)
Dose in T+6 hr I;r) l
; Dose Rate (ar/hr) -
~~~ '
Integrated Dose ( r) - ]j Dose in T+2 hr (r)
.I I
t . I l
- .-- I
]
EP-201 Rev. 1 Page 19 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jrc ; APPEMDIX EP-201-10
/ TSC PHOT:E CHECK LIST Test Prelude Phones for Dial Tone YES/NO Located at Emergency Director's Desk: '
Emercen Notificat OSC Corporate Spokesma Control Room / EOF (
, Mana ment Circui EOF In NRC Office (Red Phone)
NRC (located in display area) (Red Phone) In Conference Room (Brown Phone) In Emergency Director Office (Brown Phone) l At Dose Assessment Team Lead er's Desk : l (Green Phone) l Q( Field Survey (Yellow Phone) EBureau of Radiation Protect (In Dose Assessnent Room) (Yellow Phone)
~
l l At Techriical Support Group Leader's Desk ureau of Radiation Protection ~ Technical (White Phone)
\
l At Personnel Sa fety Team Leader's Deskt acuation Asse=bly (Beige Phone) j At Fire and Damage Team Leader's Desk:
) intenance Coordination (Brown Phone) l In Telephone Switch Room:
'nergency Communica tions (Brown Phone)
Lob
j, - i l EP-201 Rev. 1 ' Page 20 of 20 VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-201-10 TSC PHONE CHECK LIST (CONT'D) l( YES/NO l Test Station Phones for Dial Tone (Black Phone) ERFDS Computer Terminal Emergency Analysis Team Phone Fire / Damage Team Leader Telecopier
. Technical Engineer Emergency Director Office Emergency Director Conference Room i NRC Office '
Personnel Safety Team Leader i Personnel Dosimetry Field Survey Group Leader Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader 42618/f2617 Dose Assessment Team Leader Dose Assessment Group l Security Team Leader
< Personnel Accountability
(, Emergency Preparedncss Coordinator Status Boards , ! Telephone Swite.h Room , l Test Brown Conference Desk Phones for Dial Tone Emergency Director's Desk i B Technical Suppor t Group Leader' Conference Koon l Test Outside Lines Black Phones'- ! Emergency Director Emergency Director Of fice Dose Assessment Team Leader Desk NRC Office NRC Of fice i M b
- i L
OL
- I 3840090190 EP-202 Rev. 1 8 Page 1 of S 1,
VAW PG/jmv m, r PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPPNY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-202 OPERATIONS SUPPORT CENTER (OSC) ACTIVATION 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the actions required by the Operations Support Center Coordinator to activate, man and manage the Operations Support Center (OSC). 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Operations Support Center Coordinator shall activate the OSC by performing the necessary steps in this procedure. 3.0 APPENDICES ,r .. c' y N. 3.1 Appendix EP-202-1 OSC - o'f-As_$ignment Status Board -
, T;j,4
s.<- . 3.2 Appendix EP-202-2 - .As'signment Status Board 4 3.3 1ppendir. EP-2 i Pla k s.atatut Boar $
] 3.4 Appendix EP-20 0SC 'd k ist onQw s
4.0 PREREQUISITES None V, , L LO O l<-)fcajl 7 2 0 Ef'I 'f s s he nn aaa e:a La-a tJ a
-y * - ' - -
4 t EP-202 Rev. 1
.. Page 2 of 8
*~
VAW/ MPG /jmv h( ) - j L
- SPECIAL EOUIPMENT
- 5.0 5.1 Portable Area Radiation Monitor
' 6.0 SYMPTOMS None
~
7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 The Operations Support Center is activated when an event has been classified as an Alert, Site or General , Emergency in accordance with EP-101, Classification of l Emergencies, or at the discretion of the Emergency 4 Director.
?
_ 8.0 PRECAUTIONS k
' 8.1 Verify habitability of Operations Support Center in kh3 accordance with'EP-330, Emergency Response Facility l Habitability.
8.2 Personnel shall log in and out of the Operations Support Centers in order to maintain personnel accountability. 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 Operations Support Center Coordinator shall: 9.1.1.1 Assign an individual the duties of Operations Support Center Communicator and Status Board Keeper. Use Appendices EP-202-1, EP-202-2,,'EP-202-3 for status board formats. - k' 9.1.1.2 Direct the establishment and The maintenance of l a log of pertinent events. log keeper can be any available maintenance person or O- (":,
/ technician. .
EP-232 Rev. 1
- Page 3 of e VAW/ MPG /jmv l
7_ (V 9.1.1.3 Direct the Operations Support Center communicator to verify operability of the telephones between the OSC and the TSC and Control Room (in accordance with Appendix EP-202-4, OSC Telephone Check List) and maintain the status board *; 9.1.1.4 Notify the (Interim) Emergency Director when the Operations Support Center is manned and communications are satisfactory between the l Control Room, Technical Suppor t Center and the Operations Support Center. l 9.1.1.5 Have Health Physics check out equipment. l 9.1.1.6 Have Health Physics set up a portable area radiation monitor (if available) or use a survey meter to monitor radiation levels.
] 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 9.2.1 Operations Support Center Coordinator shall:
. 9.2.1.1 Remain available for contact with the Control Room or TSC in order to provide f ( - l personnel for emergenc,y teams.
9.2.1.2 Direct personnel entering or leaving the Operations Support Center to log in or out using the Operations Support Center log. 9.2.1.3 Contact the Emergency Director for additional manpower, if needed. . 9.2.1.4 Upon leaving the Operations Support Center for any reason, d legate the duties to the
] senior remaining perator or HP technician.
9.2.1.5 Assign Health Physics to periodically confirm habitability using EP-330, Emergency Response Facility Babitability. ; l 9.2.1.6 In the event the OSC becomes unhabitable, l I direct personnel as,follows: A. Plant Operators and Auxiliary Plant Operators report to the Control Room. i I t i i i l ' l
_. -- __ _ _- . _ . _. . - ._= - - EP-202 Rev. 1
- Page 4 of E VAW/ MPG /jmv
\
HP Technicians: One HP Technician B. should accompany each Plant Operator or Auxiliary Plant Operator to the Control Room. All remaining HP Technicians shall report to Admin. Bldg. , 2nd Floor
- HP&C Area. o
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 Nureg 0654, Rev. 1 - Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. 10.3 Nureg 0696 - Functional Criteria for Emergency Response Facilities. 10.4 10 CFR 20 10.5 EP-330 - Emergency Response Facilities Habitability b l-e t e G I (( .
~. . , . _ _ ._ ._ - __ . _ _ _ - - , , _ , _ __ --- .-~._.,. . _ _ - _ _ . - , - . . _ _ . - - _ _ , . . . . , , _ _ .__._ -_m,,
EP-202 Rev. 1 l Pace 5 of E i VAS/ MPG /j:r.v
~ APPENDIX EP-202-1 OSC - OPERATOR ASSIGNMENT STATUS BOARD DATE:
ESTIMATED MAINTENANCE RETURN JOB OPERATORS TIME } SENT(NAME) CALLED TIME DESCRIPTION o O e n l
._ . . - . _ _ . . _ - . . - - . . ~ - - - . .. -
1 ;-- -_ .~ EP-202 Rev. 1
- Page 6 of 8 VAW/ MPG /jmv I
..- \
._,... APPENDIX EP-202-2 OSC - HP ASSIGNMENT STATUS BOARD DATE:
ESTIMATED , HP'S SENT RADIATION RETURN I JOB (NAME) PROBLEMS TIME l TIME DESCRIPTION l 9 9 e i go GD
--m - ----
,p_ _ . -~ ; .- ------:
l
. EP-202 Rev. 1 Page 7 of 8
'O VAW/ MPG /jmv l d
,. (
s APPENDIX EP-202-3 OSC PLANT STATUS BOARD UNIT TIME EMERGENCY CLASS: l RX LEVEL 2: HPCI: 13 KV Bus 1: A: B: C: RCIC: Condensate Pumps Recirc Pumps A: B: D 2: D 3: D 4: 4 KV Bus D 1: D 2: D 3: D 4: Diesel D 1: B: C D: RHR At A B: C: D: p 8 RHRSW (, " Core C: D: Spray A: B: A: B: C: D ESW B CRD A: Pumps A B C A B C SBLC Valves SBGT SBGT Filter A At B: SBGT Filter B Fans i Containment B: H2 Recomb. As Air Compressors: A B: Service Air:
- Backup Service Air:
~~
(0 (b
EP-202 Rev. I ; -. Pace 8 of G VAE/ MPG /jmv
'\ )
APPENDIX EP-202-4
, j.
OSC - EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT INVEN"'ORY LIST l i
^ . !
/ .
f
]
Check the followine phones for dial tone: ' I YES/NO ,
\ OSC Prelude Phones: !
(Beige Phone) fI l
)
OSC/TSC (Light Blue Phone) l EControlRoom/OSC YES/NO t I
\ OSC Station Phones (Black): j I
)
l l 1 l h O'. t O
. _. ~w _- . _ _. ._ ..
7
~ ,\ s ~ 3840090200 , l EP-203 Rev. 1 Page 1 of 19 VAW G/jmv 6 -
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
# l LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-203 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) ACTIVATION 1
1.0 PURPOSE l The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the activation, manning, and conduct of operations of the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF). 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1' The Dose Assessment Team Leader or other individual appointed by Emergency Director shall activate the EOF by performing the necessary steps in this procedure. 2.2 The Site Emergency Coordinator's Communicator shall man communication lines and log information. 2.3 The Site Emergency Coordinator shall direct operation at the EOF. -_
,fy4 2.4 The Status Board Recorders shall obtai,n and6ppst ,
information. p,. '. > y; ' 3.0 APPENDICES (b y,
.lt. r .* y.
([' .- 9 l 3.1 EP-203-1 LGS Plant Para ter S u on M l 3.2 EP-203-2 Plant Parameter Trends k l 3.3 EP-203-3 Event Chronology Board l 3.4 EP-203-4 Staff Assignment Sliatus Board l 3.5 EP-203-5 Headquarters Support Requests Status Board 3.6 EP-203-6 Offsite Communications Status Board
\Obl l 3.7 EP-203-7 st .
Dag ,tus Boar i j Mdj ., h g /7 L ix
;, 4 t;
OE bYi d Iiny p tk y[ajjk p
t_..-. _ o ,' ,
- l. EP-203 Rev. 1 Page 2 5 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv l
W .1'
'=-
EOF Phone Check List 3.8 EP-203-8 3.9 EP-203-9 EOF Equipment Activation 4.0 PREREQUISITES None 5.0 . SPECI AL EQUIPMEh7_ None 6.0 SYMPTOMS None e 7.0 ACTION LEVEL
~
7.1 The EOF is activated when an event has been classified as a Site Emergency or General Emergency in accordance with EP-101, Classification of Emergencies, or at the discretion of the Site Emergency Coordinator or l (Interim) Emergency Director. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Maintain accountability of personnel and staff reporting to the EOF throughout .the incident. 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS - . l PERSONNEL ARE DESIGNATED AND ASSIGNED GENERAL DUTIES IN THE EOF BY EP-279, EOF GROUP PHONE LIST. t 9.1.1 The Dose Assessment Team Leader or other () - lEM l designated personnel shall
- . , , - - , _ --- --. - - . - . - - , , ---y--,, ,.-- ---~. - - ---- -. ---.-w.-,.-.w w-r- - - ~ - -
'i __
. , .s .
, l EP-203 Rev. 1 Page 3 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv 9.1.1.1 Obtain keys for EOF from the Plymouth Dispatch office.
9.1.1.2 Assign the first available person to the l entrance of the EOF to conttol access and to )
- establish a log for the purposes of j personnel accountability. )
l ENSURE THAT PERSONNEL SIGN IN AND OUT AND l THAT ONLY INDIVIDUALS WITH OFFICIAL BUSINESS i ARE ALLOWED TO ENTER THE EOF. l 9.1.1.3 Assign an individual (as soon as one is available), the duties of the Site Emergency Coordinator Communicator. The communicator ; shall perform the steps outlined in Section ' 9.1.2. Until a communicator is available the Site Emergency Coordinator shall perform l the communicator's duties. 9.1.2 The Site Emergency Coordinator Communicator 4 shall 9.1.2.1 Use Appendix EP-203-9, EOF Equipment k(up_ Activation, to activate the EOF equipment. j 9.1.2.2 . Verify communications capability by completing Appendix EP-203-8, EOF Phone Check List. 9.1.2.3 Use EP-279, Emergency Operations Facility l Group Phone List to call in additional . j personnel to staff the EOF, if necessary. -
! 9.1.2.4 Inform the Dose Assessment Team Leader or alternate when the above communications ; capabilities have been verified or of any j problems.
t As personnel arrive, man communications 9.1.2.5 lines on the Site Emergency Coordinator's l desk and maintain a communications log ; containing information received from and sent to other facilities and other i i organizations.
] ENSURE ALL PERTINENT ACTIONS AND NOTIFICATIONS ARE LOGGED.
i (:) I __-___---..__.,,..-,.--..._...-,--,.------~,..,.,-__,...,-,-,,_,,v,-,.~. _ , - , . . , - - .-,-,,,nn,,...,,,.
.- , - . , - - . . :. I-- . . . ...r.. . . , . - - ,,
._--- l
. t- .
l EP-203 Rev. 1
- ' Page 4 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv L# 9.2 FOLLOW-UP l SITE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR SHALL ASSUME CONTROL AFTEF.
HE HAS ARRIVED AND IS COGNIZANT OF THE SITUATION. 9.2.1 Site Emergency Coordinator shall: l 9.2.1.1 Assign personnel to be status board keeperr and direct them to perform the steps
- outlined in section 9.2.4 of this procedure.
l A. LGS Plant Parameter Status Board _l B. Plant Parameter Trends Board l C. Event Chronology Status Board l D. Staff Assignment Status Board E. Headquarters Support Requests Status Board
-l F. Offsite Communications Status Board
}l l
G. Dose Assessment Data *. Status Board 9.2.1.2 Ensure that an individual has been assigned as the Site Emergency Coordinator's Communicator. 9.2.1.3 Inform the Technical Support Center when til)e ! Emergency Operations Facility is i operational, manned and in control of its designated responsibilities. l 9.2.1.4 Brief the EOF Staff periodicially on the
] status of the emergency and pertinent plant conditions.
9.2.1.5 Direct transmittion of all Status Board l information to appropriate Headquarters Emergency Support Center Status Board l Recorders. . 9.2.3 Dose Assessment Team Leader shall: 9.2.3.1 Complete the Dose Assessment Team Activation 1 I hl in accordance with EP-210, Dose Assessment Team Activation. i 1
= - . _ . - . - - - . - -
, _w....~~...~..
3 - --- EP-203 Rev. 1 I Page 5 of 19
. VAW/ MPG /jmv I:
9.2.4 Status Board Recorders shall: 9.2.4.1 Fill in their assigned status board (s), i Format and content of the St'atus Boards are given in the following appendices: A. Appendix EP-203-1, LGS Plant Parameter l Status Board B. Appendix EP-203-2, Plant Parameter Trends Status Board C. Appendix EF-203-3, Event Chronology l Status Board D. Appendix EP-203-4, Staf f Assignment l Status Board E. Appendix EP-203-5, Headquarters Suppor t l Requests Status Board l F. Appendix EP-203-6, Offsite
-/ Communications Status Board I
G. Appendix EP-203-7, Dose Assessnent Data Status Board 9.2.4.2 Contact the following individuals for the, l various Status information. . A. TSC Plant Parameter Status Board Recorder for Plant Status information. B. TSC Event Chronology Status Board, Recorder for Event Chronology information. C. Site Emergency Coordinator's Communicator for . Staff Assignment Information and Beadquarters Support I Requests. -
- b. Emergency Director's Communicator Site Emergency Coordinator's Communicator or l 7-( )j 4: - Control Room Communicator for off site
(~ c- communication information.
,, -- ~. - - , . - -
. ., . _ ~ - --- l
~ .. . '
i . j EP-203 Rev. 1 . Page 6 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv
; E. Field Survey Group Leader for field survey data.
F. Dose Assessnent Team Leader for dose assessment data. . Y 9.2.4.3 Post appropriate information on assigned status board and maintain a log of all status board entries. 9.2.4.4 Review and update the status boards as changes in plant conditions or information warrant. 9.2.4.5 Inform the appropriate Coordinator, Team or Group Leader as significant changes in status board information are noted.
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan {. 7, 10.2 NUREG 0654 - Criteria for Preparation and Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Pl'ans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. 10.3 NUREG 0696 - Functional Criteria for Emergency Response Facilities. , 10.4 EP-279 - Emergency Operations Facility Group Phone List 10.5 EP-210 - Dose Assessment Team Activation e 1 OO
/~ ~
.Q U
.. t l g,.
? {~' EP-2 b v. 1 .
Page . af 19" , VAW/ MPG /jmv L APPENDIX EP-203-1 .. . LGS PLANT PARAMETER STATUS - UNIT NO. i Radiological Parameters Time Reactor Parameters Time DATE:
~
North Stack uCi/cc uC1/sec Power 4
~~~~~
North Stack Flow cfm Level inches South Stack uC1/cc _ _ _uci/sec Pressure psig South Stack Flow cfm D/W Rad Monitor R/hr R/X Encl Exh ar/hr Reactivity Control Time Level Control Time 4 Refuel Floor Exh. mr/hr i Air Ejector Offgas ar/hr i Of Rods not inserted F.W.A. on Unavail/ Reason , 4 R/W Monitor cpm B
.. C SBLC Inj. Unavail/ Reason CRD A [.
Meteorological Parameters Time A B B HPCI C EdIC Ave. Wind Direction (from) Cond. A Ave. Ambient Temp. degrees F SBLC Tank Level B Precipitation C Stability Class U 5.A Wind Speed ( ) (Tower 1) Pressure Control Time B Wind Speed ( ) (Tower 2) C Wind Speed ( ) (Satellite) SBypass Valves Open D LPCI A PONER SUPPLIES Time SRV's A B CDEFGHJKLMNS B Source Supplying Unavail/ Reason Open C 220 kv Closed D 1 offsite was open NHNKR A f 500 kv B . 2 offsite C D-1 D D-2 Cond. D-3 Trans. D-4 Eefuel Trans. Bus Offsite Diese19 Unavail ggCC D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 [ f l D1 4 3 i a
l p -- (~' EP-2Cd'7ev. 1 . VI '
, Pag 6 of 19' .i VAW/ MPG /jmv APPENDIX EP-203-1 - '
LGS PLANT PARAMETER _ STATUS - UNfT NO. JCONT'DL DATE: Containment Parameters . Drywell pressure psig Containment Control Time Drywell Temp f Suppression Pool Temp f
- Suppression Pool Level ft Sup. Sup. [
Containment 102 %H2 Pool Pool D/W S/D Unavail/ RHR Cool Spray Spray Cool Reason A B C D RHRSW On Unavail/ Reason A B ' C D i Isolations Isolated / Exceptions l I MSIV ! II RHR 1
.. III RWCU VII Containment i VII MISC 4
SGTS On Unavail/ Reason
- Train A B .
Fan A B Containment H2 Recombiners , On Unava1I2 Reason i A B i lI
k < , (. P , I I 19v 1mj vf/ _ m eoG _ hR 9M P
/
eW g
-. aV gA - _ _
PP _ _ E m _ e M S D 2 N .
- E 3 R 0 T 2
- R P E g
E T # E X M I A D R ' N A E P P P T AN A L P t f c F l e e p s s v m r / e e e h i ig g e L T / C i r R u s n s g l l p % i p e o o d d d o o a a s r l s P P R R s e e s p e w v e m n n t k _ r o e r e o o n ca P P L P T is iF e _ s m t ss n r r r l l s S
# o o o l l e ee i _
t t t e e r re a h [ E e c c ca w w p pr t t T m a a y y p pg n r A i e e e r r u ue o o D T R R R D D S Sd C N l
; ;l
_ u. ., __.__ .---,,_- . _ _ _ . -. ._ _ _ . __ . _ em. l EP-203 Rev. 1
- Page 10 of 19
< VAW/ MPG /jmv
- .b i
- APPENDIX EP-203-3 EVENT CHRONOLOGY STATUS BOARD DATE: .
l. TIME EVENT EVENT I NO. 4 t l a i . . j 1 1 4 1 6 1 . i I I J i 9
^--e i
l (OG t
. , _ , . _ _ ,-____m,_ y_, ,.r-.y,-,y.__.y-,,-- -
y_w.,,--,_,e-,y,_,_,y_y.mm... mm,_ ,,,,,-...m , .. ,
i . s EP-203 Rev. 1 l Page 11 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv
- APPENDIX EP-203-4 3 ,
STAFF ASSIGNMENT STATUS BOARD l Date:
' TITLE NAME LOCATION SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT SHIFT SUPERVISOR
. EMERGENCY DIRECTOR PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM LEADER FIRE / DAMAGE TEAM LEADER SITE EMERG. COORD.
HEALTH PHYSICS / CHEM. COORD . DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM LEADER e' - ( )/
'\_,) r. -
CHEMISTRY SAMPLING & ANALYSIS TEAM LDR. FIELD SURVEY GROUP LEADER EOF LIAISON - CORP. COMM. PROCEDURE SUPPORT COORDINATOR PLANNING AND SCHEDULING COORDINATOR MECH. ENGR, LIAISON ELEC. ENGR. LIAISON EMERGENCY SUPPORT OFFICER
/
I b k(_) i t
e . __ __
. 3 .
EP-203 Rev. 1 I Page 12 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv O, ~' APPENDIX EP-203-5 I
. HEADOUARTERS SUPPORT REQUESTS STATUS BOARD j l Date:
. TIME SUBMITTED TO ITEM RESPONSE STATUS t
1-i i i (0
- w %t' i
i i J 4 i , I 4
<O b 1
1 I
5 -
) EP-203 Rev. 1 Page 13 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv s
^^
APPENDIX EP-203-6 OFFSITE COf'liUNICATIONS STATUS BOARD DATE:
- e. OFFSITE TIf!E COMMUNICATIONS RESPONSE / COMMENT O
e e l ( O~' .
lj j' iI .1
. e '
19v 1a s
. j ey e vf/ sd t e eoG au a t
. P et R i 4M t lSy S r0 31/
2eA W i n o s e a e Rmi rv t e s a f f : gV P e lei e Oe Pa l aTt l t EP e e i c e ta s R tea R sR _ s a ee tl t
. nc.
er tut t e he gs . ae DR s oos s io E PSE E HD
=
T
=
T D R = A E T O N B I D S O = ' 0 I T 3 0 = 2 T
- P n: E r'
76
=
X T I D N E = P T P A S
. S A
_ S G = _ A T _ E E L - _ S B _ O O = D N T
=
T
)
r ) ) ) ) r r r ) r
) ) )) ) ) )) r ) ) )
) ( r r ) ( r r ) ( r r ) ( r r ) r r ) ( r r ( ( r (( t ( ( r ( ( r CK t r (
h e b e h e h e h h e
/ s r r/ s r r/ s r r/ s r e/ e r r/ s r r oh h r o h h r oh h e oh h r sh h r oh a D aD a D m D a o a D
) ( 2 6 ( 2 6 ( 2 6 ( 2 6 (D 2 6 ( 2 n h d+ + d + + d + + d + + + d +
o : p e eT T e e T T te e T T e e T T e e T T+ e eT i m t t t t t t t t t t t p4 t c e s s a ( a a n d R ri g n a a n i R r i g n a a n n a a n n a a n n a a n i R r g i i R r g i i R r g i i R r g i
- m. i r l C
e e e te e s s e e e s s t se e e ss e e e e e e e e e e s e e e t s s s t s s s t s e s t s D p o n o o o n o o o n o o o n o o o n o o o n o
. e DIDD DIDD DIDD DIDD DIDD DI D d b d n r n i u i W T W * * *,! ' .
! i ! )' ijC !!! ili }jljjlI \!lli
e t
- EP-20 3 Rev. 1
*{
Page 15 of 19 , VAW/ MPG /jmv (O'.- , 1 APPENDIX EP-203-8 EOF PHONE CHECKOFF LIST l' l, t the Followine Phones for Dial Tone:
YES/NO
] 1. Prelude Phones:
Located at,the SEC Desk j TSC/ EOF (Ivory - Spk)* CR & TSC/ EOF (Orange) Located in the SEC Office SC/ EOF (Ivory - Spk) l j CR & TSC/ EOF (Orange) i Management (Grey) (Brown-Spk) k Located at SEC Communicator's Desk Corporate Spokesman (Ash) ( Management (Grey) Located in State / Local Government Office BRP Rad (Green) Located by Dose Assessment Desk Yellow) , Located by EP & Chem Desk Green) (White) ; Located by Manual Dose Assessment Calculator ] l (Yellow)
- Ivory colored phone - speaker at desk.
i i L--- Q b'
i, e
- j I
g EP-203 Rev. 1 Page 16 of 19 i VAW/ PPG /jmv l l APPENDIX EP-203-8 EOT PHONE CRECKOFF LIST ( CONT ' D)
,s l
I { l 2. Limerick Station Phones (Black) -
] Phone i Location / Area YES/NO
{ l NRC Office i
- l Conference Room l Procedure Support Coordinator i
l Procedure Support Coordinator l EOF Security f l Near HP & Chem Coordinator l Telecopier
, l HP & Chem Desk l l HP & Chem Desk l
i l RMMS Calculator i l Medical Director l Emergency Preparedness l l ERF Operator l l Video Copier i l NRC Desk l l NRC Desk
.. f[
l
- I l
Ob l l i l
! EP-203 Rev. 1
- Page 17 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv 0k APPENDIX EP-203-8 EOF PHONE CHECKOFF LIST ( CONT ' D)
# I i 3. Outside Lines (Black Phone) ,.
1 Phone i Location / Area YES/NC { State / Local Government Office l State / Local Government Office
~
l State / Local Government Office l NRC Office l NRC Office NRC Office l l NRC Office l EOF SEC Desk
-l Dose Assessment Desk l Dose Assessment Desk l RMMS Calculator l Manual Dose Assessment Calculator l EOF Corp. Com=. Liaison l NRC Desk l NRC Desk l NRC Desk l NRC Desk l : NRC Desk l NRC Desk l NRC Desk
( %
F ;r
== s
. . si EP-203 Rev, 1 j
j' Page 18 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv a' APPENDIX EP-203-8 EOF PHONE CHECKOFF LIST ( COh*T ' D) l 4. Plvmouth Service Buildine Phones (Black) Phone 4 Location / Area YES/NO l l SEC Office l l SEC Communicator's Desk l Near HP & Chem Coordinator I ' l B RP I l Telecopier l Reception Desk (Near Plant Status l Printer) l l EOF Corp. Comm. Liaison
's l Planning & Scheduling Coordinator
- l EOF. Engineering Liaison s#'
s f I l ) i 1 I, 1 i t I O (o 1
l EP-203 Rev. 1 Page 19 of 19 VAW/ MPG /jmv
? ,
APPENDIX EP-203-9 EOF EQUIPMENT ACTIVATION
- 1. Turn on Lights in EOF using switch (es) to the left of the door. ,
r.
- 2. Turn on CRT's using posted procedures.
l 3. Check radio base station for operability.
- 4. Inform Dose Assessment Team Leader or Site Emergency Coordinator when activation is complete and of any problems discovered.
e 4 l ee (/ . s
I l
'1 l l 3840090210 EP-208 Rav. 2 - Page 1 of 8 l VA jmv i n )
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY 4/tg l LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-208 SECURITY TEAM ACTIVATION 1.0 PURPOSE
- The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the activation and conduct of operation for the Security Team.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Guard Sergeant or designated alternate shall assume the role of the Interim Security Team Leader and perf'rm the steps of this procedure until relieved by the Security Team Leader. Q, Q b 2.2 The Security Team Leader shall relieve the Interim Security Team Leader and perform the steps of this procedure not completed by the Interip Security Team Leader. g., , 2.3 The Security Team members sha 1l.pshh: ihidhe required steps in this procedure. ;, agtt 3.0 APPENDICES , I e l 3.1 Appendix EP-208-1 Exit Poln Site Evacuation 'Ifi(V i
.0 P. Ece m TES None
. 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT -
5.1 Traffic vests (e 9
~
~ '
. % ? l
- l EP-208 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 8 l VAW/jmv 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented whenever a Personnel Assembly is announced, an Alert or higher classification is declared, a Site Evacuation is declared or at the discretion of the (Interim)
Emergency Director. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Access to the site for support personnel without Limerick security badges during an Alert, Site Emergency and General Emergency may only be authorized by the following personnels g (,, l 8.1.1 (Interim) Emergency Director l 8.1.2 , (Interim) Security Tesm Leader l 8.1.3 Site Emergency Coordinator 9.0 PROCEDURE .. 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 The Guard Sergeant shall: 9.1.1.1 Assume the role of the Interim Security Team Leader. 9.1.1.2 Call or assign someone to call the Security Team Leader and required group members by using EP-278 Security Team Phone List. 9.1.1.3 Assign Group Leaders from available security personnel to the following groups to perform the duties in Section 9.2 as required for e the situations
) ~
l
. *) ,
l EP-208 Rev. 2
' Page 3 of C l VAW/jmv
( . A. Access Control B. Personnel Accountability C. Plant Security , AT ANY TIME DURING THIS PROCEDURE THE INTERIM SECURITY TEAM LEADER MAY BE RELIEVE 3 BY THE SECURITY TEAM LEADER. 9.1.1.4 At an Alert or higher the security gate or.
~
269' elevation of the turbine enclosure should be locked. 9.1.1.5 If assembly with accountability is announced, perform the following steps: A. Ensure that the Access Control Group assigns security personnel at the Personnel Processing Center to assist in f controlling personnel access.
, B. Ensure that the Plant Security Group are stationed at the appropriate personnel
(,, ( exit areas.
, C. ActivatethePersbnnelAccountability Group to perform personnel accountability checks in accordance with 3 q EP-110, Personnel Assembly and I Accountability (section 9.1. 5.1) . l 9.1.1.6 If informed by the (Interim) Emergency
Director that a site evacuation is going to j be declared, perform the following: A. Ensure + hat the Access Control Group assigns security personnel to the appropriate site access control points and selected offsite assembly area. B. Ensure that the Plant Security Group 4
' assigns security personnel to the selected personnel exit areas and required protected area access control points.
' C. Activate the Personnel Accountability i
Group to perform personnel k,j accountability checks in accordance with . (O EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability (section 9.1.5.2).
l s _ j l EP-208 Rev. 2 Page 4 of e l VAW/jmv y
)
. D. Immediately notify the (Interim)
Emergency Director when the Access Control Group is at the appropriate site access control points and the Plant Security Group is at the selected personnel exit areas to that the site
" evacuation can commence, j 9.1.1.7 Advise the (Interim) Emergency Director concerning the need for suppor t of of f-site security agencies, if necessary.
~
9.1.1.8 Coordinate the actions of off-site security agency personnel if their assistance is required. 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 9.2.1 The Security Team Leader shall: , 9.2.1.1 Report to the Technical Support Center. 9.2.1.2 Review the current status of the emergency and relieve the Interim Security Leader. 9.2.1.3 Encure that the necessary groups are staffed
, and pe.-forming the appropriate sections of this procedure. Augment groups as necessary, by using EP-278, Security Team Phone List.
9.2.1.4 Keep the (Interim) Emergency Director updated on status of the team's activities. 9.2.1.5 Periodically re-evaluate the security situation and make appropriate recommendations to the (Interim) Emergency Director. l 9.2.1.6 Implement LGS Plant Protection Procedures as appropriate. 9.2.2 The Access control Group shall THIS GROUP IS COMPRISED OF CONSTRUCTION SECURITY FORCE MEMBERS. THE CONSTRUCTION SECURITY SHIFT SUPERVISION IS THE APPROPRIATE CONTACT. p f. 9.2.2.1 Be activated when directed by the (Interim) security Team Leader.
- 4) V l
v L - ---
- t- _
.- y j l EP-208 Rev. 2
. Page 5 of 8
'l VAW/jmv 6 , 9.2.2.2 Receive instructions via the best means available (telephone, radio, etc.) and obtain traffic vests from the Security i stocks.
9.2.2.3 Members of the access conirol group will he
- . dispatched to each of the following locations to control access:
l A. North Parking Lot l B. Post 93
] C. Main Access Gate (Gate 41) ;
l D. Gate $2 l E. Back Access Gate (Post $10)
- 7. Cross Road Outside Gate $1 (Evergreen and Sanatoga Roads) ;
SECURITY PERSONNEL NEED NOT BE POSTED AT A GATE THAT WILL REMAIN LOCKED DURING THE I, , EMERGENCY. i
.. l 9.2.2.4 During assembly with iccountability: I A. Dispatch access control group members to the Personnel Processing Center to control personnel access. l 9.2.2.5 During a site evacuations *-
A. Control access and vehicle traffic by providing security personnel at
] locations required by Appendix EP-200-1. l
- 3. Immediately notify the (Interim)
Security Team Leader when security ; personnel are stationed at the required i site access control points so the site i evacuation can begin. ; l 9.2.3 The Personnel Accountability Group shall 9.2.3.1 For Personnel Accountability Check without site Evacuations i bi A. Perform a personnel accountability check as detailed in EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability, Section ' 9.1.5.1.
_v _. - _ _ .-
. 's l EP-208 Rev. 2 3 Page 6 of 8
- ,l VAW/jmv 9.2.3.2 For Site Evacuation A. Report.to the Administration Guard Station and perform personnel Accountability in accordance with EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability, Section 9.1.5.2.
9.2.4 The Plant Se'curity Group shall: 9.2.4.1 Maintain plant security in accordance with Plant Protection procedures, and as directed by the (Interim) Security Team Leader. 9.2.4.2 In the event of an Assembly with Accountability and Site Evacuation, assist personnel in the evacuation of affected areas and the performance of personnel accountability in accordance with EP-110. 9.2.4.3 Issue emergency dosimetry as directed by the Personnel Safety Team Leader for incoming
- personnel per PP-2, Emergency Admittance Procedure.
l 9.2.4.4 For assembly with accountability: A. Assist the Personne'l Accountability Group with the evacuation of non-essential personnel from the Protected Area. B. Perform the instructions detailed in' Step 9.1.4.1 of EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability. l 9.2.4.5 For Site Evacuation: A. Control access to the protected area by i providing security personnel at l locations required by Appendix EP-208-1. B. Perform the instructions detailed in l Step 9.1.4.2 of*EP-110, Personnel Assembly and Accountability. C. Immediately notify the (Interim) Security Team Leader when security l personnel are positioned and ready at
> ,,e personne, exit areas..
q,,
J l EP-208 Rev. 2
- Page 7 of 6 VAW/jmv
( ,_,)s l
,(
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Gene ration Station Emergency Plan 10.2 Limerick Generating Station Security Plan and ' Procedures t. 10.3 EP-278 Security Team Phone List 10.4 EP-254 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group 10.5 EP-llo Personnel Assembly and Accountability l 10.6 PP-2 Emergency Admittance Procedure 0 se
/
e i di i
+rme ~e . , ,
- , - -a --- '
i l EP-208 Rev. 2 Page 8 of 8
- l. VAli/jmv
(
'~
- APPENDIX EP-208-1 EXIT POINT STAFFING FOR SITE EVACUATION (1)
I DAY SHIFT AFTERNOON SHIFT NIGHT SHIFT TSC PERSONNEL EXIT AREA P ADMIN PERSONNEL EXIT AREA P P P
~
TURBINE DECK GATE - 269'(4) P NORTH VEHICLE ACCESS GATE P SOUTH VEHICLE ACCESS GATE P COOLING TOWER GATE P NORTH PARKING LOT A A POST f3 A A A MAIN ACCESS GATE (GATE fl) A A A GATE #2 A A BACK ACCESS GATE - (POST 10) A CORNER SANATOGA & EVERGREEN ROADS A A A OFFSITE ASSEMBLY AREA (SEE NOTE 2) A A A I NOTES: . (1) Security personnel need not be stationed at a gate which is to remain locked during the Emergency. (2) The offsite assembly area is either Cromby Generating Station
; or Limerick Airport.
O f' .. ,
. (3) A = Access control Group (V V; P = Plant Security Group (4) This should be locked at an Alert or above.
= * . .
3840090220 y l EP-210 Rev. 1
. Page 1 of 4 VAP PPG /rgs
'4/g PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COM.PANY l LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EFERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMEN'"ING PROCEDURE EP-210 DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM 1.0 PURPOSE
, The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the Activation of the Activation of Dose Assessment Team in the Technical Support Center and the transfer of Dose Assessment functions to the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF).
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Dose Assessment Team Leader is responsible for directing the activities of the Dose Assessment and (- Field Survey Groups and advising the Emergency be Director on protective action recommendations. 2.2 The Field Survey Group Leader is responsible for coordinating the Activities of the Field Survey groups, in Accordance with the re ements of EP-222, Field Survey Group. ' Y h 3.0 APPENDICES 4% % i, 'Dih '
, ,1 None "
5 V 4.0 PREREQUISITES gs l 4.1 An emergency has been d elfin accordance with EP-101. 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ' None d l
~
.s.__ . , . .t." . . . _ . . . . . . . -. ..
l EP-210 Rev. 1 l Page 2 of 4 VAW/ MPG /rgs 7-) (Alw
~ 6.0 SYMPTOMS 6.1 An actual or potential release of radioactive material f at the site boundary in excess of technical l spec ifica tions. ,
t. 7.0 ACTION LEVEL , 1 7.1 Dose Assessment Team shall be activated at the discretion of the Emergency Director or upon i activation of the Technical Support Center (TSC). l 4 8.0 PRECAUTIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 - The Dose Assessment Team Leader shall: 9.1.1.1 Upon notification that the TSC is to be activated and prior to reporting members to the TSC, implement EP-294, Dose Assessment Team Phone List. .. 9.1.1.2 Contact the (Interim) Dose Assessment Team (Shif t Technical Advisor) to receive an update on plant status and Dose Assessment actions which have been taken. 9.1.1.3 Assemble and brief Dose Assessment Team members including Field Survey Group Leader. Direct the team members to perform dose calculations with the RMMS computer (using EP-315) or manually using the following procedures: EP-316 Cumulative Population Dose Calculations for Airborne Releases EP-318 Liquid Release Dose Calculation Method for Drinking Water
,(]}
EP-319 Fish Ingestion Pathway Dose Calculation
EP-210 Rev. 1 3 l Page 3 of 4 VAW/ MPG /rgs h,O, a EP-325 Use of Containment Radiation Monitor to Estimate Release Source Term 9.1.1.5 Request the appropriate number of personnel l to form Field Survey Squad from the Personnel Safety Team Lead'er, if there is a
- - radioactive release, or the potential for a release, occurring.
A SQUAD IS COMPRISED OF A HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN AND A DRIVER 9.1.1.6 Contact the Emergency Director when the Dose Assessment Team is ready to assume responsibility for Dose Assessment Activities. l 9.2 FOLLOW-UP l 9 . 2'.1 The Dose Assessment Team Leader shall: 9.2.1.1 Advise the Emergency Director on protective action recommendations in Accordance with EP-317, Determination of Protective Action kj; recommendations. 9.2.1.2 Coordinate the placement of Field Survey groups, through the Fie'ld Survey Group Leader and coordinate with the Contact Technical Support Croup leader periodically to ascertain plant status and impact of operator actions on releases. 9.2.1.3 Report data to offsite organizations, as requested by the Emergency Director. 9.2.1.4 Contact the Load Dispatcher or the National Weather Service for an extended weather forecast. 9.2.1.5 Keep the Emergency Director appraised of release rate and meterological trends, and any changes which requre a modification to the protective action recommendation. 9.2.1.6 Request inplant and effluent sampling as necessary from the Chemistry Sampling Team Leader to provide data which would improve
., l dose projections.
l f
_. i 3z. 8 . L l* EP-210 Rev. 1 Page 4 of 4 rfs . VAW/ MPG /rgs
.( t l
- 9.2.1.7 Prior to transferring responsibility to the EOF, inform the EOF Dose Assessment Team i Leader of the following
I a. Status and Location of Field Survey
. \ Squads ;
l b. Results of last dose calculation
- c. Any ongoing release and projected duration l d. Current protective action recommendation
- e. Plant status as af fecting dose assessment 9.2.1.8 Transfer Dose Assessment responsibility to EOF on the concurrence of the Emergency Director, the Site Emergency Coordinator and the EOF Dose Assessment Personnel.
10.0 REFERENCES
10.3 EP-316 Cumulative Population' Dose Calculations for Airborne Releases 10.4 EP-317 Determination of Protective Action Recommendations . 10.5 EP-318 Liquid Release Dose Calculations Method for Drinking Water 10.6 EP-319 Fish Ingestion Pathway Dose Calculation 10.7 EP-325 Use of Containment Radiation Monitor to Estimate Release Source Team l 10.8 EP-222 Field Survey Group l 10.9 EP-315 Operation of RNHS (RM-51A) Computer j EJ l 1 l l
/
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
,m ELECTRIC PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT 3843010670
. {., - (j LIMERICK GENERATING STATION .
)
May 14, 1984 i FROM: P. J. Duca TO: G. M. Leitch ,
SUBJECT:
CANCELLATION MEMORANDUM FOR EP-220 '
Reference:
Limerick Administrative Procedure A-21 l l EP-220 should be cancelled because the organization was changed to eliminate the Radiation Protection Team and assign those responsibilities to the Personnel Safety Team and Dose Assessment Team. P. J. Duca 05/14/84 l - - - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
\
FRCM: G. M. Leitch TO: Holders of EP Procedures This Cancellation Memorandum has been reviewed by PORC and is approved. All holders of EP procedures will be contheted regarding destruction of EP-220. In accordance with.f. Administrative Procedure A-21, procedure number,EPy2M;9Nill not be re-used. (" g , ,. .
,#Zy ( QZ APPR '#TATI KPERINTENDENT l,:. ,_ ?%
&O
\
1 o 3840090230
, l ET-021, Rav, 1 j Page 1 of 5 ;
{ "JM J S/ nip l C ,,,
- w. t u $ @M
A ,
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LI!ERICK GENERATING STATION E!ERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-221 PERSONNEL DOSIMETRY, BIOASS AY, AND RESPIRATORY PRO'"ECTION GROUP 1.O P_URPOSE
- The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the actions of the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group Leader is responsible for coordinating the provision of technical and Health Physics support as directed by the Personnel Safety
- Team Leader and as requested by the Plant Survey Group
{ Leader. 1 l 3.0 APPENDICES c None - f.- .. 4.0 PREREOUISITES 4 0 h
.0
[4 a, 9 y None l 6.0 SYMPTOMS
l EP-221, Rev. 1 j Page 2 of 5 [ FJM/JFS/ nip () (Z)s .. 7.0 ACTION LEVEL I The Personnel Dosimetry, Bionssay, and Respiratory Protection Group shall be activated during an emergency as determined by the Personnel Safety Team Leader, usually, af ter transfer of the Dose Assessment function to the EOF. .- 1. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 During emergencies, all routine Health Physics
- procedures, related to functions of the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory Protection C-Group shall be followed unless deviations are authorized by the Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group Leader.
9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS 7 The Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and 9.1.1 (' ' Respiratory Protection Group Leader shall: 9.1.1.1 Report to the TSC and discuss the situation with the Personnel Safety Team Leader. 9.1.1.2 Station personnel to support plant needs and brief group members on the expected short and long term needs and priorities. .,
. 9.1.1.3 Direct the group to accomplish necessary tasks including, but not limited to those specified in the following functional areas.
9.1.2 Emergency Dosimetry-Issuance 9.1.2.1 Establish communications with Security and with group members as assigned to the Dosimetry Office, Whole Body Count Room and the OSC. ., 9.1.2.2 Direct the group members and Security personnel to perform the following tasks as necessary. ()(j A. Inventory and inspect the emergency devices at each location. 1 1 l l
EP-221, Rev. 1 j l Page 3 of 5 FJM/JFS/nlp ( ,7 3 l
%.) (
E. Issue dosimetry to emergency team personnel and off-site emergency response personnel (i.e. ambulance crews, fire-fighting crews, etc.) in accordance with Health Physics procedures (HP-610). < C. Maintain a list of the personnel to whoc dosimetric devices are distributed in accordance with Health Physics procedures. l 9.1.3 Personnel Bionssay 9.1.3.1 verify the Wholebody Counter background is ; acceptable to perform personnel whole body counts. Report to the Group Leader on the status of the Wholebody Counter. 9.1.3.2 If the Wholebody Counter is unavailable, obtain additional bioassay sample containers from storage. Report to the Group Leader whether adequate bioassay sample containers e are on hand. j
\- 9.1.3.3 Perform Wholebody counts or collect bicassay samples from those individuals identified by the Personnel Safety Team Group Leader or Plant Survey Group Leader.
9.1.3.4 Have all personnel reporting to the Whole Body Count Room per form a thorough frisk prior to entry. If contamination greater than or equal to 100 cpm above background is found, have the person report to the Personnel Decon Area in the TSC and notify the Group Leader. l 9.1.4 Pespiratory Protection 9.1.4.1 Determine the current demand (usage) levels of respiratory protection equipment by the various emergency teams (i.e. plant survey team, fire and damage team, etc.) as well as
~
near term anticipated needs. 9.1.4.2 Determine current stock levels and locations of the equipment on hand, especially SCBA's. (O O
EP-221, Rev. 1
; l Page 4 of I FJt;/JFS/nly
{ j, l
\_J 9.1.4.3 Coordinate the recycling of equipment so far as possible based on cleaning, decontamination, inspection, and repair capabilities available on-site.
] 9.1.4.4 Arrange for the necessary. qualified
*; personnel to man the high pressure air compressor for recharging SCBA cylinders as well as monitoring the ambient air to ensure that it is acceptable for cylinder recharging (i.e. airborne gaseous and particulate radioactivity is less than 0.25 MPC).
9.1.4.5 Coordinate and arrange for off-site suppor t concerning cleaning, restocking, cylinder recharging, etc. 9.1.4.6 Coordinate and arrange for quantitative fit testing, if required.
] 9.2 FOLLOW-UP w g l 9.2.1 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory Protection Group shall:
l 9.2.1.1 Emergency Dosimetry I'ssuance A. Establish a dosimetric device collection point for on-site Emergency Response Team memb'ers leaving the Restricted Area. B. Arrange to have dosimetric devices - processed in accordance with Bealth Physics Procedures. l 9.2.1.2 Personnel Bioassay A. Initiate an exposure evaluation in accordance with HP-619. B. Transport the bioassay samples to the offsite laboratory for analysis. l 9.2.1.3 Respiratory Protection f, A. Recover respiratory equipment and process for re-use in accordance with g/'] el Health Physics Procedures.(HP-514, EP-
@. 515)
r' EP-221, Rev. 1
. l Page 5 cf I i
' FJM/JTS/ni;
. l
-U(i .._.
\ ,.
10.0 REFERENCES
Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.1 10.2 UUREG 0654 Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation : Rev. 1 Radiological Emerge,ncy Response Plans in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. 10.3 HP -619 Preparation, Administrative Review and Dissemination of Personnel Exposure Records and Repor ts.
- 10.4 HP-514 Cleaning and Decontamination of Respiratory Protection Equipment 10.5 HP-515 Inspection and Maintenance of Respiratory Protection Equipment.
0
~J D
c .1 . i I ,
.r . l .,*s v.. EP 222, Re f I 3840090240 p 1 , l Rg/mla PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY W@Af^n ( LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-222 FIELD SURVEY GROUP 1.0 PURPOSE I The purpose of this procedure is to provide instructions and I guidelines for the actions of the Field Survey Group. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES I 2.1 The Field Survey Group Leader shall be responsible to I direct the actions of the field survey group members. 1 2.2 The Field Survey Group members shall be responsible to I conduct field surveys as directed by the Field Survey I Group leader and this procedure. q (V 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-222-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines ( l 3.2 EP-222-2, FieldSurveyGroupSurveyy%o'td%
- p. %. % s.t i 3.3 EP-222-3, Field Survey Group Expy4fe,$ec'ord 3.4 e ord,k p.A e i EP-222-4, Field Survey Grouk 'ta v eO
%X :.
,,(yy .F %
.,V:. gV g@/
4.0 PREREQUISITES ,e
, j..
. y l 4.1 Emergency has been declared per EP-10 ssification i of Emergencies.
- v il d o g $s A fu -[ k a -
t
r
. - ~ . . . .
11 9 . 3 4 l EP-222, RLv. 1 ) Page 2 of 15 l REL/mla lh ( 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 5.1 Radio 5.2 Field survey kits 5.3 Vehicle 6.0 SYMPTOMS 6.1 An actual or potential release of radioactive material beyond the site boundary in excess of technical specifications. 7.0 ACTION LEVEL i 7.1 The Field Survey Group shall be activated at the Alert i Level when the emergency has actual or potential I radiological releases. I 7.2 The Field Survey Group shall be activated as I determined by the Dose Assessment Team Leader. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 The group members exposure should be limited to the guidelines in EP-222-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines. I 8.2 Meteorological conditions, expected radiation levels, I and other hazards shall be used to determine the I positioning of field survey groups. I 8.3 Consideration shall be given to the administration of l KI tablets to group members per EP-313, Distribution I of Thyroid Blocking Tablets, if the potential or I actual dose to the thyroid will exceed 10 Rem. 9.0 PROCEDURE I 9.1 Actions I 9.1.1 The Field Survey Group Leader (FSGL) shall: 9.1.1.1 Report to the Technical Support Center (TSC). (<'~b >
l 1 . 3* . i EP-222, Rev. 1 ' r Page 3 of 15
, l REL/mla
[)
\ ~- {
l I 9.1.1.2 Discuss the situation with the Dose Assessment Team Leader. This discussion i 1 I should include: the potential for release, i I the magnitude of the radioactive source I term, meteorological conditions and I potential for change, and the number of I field survey squads needed. I 9.1.1.3 Coordinate the formation of the necessary number (minimum of two) of field survey I squads from personnel supplied by the l Operations Support Center (OSC). A squad consists of a Health Physics Technician and a driver. 9.1.1.4 Obtain drivers and vehicles from the Fire I and Damage Team Leader and have them report to the TSC. I 9.1.1.5 Direct field survey squads to obtain I emergency dosimetry. I 9.1.1.6 Instruct the H.P. Technicians to secure and inventory the required number of field survey kits and radios, and perform equipment checks. The radios are located in I the Dose Assessment Room in the Technical g
\( 'I, Support Center and the field survey kits are U located in the storage closets in the Personnel Entry Area of the Technical Support Center.
I 9.1.1.7 Discuss the situation with each squad, assign each squad a unique color designation, and direct them to specific initial locations in the field. i 9.1.1.8 Notify Security Team Leader of the names of I field survey squad members and inform him I that they will be keeping their dosimetry. 9.1.2 Field survey squad members shall: 4 l 9.1.2.1 Report to the Field Survey Group Leader
] (FSGL) at the Technical Support Center.
I 9.1.2.2 Obtain a field survey kit and a radio. l i l 9.1.2.3 Break the seal on the field survey kit and l l check equipment for operability including I source check of survey equipment. ( l IF THE SEAL ON THE FIELD SURVEY KIT WAS ALREADY i BROKEN, PERFORM AN INVENTORY OF THE KIT CONTENTS PER l INVENTORY CHECKLIST PROVIDED IN THE KIT. ((}
7 6 I EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 4 of 15 I REL/mla (3 (*J g l 9.1.2.4 Obtain emergency dosimetry (0-1500 mR and 0-l- 5 R Direct Reading Dosimeters (DRDs), i Ensure that DRDs are zeroed prior to leaving i the TSC. I 9.1.2.5 Obtain information from the FSGL on the situation, plan of action, specific survey locations, and necessary precautions. I ISSUANCE OF A 0-5 R DRD IS NOT TO BE I INTERPRETED AS AN AUTHORIZATION TO RECEIVE 5 l REM. 9.1.2.6 Upon leaving the TSC keep all dosimetry. 9.1.2.7 Perform communication check of radios with the FSGL manning the base station prior to leaving the site. I 9.1.2.8 Ensure that the E-520/HP-270 or equivalent I is on after arriving at the vehicle. I 9.1.2.9 Upon direction of FSGL, proceed to the first I field survey point.
- . I 9.2 Follow-Up (g'- 9.2.1 The Field Survey Group leader shall:
1 9.2.1.1 Maintain contact with the field survey I squads and squad members accumulated i exposures. Exposures are to be recorded on l EP-222-3, Field Survey Group Exposure l Record. Distribute copies as indicated on I form. I 9.2.1.2 Obtain field survey results as provided by I field survey squads and record results on l EP-222-4, Field Survey Group Data Record. I 9.2.1.3 Calculate I-131 concentrations on EP-222-4 I and distribute copies as indicated on form. l 9.2.1.4 Provide the field survey squads with status updates including: radioactive source, meteorological conditions, etc. Dispatch 1 I the field survey squads to other locations ' as directed by the Dose Assessment Team Leader. UD
l EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 5 of 15 l REL/mla I ki . I 9.2.1.5 Inform the Dose Assessment Team Leader, if t I advised, that the field survey squad members and/or vehicles are contaminated. I 9.2.1.6 When advised that the EOF has taken over the Dose Assessment function, inform the field I survey squads. Assist the EOF, Field Survey Group Leader in assuming the role by providing a briefing as to the plan of action that was being taken, group members exposures, etc. I 9.2.2 Field survey squad members shall perform the - I following actions: l 1 I i 9.2.2.1 While in transit, ensure that your E-520/HP-1 270 and SKl or equivalent are on. Approach I the specified location checking for increasing radiation levels on the survey I meter. Hold the probe outside the vehicle I and have the driver proceed slowly until the specified survey location is reached. -- i l 9.2.2.2 Exit vehicle and determine the maximum dose i rate at waist height in a 360" radius using ! I the RO2A or equivalent. Perform open window and closed window surveys. Record all results on EP-222-2, Field Survey Group Data l Record, and transmit information to the FSGL by radio. If the radio does not function properly, locate a telepho nd report I survey information. Use hd ask for the Field Survey G Leader on I extension S TSC) o ROF) or ' I dd Ad ask for the Fiel Survey Grou j l Lea er, , l 9.2.2.3 Using the ES20/HP270 or equivalent take readings with the probe shielded and unshielded, record readings on EP-222-4, Field Survey Group Data Record, and transmit results to FSGL. 1 ) l 9.2.2.4 Take air sample at the location if directed by the FSGL, as follows: F I a) Connect terminals of Radeco H809C or l equivalent to vehicle battery with engine running. Place air sampler on an elevated surface, not the ground.
)
o _
]
,o i l EP-222, Rav. 1 Page 6 of 15
. I REL/mla k
kj( l b) Mark filter and silver zeolite cartridge to indicate air flow direction. The particulate filter is placed on the outside of the silver zeolite cartridge in the sampler head. I c) Orient the air sampler toward the plant and run for 5 minutes. Record the indicated flow rate on EP-222-2, Field Survey Group Survey Record. 1 I AIR SAMPLER SHOULD NOT BE RUN AT GREATER THAN 2.5 cfm. ADVISE FSGL IF SUCH IS THE CASE. I 9.2.2.5 While Air Sampler is running, use the R02A l or equivalent to obtain closed window gamma measurements at 3 inches and 3 feet above the ground. If 3 inch readings are higher than 3 foot readings, take several smear samples (with gloved hands) of the ground. Place smears in labelled envelope for counting at a later time. Perform and open vindow survey at 3 inches and 3 feet above ground and record data on EP-222-2, Field Survey Group Survey Record. Transmit readings back to the FSGL. I 9.2.2.6 When you have finished collecting the Air Sample, carefully wrap the filter and cartridge in cellophane, seperately and place in plastic bags. Label each bag with the location, date, time air sampler on, time air sampler off and flow rate. l l WHEN HANDLING AIR SAMPLE MEDIA USE CAUTION TO AVOID l CONTAMINATION OF THE SAMPLES. I 9.2.2.7 Inform the FSGL that the air sample has been obtained and is ready to be analyzed. You will be instructed to take the air sample to a low background counting area. While in I transit, monitor your E520-HP270 or I equivalents for radiation levels noting minima and maxima levels and transmit locations to FSGL. I 9.2.2.8 Upon arrival to low background counting area
! I set up the SAM-2 or equivalent and allow to g3 warm up and stabilize, as follows:
(\ )
(-
,o .
I EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 7 of 15
. I REL/mla
( (') j
\
i a) Connect cable from RD22 probe to
" Detector" jack on the front of the SAM-2.
I b) Connect the battery lead to the
" Battery" jack on the back of the SAM-2.
Plug other end of lead into the socket on the side of the battery pack. I c) Set the SAM-2 Controls as follows: Stabilizer: ON Count Mode TIMED Meter Channel: 1 Window: Set for Ba-133 as shown on Calibration Sticker Threshold: Set for Ba-133 as shown on Calibration Sticker "t" Multiplier: x10 Response: " Midrange" "IN"
) Count Time: 5x1 Channel 2: Off-out H.V.: As shown on the SAM-2 Calibration Sticker.
I d) Switch the " Power" Switch on the back of the SAM-2 to "ON". Press the " RESET START" button on the front of the SAM-2 and allow the instrument to count for 5 minutes to warm up. l IF THE "BATT OK" LIGHT IS NOT LIT, SWITCH TO I A FRESH BATTERY PACK. I 9.2.2.9 Perform an analysis of the particulate l filter using the E140N/HP-210T with the SH4A sample holder. Record background readings and sample readings in EP-222-2, Field Survey Group Survey Record. I 9.2.2.10 Place the Ba-133 check source cartridge ! against the end of the RD22 probe in the ! sample holder and set the count time on the ( SAM-2 to 2x1 minutes. Press the " RESET START" button and count. Record total (() I number of counts on Appendix EP-222-2. l 1 1
. ,J .
I EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 8 of 15 I REL/mla j i 9.2.2.11 Exchange a clean silver zeolite cartridge for the Ba-133 check source and press " RESET l START". Record total number of counts on
! Appendix EP-222-2.
I 9.2.2.12 Compute the net count rate as follows: I NET (CPM) = GROSS COUNTS - BKG COUNTS l 2 2 l and record on Appendix EP-222-2. I 9.2.2.13 Compare the net count rate to the allowable I net count rate listed on the SAM-2 I calibration label. If the measured net I count rate is within the range specified, I proceed to 9.2.2.14 to set up and use the l SAM-2 for I-131 determination. IF THE NET l COUNT RATE FALLS OUTSIDE OF THE ALLOWABLE I RANGE, REPEAT STEPS 9.2.2.10 TO 9.2.2.13 ONE l TIME. If results are still unsatisfactory, I inform the Field Survey Group Leader. I 9.2.2.14 Set up the SAM-2 for counting I-131 as follows: h' W ,L Window: Set for I-131 as shown on Calibration Sticker. Threshold: Set for I-131 as shown on Calibration Sticker. I 9.2.2.15 Place clean silver zeolite cartridge in the sample holder and press " RESET START". I Record total number of counts on Appendix l EP-222-2. I 9.2.2.16 Place silver zeolite cartridge with field sample in the sample holder and press " RESET START". RECORD TOTAL NUMBER OF COUNTS l ACCUIRED ON APPENDIX EP-222-2 AND TRANSMIT ALL INFORMATION TO FSGL. I 9.2.2.17 Rebag the samples for transport back to the site for analysis. I 9.2.2.18 Await further instructions from the Field Survey Group Leader.
-n
.. . u I EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 9 of 15
. I REL/mla [ ()
'~
j
\
i 9.2.2.19 Before returning the site, survey self and vehicle for contamination. If contamination is found, inform the Field Survey Group Leader and take the vehicle to the designated Vehicle Decontamination Facility. I 9.2.2.20 Place all data forms in a clean plastic bag and have a noncontaminated individual bring the bag to the Field Survey Group Leader in the TSC. I 9.2.2.21 Bring all environmental samples to the Personnel Decontamination Facility in the Radwaste Enclosure and turn them over to a member of the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group. (v
. . 3 e
! EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 10 of 15 i REL/mla k
l APPENDIX EP-222-1 EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Life Saving and l Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem (Interim)
Emergency ** Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an l Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem (Interim)
Emergency ** Director
- 3. Protection of Health I and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem (Interim)
Emergency ** Director w 1 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 (Interim) Activities limits limits Emergency Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis
/ N,
/
_ __ . _ - . ~~_ 1 EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 11 of 15 I REL/mla t ( APPENDIX EP-222-2
. FIELD SURVEY GROUP SURVEY RECORD l LOCATION: DATE: / /
l TEAM: TIME: I DOSE RATE SURVEYS I Open Above Above I 1) R02A Dose Rate - Window 3-inch Ground mR/hr; 3ft Ground mR/hr l Closed Above Above i 2) R02A Dose Rate - Window 3-inch Ground mR/hr; 3ft Ground mR/hr l 3) E520-HP270 Shielded Probe mR/hr; Unshielded mR/hr l AIR SAMPLES I 4) Air Sampler flow rate cfm I 5) Time Air Sampler on
- 6) Time Air Sampler off l 7) Collection time (6)-(5) 1 AIR SAMPLE ANALYSIS I 8) SAM 2 Ba-133 Check Source cts /2 minutes i 9) SAM 2 Ba-133 Clean Cartridge cts /2 minutes i 10) SAM 2 I-131 Clean Cartridge c.ts/2 minutes l 11) SAM 2 I-131 Field Sample cts /2 minutes i 12) Particulate Filter E-140N cpm l NET COUNT RATE l NET (CPM) = GROSS COUNTS (8) - BKG COUNTS (9) l 2 minutes 2 minutes i = ( )-( ) = CPM (s) 2 min 2 min l
l l
, s o I EP-222, Rsv. 1 Page 12 of 15 ,
, l REL/mla j ( l APPENDIX EP-222-3 I FIELD SURVEY GROdP EXPOSURES l Field Survey Team Date: / / 1 Time: 1 IDose l l l 1 l Rec'd.lTime Spent Inl i
! Name l(mR) l Area (Hrs.) IMPC-hours **l l I I I I I I I I l l l l (A) HP TECH I l l l l l l l I I I l (B) DRIVER l l l l l l 1 l l l I 1 (C) OTHER l l l [ l I **MPC-hrs (I 131)=(Detected conc. uCi/cc I 131)(Time in Area)(1.llP8 MPC/uCi/cc) l ** NOTES:
1 1. MPC-HOURS ARE CALCULATED USING I-131 AS THE LIMITING ISOTOPE 4, ! . MPC-HOURS ARE ADMINISTRATIVELY CONTROLLED AT 20 MPC-HRS /WK;
- i Exposures >20 mpc/ hrs /wk to 40 mpc-hrs /wk can be authorized by I the Senior Health Physicist l A B C A B C I
I I I I I I I I I I A. Previous Daily Exposures l l l l(mR) W/B l l l l MPC-hrs. I I I I I I I I I i B. Exposure from this entry + l l l l(mR) W/B l l l l MPC-hrs. I I I I I I I I I l C. Exposure Totals l l l l(mR) W/B l l l l MPC-hrs. I I I I I I I I I I D. Remaining Balance i l l l(mR) W/B l 1 l l MPC-hrs. I 3. INDIVIDUALS SUSPECTED OF EXCEEDING 10 MPS-HRS /WK ARE REQUIRED TO I HAVE A WHOLE BODY COUNT I 4. DOSIMETRY RECORDS ARE REQUIRED FOR EXPOSURES > 2 MPC HRS / DAY, I >10 MPC HOURS /WK. I COPIES TO: - FIELD SURVEY TEAM LEADER; - DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM LEADER I - DOSIMETRY, BIOASSAY AND RESPIRATORY PROTECTION GROUP LEADER x.J
- . 6 o l EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 13 of 15 l REL/mla l l APPENDIX EP-222-4 l FIELD SURVEY GROUP DATA l Date: / / Time: EST l Survey Team " Location i Sector i PART 1 l 1. Area Dose Rate (r) 3" mR/hr; 3' mR/hr I (Open Window) I 2. Area Dose Rate (Y) 3" mR/hr; 3' mR/hr I (Closed Window) l 3. Air Sample Time minutes I 4. Air Sample Flow Rate cfm I 5. Air Sample Volume (3) x (4) ft3 1 6. SAM-2 Ba-133 check source cts /2 minutes l 7. SAM-2 Ba-133 clean cartridge cts /2 minutes l 8. SAM-2 I-131 clean cartridge cts /2 minutes l 9. SAM-2 I-131 field sample cts /2 minutes l 10. Particulate Filter & E-140N cpm l PART 2 I Determination of I-131 Concentration I (9) (8) I l Counts - Bkg l l~ 1 l l- 1 -l l~ 1 -l l l_ 2 Minutes _l l_ Eff _l l_ Volume _l l_ 0.95 _l x 1.59Nll = uCi/cc j l l~ - l l~ l l l- 1 l l- 1 l I l_ 2 Min _I l_ _I l_ _l l_ 0.95 _l x 1.59N11 = uCi/cc I Determination of I-131 MDA I (8) I l- Bkg .l l- 1 l l~ 1 l l- 1 l i 3 l_ 2 Min _I l_ Eff _l l _ Vol _l l_ 0.95 _l x 1.59Nll = uCi/cc I I l- l l~ 1 l l- 1 l l~ 1 l
3 l _ 2 Min _l l_ _I l_ _l l_ 0.95 _l x 1.59 Nil = uCi/cc
.)
, a o l EP-222, Rev. 1 Page 14 of 15 i REL/mla
( l APPENDIX EP-222-5 I FIELD SURVEY CHECKLIST i 1. BEFORE LEAVING SITE I A) All Equipment accounted for and operable i B) Have been briefed on situation, etc. I C) Have Emergency Dosimetry and they are zeroed I D) Communication check performed i E) ES20/HP270 is ON I 2. AT THE SURVEY LOCATION AND WHILE IN TRANSIT l A) Looked for and reported location where increasing f ,, I radiation levels occured while still in transit to ( ) I specified survey location v l B) Performed survey using R02A to look for maximum dose i rate at waist level in 360 deg. radius i C) Have notified FSGL of arrival and dose rate encountered i D) Survey with ES20/HP270 with probe shielded and I unshielded l F) If advised to take air sample: 1 1) Particule.te filter and silver zeolite cartridge I marked to indicate direction of air flow l 2) Air Sampler head loaded with filter located outside i of cartridge 1 3) Air Sampler head oriented toward the plant and I running l 4) Flow Rate observed and recorded I !ss_- ( (~1 '
" '~ ' , .,,,a+
l EP-222, Rev. 1
, Page 15 of 15 l REL/mla
{'l. l\ >T l G) Open Window and Closed Window survey with R02A at 3 l inches and 3 feet above ground, results recorded l H)' If 3" Closed Window readings higher than 3 foot Closed i Window, smears taken l I) Notified FSGL that Air Sample has been pulled and I advised to move to low background counting area to I analyze sample 1 J) Air Samples wrapped and placed in separate, labelled i plastic bags I K) E520/HP270 is ON during transit - looking and reporting i for locations of maximum and minimum dose rates I 3) AT LOW BACKGROUND COUNTING AREA
- I A) SAM 2 set up and counting on Ba-133 channel for 5 I minutes to warm up sa ! B) 2 minute count of Ba-133 check source
! ^ l C) 2 minute count of Clean Silver Zeolite cartridge I F) 2 minute count of Sample Silver Zeolite cartridge i G) All results recorded and relayed to FSGL l H) Advised to move to new location l I) If advised to return, monitor self and vehicle and I relay findings to FSGL l J) All samples turned over to Chemistry l Sampling & Analysis Group at Personnel Decon Facility 1 in Radwaste. , l K) All Forms turned over to FSGL for subsequent I disposition i ) 1 4 4
. - , - , - - - -.-,-m - -- , , , , --.,, ,__,,.., y -_ , . - %y,-.,-- -.,,,-,9- , , , ,- - - , - , , ,,-, ,, - -
.-,,.,c,r,-. -, -----,
s
, n .- ; i 3840090250 ty_230 Res. :
Page 1 of 5 VAW/ MPG /jmv
, /I PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-230 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM ACTIVATION 1.0 PURPOSE
~
The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the actions required to activate the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES l 2.1 The (Interim? Emergency Director shall direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader to activate a team, when required. The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall { 2.2 appoint a group leader to perform tfie steps necessary in this procedure. g h,'(t,,,v,," .[ 2.3 The Chemistry Sampling and Anal,ysis ' Group Leader shall direct the group members -to perform the steps necessary in this procedurgt. 4 -*, rN' p?-Il A. tj . i. 3% ( VQ Qv , 3.0 APPENDICES ,;. i f 3.1 EP-230-1 Emergency F4 oscre G nes 3.2 EP-230-2 Chemitiiiy se y Analysis COL 4.0 PREREQUISITES
~
None . 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 1 ' Q.,' None
.' ) l EP-230 Rev. ; Page 2 of 9 l VAW/ MPG /jr., I l 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group will be activated at the discretion of the (Interim) Emergency Dir ec tor . l l 8.0 PRECAUTIONS l 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the l administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 8.2 continuous coverage by a Health Physics Technician may 1 '
. substitute for the Radiation Work Permit.
( 8.3 Every effort should be made to maintain the individual
%- and man-rem exposures of the group to ALARA.
9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS , l 9.1.1 The (Interim) Emergency Director shair: 9.1.1.1 Direct the (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader to collect samples, as l necessary, and analyze the samples or use offsite support groups for the analysis. 9.1.2 Senior Shift Chemistry technician shall: 9.1.2.1 Report to the Chemistry Field Of fiCE and verify habitabi.lity in accordance with EP-330, Emergency Response Facility l Habitability. Report to the Chemistry Area on the 2nd floor of the Administration l Building if the Chemistry Lab is not l habitable. If the Chemistry Lab l (({} ( ': habitability is degraded, time spent in the lab analyzing samples should be minimized l l and protective measures shall be employed. 1
_ . ... . ~ - =- ~=; - '
- - - u. ,.
I EP-230 Rev. 2 Page 3 of 9 VAW/ MPG /jm; W Consideration should be given to sending the samples offsite for analysic. 9.1.2.2 After discussing the situation with the Emergency Director to determine the
~
~
priorities of group activation and immedia:c responses of the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team, assume the role of Interin Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader. AT ANY POINT IN THIS PROCEDURE, THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM LEADER WILL REPORT TO THE TSC AND ftELIEVE THE INTERIM TEAM LEADER ONCE FULLY COGNIZANT OF THE SITUATION. 9.1.2.3 Appoint Group Leaders from available personnel and/or assume the role of group leader and group member (s) (until relieved) and complete the appropriate steps in this procedure.
~
9.1.2.4 Assign sampling tasks to Group Leaders. t Brief Group Leaders on plant status and L' potential or existing radiological conditions and/or hazards, as the information becomes available. 9.1.2.5 Request emergency exposure _ authorizations from the Emergency Director for the appropriate group members as required. 9.1.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 9.1.3.1 Assemble the Chemistry Sampling and Analysir Group at the Chemistry Field Office and perform accountability if required per EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability. t 9.1.3.2 Evaluate sampling conditions and/or l locations identified in steps 9.1.3.3 l through 9.1.3.7,below and instruct group members to take the necessary samples using indicated procedures. 9.1.3.3 Refer to the following procedures to sample
- e primary coolant and drywell atmosphere as necessary:
9
--- _ .. , . - - _ _ , _ y - __. _,
~ -
l l l EP-230 Rev. 2
' Page 4 of 9 VAW/ MPG /jev W I' l
EP-231 Operation of Post Accident Sampling l System (PASS) l EP-233 Retrieving And Changing Sample Filters And Cartridges From The
'l Containment Leak' Detector During Emergencies EP-234 Obtaining Containment Gas Samples Fror the Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies EP-235 Obtaining Reactor Water Samples From Sample Sinks Following Accident Conditions 9.1.3.4 In the event of a unplanned radioactive liquid release, greater than tech specs to the Schuylkill River, obtain samples of the l blowdown line water in accordance with:
EP-236 Obtaining Cooling Tower Blowdown Line Water Samples Following Radioactive _'% Liquid Release After Accident Conditions 9 .1.-3 . 5 Use the following procedures to obtain samples, as necessary, from the various sample points. North and South Stack EP-237 Obtaining the Iodine / Particulate and/or gas samples from the North Vent Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) Liquid Radwaste EP-238 Obtaining Liquid Radwaste Samples from Radwaste Sample Sink Following Accident Conditions Off Gas EP-240 Obtaining Off Gas Samples from the ; Air Ejector / Holdup pipe Discharge Reactor Enclosure or Suppression Pool rs
\_)k;(' EP-231 Operation of Post Accident Sampling Systems (PASS) l
.- m,. __ __
l l l l EP-230 Rev. ; l Page 5 of 9
> VAW/ MPG /jmv d
s 9.1.3.6 Use the following procedures for the preparation and handling of highly radioactive samples. EP-241 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 9.1.3.7 Periodically have group member exposures evaluated to ensure that group members do not exceed normal administrative exposure guidelines without prior approval of the (Interim) Emergency Director. _ . 9.1.3.8 As required, request the Chemistry sampling 44, and Analysis Team Leader to obtain emergency
/ exposure authorizations from the (Interim)
(_. Emergency Director.for affected group members. .
~
9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: 9.1.4.1 Assemble the necessary equipment needed to obtain and analyze samples. Label al'1 sample containers before sampling. Use Appendix EP-230-2 as guidance to follow the progress of samples drawn and analyzed onsite. 9.1.4.2 Collect and analyze samples as directed by the Group Leader. 9.1.4.3 Attach data sheets and analysis reports to Appendix EP-230-2 Chemistry Sampling & Analysis COL for'each sample taken. Give this information rto the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 9.2 FOLLOW-UP (3( ; 9.2.1 The (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and
.\ ,1 b;-< Analysis Team Leader shall
.. . . ~ . . . - - - - . . -
l EP-230 Rev. 2 (E Page 6 of 9 (')
%s VAW/ MPG /jmv 9.2.1.1 Report the results of these analyses to the (Interim) Emergency Director, Dose Assessment Team Leader and Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator.
.. l 9.2.1.2 Provide group leaders with periodic plant status changes including significant radiation exposure and radioactive contamination problems which may affect the functions of the team.
9.2.1.3 If necessary, use the post accident sampling l analysis off-site capabilities by referring to EP-244, Off-Site Analysis of High Activity Samples. 9.2.1.4 Provide additional personnel support, if necessary, using EP-292 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Phone List. 9.2.2. Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader
- r. -
shall [ 9.2.2.1 Report results of samples and analysis to N. the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader. 9.2.2.2 Prov'ide Group Members with periodic plant status changes to include radiological conditions which may affect the group. 9.2.2.3 Request augmentative personnel from the l 1 l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team L'eader ; as required.
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG 0654, Rev. 2 - Preparation and Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness In Support of Nuclear Power Plants l 10.3 EP-231 Operation of Post Accident Sampling System
, (PASS) l I
k3)SN l l l l l
~
,l EP-230 Rev. 2
,r Page 7 of 9
/~~ VAW/ MPG /jmv N-)J f 10.4 EP-233 Retrieving and Changing Sample Filters and Cartridges from the Containment Leak Detector during Emergencies 10.5 EP-234 Obtaining Containment Gas', Samples from the
. Containment Leak Detector During Emergencies l 10.6 EP-235 Obtaining Reactor Water Samples from Sample Sinks Following Accident Conditions 10.7 EP-236 Obtaining Cooling Tower Blowdown Line Samples Following Radioactive Liquid Releases Af ter Accident Conditions 10.8 EP-237 Obtaining the Iodine / Particulate Samples and/or gas samples the North Vent Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) l 10.9 EP-238 Obtaining Liquid Radwaste Samples from the Radwaste Sample Sink Following Accident Conditions
~ '
, . 10.10 EP-240 Off Gas Samples from the Air Ejector / Holdup Pipe Discharge l 10.11 EP-241 Sample Preparation and. Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples l 10.12 EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges l 10.13 EP-243 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly-Radioactive Gas Samples l 10.14 EP-292 Chemistry. Sampling and Analysis Team Phone List l 10.15 EP-110 Personnel Assembly and Accountability l 10.16 EP-244 Of f-Site Analysis of High Activity Samples 4
e
's
~
~.^.-- . ....:' ~ ' .
( _,
'l EP-230, Rev. 2 Page 8 of 9 VAW/ MPG /jmv i
. APPENDIX EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines Projected -
,. Whole Body Thyro'id Authorized Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Life Saving and (Interim)
Reduction of Injury 75 REM
- 375 REM Emergency **
Director l
- 2. Operation of Equipment i (Interim) to Mitigate an Emergency 25 REM
- 125 REM Emergency **
Director
- 3. Protection of Health (Interim) and Safety of the Public 5 REM 25 REM Emergency **
Director
^
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director h 5. Re-entry / Recovery Activities Station Administra-S.tation Adminis-l tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A
Reference:
EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis
- l l
. . . _ _ _ _ . =. ^:.: :.__. ----._=-.. : _. . . . -
} . EP-230 Rev. 2 fs Page 9 of 9 l C a VAW/ MPG /jmv
)
j
\ )
APPENDIX EP-230-2 CHEM SAMPLING & ANALYSIS COL TEAM ACTIONS ',
- 1. SAMPLE TYPE: LOCATION:
DATE: TIME:
- 2. ANALYSIS TO BE PERFORMED (LIST)
SPECIAL
- 3. PROCEDURES NEEDED (LIST) REVIEWED PREREQUISITES EQUIPMENT
(, EAMPLE GROUP ACTIONS INITIALS
- 1. TRAVEL ROUTE PLANNED
- 2. HP COVERAGE AVAILABLE -
- 3. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT & DOSIMETRY ISSUED
- 4. SAMPLE SURVEY BY HP
- 5. SAMPLE TRANSPORTED TO LAB ANALYSIS GROUP ACTIONS INITIALS
- 1. LAB READY TO RECEIVE SAMPLE
- 2. HP COVERAGE AVAILABLE IN LAB l .
- 3. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT & DOSIMETRY ISSUED l
(' ( 4. SAMPLE RECEIVED IN LAB l 5. DOSE RATE SURVEY DONE IN LAB AFTER SAMPLE RECEIPT 1
- 6. RESULTS FORWARDED TO TEAM LEAD _ER __
1 I EP-231 Rev. 2
, . i
=
.a.*
3840090500 Page 1 of 45
.T /jmv
. l i .>
%n PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY V. LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-231 OPERATION OF POST-ACCIDENT SAMPLING SYSTEMS (PASS) 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for obtaining samples from the Post-Accident Sampling Station following accident conditions.
1 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Cheminry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group members to perform the necessary steps in this procedure. 3.0 APPENDICES EP-231-l' Procedure for Draining theh r.ap. l 3.1 Sump and Collector t (.'y 3.2 EP-231-2 Procedure for Obt , Q4s/4 ml Gas Sample
.A. . . . o 3.3 EP-231-3 Procedure for phta ng ine/Partiglate Sample j, sl. y;,',;, ' f , % -
g,%,'
~
3.4 EP-231-4 Procedure hbkai np m lume Liquid Sample d.i , 3.5 EP-231-5 Procedure for Obtainin rge Liquid Sample and/or a Dissolved Ga e 3.6 EP-231-6 Procedure for F1 g the Liquid and l Dissolved Gas System ' 3.7 EP-231-7 M-102 General Arrangement Plan at El. 217 ' -O 3.8 EP-231-8 Diagram of Control Panel-left side (Original Photographs are kept on file with Chemistry
' O-~ Supervision)
__.~- ~;_.- , - - - - __ -- ---r_, _ l
's EP-231 Rsv. 2 ]
Pcee 2 of 45 s . 4
,' TJY/jmv g, \ .
3.9 EP-231-9 Diagram of Control Panel-right side (_) (Original photographs are kept on file with Chemistry Supervision) 3.10 EP-231-10 Control Panel Switch Layout g 3.11 EP-231-ll Schematic of Post Accident Sample Station 4.0 PREREQUISITES l 4.1 Prior to entering the plant to obtain the sample, ensure that the Post Accident Sample Station is operable by verifying that RT-5-030-800-0, POST ACCIDENT SAMPLE STATION OPERABILITY TEST, was successfully performed in the previous six months. 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 5.1 Appropriate Health Physics survey equipment f" 5.2 Air sampler
# 5.3 Respiratory protective equipment 5.4 Anti-C cl'othing 5.5 Whole Body dosimetry 5.6 Gas vial sample tube .
5.7 Iodine & particulate sample assembly l 5.8 14.4 ml gas vials and caps 5.9 Liquid sample bottles and caps 5.10 10cc syringe with stop lock 5.11 Silver zeolite cartridges 5.12 47mm particulate filters - . 5.13 Small bottle of demin water 5.14 Large volume cask {-) ([) 5.15 Small volume cask
4 ----.. EP-231 Rev. 2- '
. Page 3 of 45 TJY/jmv 5.16 Gas sample cask
- .( } .
5.17 Flashlight 5.18 Mirror g. 5.19 Extremity dosimetry 5.20 Watch with secondhand 5.21 -Plastic bag & pole to transport cartridges l 5.22 Gym bag l 5.23 Copy of EP-231-Operation of Post-Accident Sampling l Systems (PASS) l 5.24 Blank Data Sheets l 5.25 Portable Communication Equipment 1 5.26 Clip Board g.E ~ l 5.27 Pens, Pencils, etc. yl 5.28 Towels l 5.29 Control P.anel Power Key l 5.30 Ramp for Large Volume Case 1 5.31 Scissors 6.0 SYMPTOMS None , 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented when a sample shall be taken from the PASS during an emergency situation.
<O O
- w. - - -- _
-* . $ EP-231 Rnv. 2 Page 4 of 45 TJY/jmv PRECAUTIONS hA.r w) 8 . 0 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the S.1 administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines.
. 8.2 Continuous coverage by a health physic's technician may substitute for the Radiation Work Permit.
8.3 Eye protection should be worn by all personnel when obtaining samples from the sample station. 8.4 There is no automatic drain or blow down but there is an alarm light to indicate that the level in the trap T-717 is high and that the trap needs to be drained right away. This trap removes water from the gas sample lines. If the liquid level becomes too high, I water will be sucked into the gas breakdown pump and mechanical damage may result. I 8.5 Minimum amount of time should be spent near the surface of the sample enclosure. l 8.6 The indicator for Area Radiation Detector RE-507 is on g the control panel and its reading should be noted.
] 8.7 Prior to collecting a sample, (and.after the system j has been~, operated) the PASS should be drained and l blown out in accordance with Appendix EP-231-1.
9.0 PROCEDURE . 9.1 ACTIONS l 9.1.1 The (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.1.1.1 After discussing the situation with the l (Interim) Emergency Director, determine which of the following PASS samples are required. A. Drywell atmosphere B. Suppressionpoo[ atmosphere C. Secondary containment atmosphere ( o("% (,, D. Primary coolant atmosphere
- - EP-231 Rev. 2
- - Page 5 of 45
- ' TJY/jmv
[bj 3..
- 9.1.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board b1 to forecast anticipated. radiological I conditions.
I 9.1.1.3 contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and I check on the latest developments related to I radiological conditions and inform him what i sample (s) are to be taken and that Health ' l Physics' coverage is required. I 9.1.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via l Emergency Director) to ascertain desired I sample system availability. I 9.1.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and I inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis 1 Group Leader what analyses are required. I 9.1.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations I froth the Emergency Director for group 1 members (as required) and inform the Plant l Survey Group Leader.of this development. I 9.1.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the PASS ( samples. , l 9.1.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: l 9.1.2.1 After discussing the situation with the l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader, contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and. request a Health Physics technician to
- report to the Chemistry lab to perform the following:
i A. Provide the Group Leader with l radiological conditions that would l impact the sample and route I determination. ! B. Brief the Group Members on radiological ! conditions, precautions and requirements i for entering the area and for handling and analyzing the sample. I C. Provide radiation survey equipment for l l Q constant coverage of the sampling and analysis portions o.f this procedure. l l _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ . __. - _ _ - . _ . _ _ - _ . , _ _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . . - _ . _ _ . . , -
- o. .
- I EP-231 Rev. 2 I Page 6 of 45 !
TJY/jmv )
?
%il ~
D. Provide Group members with the (JI appropriate dosimetry, protective I clothing, and respiratory equipment. l 9.1.2.2 Determine the type of PASS sample to be taken based on the following information. A. Radiological conditions
- 1. In route and within the area
- 2. Expected radiation levels of the sample B. Sampling times (Based on the following information)
Sample Sampling Time i 1. Drywell Atmosphere 25 Min. I A. Upper Drywell l 291' El
.~
l B. Lower Drywell l 242' El l 2. Suppression Pool i Atmosphere l A. 222' El-250 Deg l Azimuth from l North . I B. 222' El-70 Deg l Azimuth from North l 3. Secondary containment 10 Min. l Atmosphere 1 4. Primary Coolant Jet Pump 20 Min. l 5. RHR 25 Min. 1 A. "A" RHR - - l B. "B" RHR l 6
= -
.. w . - - .-
j I
. . EP-231 Rov. 2 )
Page 7 of 45 i
. . TJY/jmv ,
s ,.
\
^31 ,
9.1.2.3 Select the appropriate sample point. L; - Sample Equip. No. Location A. Gas 10s 941(20S 941) El. 217'-0"-
. Area 8 B. Liquid 10S 942(20s 942) El. 217'-0"-
Area 8 1 9.1.2.4 If a particulate / iodine cartridge sample is I to be obtained, contact the Dose Assessment l Team Leader (TSC) for an estimated sampling I time and record this time on Appendix EP-l 231-3. Verify this time as feasible. l 9.1.2.5 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment and once briefed by the H.P. technician to collect and transport the sample to the hot chemistry lab. INSTRUCT THE GROUP MEMBERS TO OBTAIN THE 7 SMALLEST SAMPLE NECESSARY FOR THE ANALYSIS. I 9.1.2.6 Once the sample type and sampling location has been determined, contact the Control Room and request a system line-up to permit collection of the appropriate sample in I accordance with the following information. I Also, inform of any other samples to be I taken and inform operations to contact the l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader I if problems with the line-up arise during - I sampling. e e n ('V
EP-231 Rev. 2 Page 8 of 45 TJY/jmv SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSIT:ON
.m J A. Upper Drywell (291') SV-57-132,134,150 1 B Containment OPEN or -(232,234,250) Atmosphere Sample Lover Dryvell (242') Sys. Isolation HS-57-153(253) Drywell*. Atmosphere AUTC
, Sample Sys. Isolation
*HSS-57-191B(291B) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
- HSS-57-191D(292D) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass B. Suppression Pool ( 222'_) SV-57-183,191 1 A Containment AUTO (250 Deg Azimuth -(283,291) Atmosphere Sample from North) ,
Sys. Isolation
. ~. HS-57-187(287) Suppression Pool AUTO ,()]) Atmosphere Sample Sys. Isolation HSS-57-191A(291A) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass HSS-57-191C(291C) Containment BYPASS Isolation .
Signal Bypass -
- Only necessary if containment isolation signal is present
. . l 1
L. g -- +- ,+ , y-- , w,w.. --e7 w - _ - __-,y-9 .-%m. y-,.-a-,.-y- wy-mm--m,.,_.%,_esy..w -
__ _ _ u
* ' EP-231 Rev. 2 Pego 9 of 45
.' ,' TJY/jmv t
~ SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION N
'~/
C. Suppression Pool (222') SV-57-181(281) 1 B Containment AUTO (70 Deg Azimuth Atmosphere Sample from North) Sys. Isolation HS-57-187(287) Suppression Pool AUTO Atmosphere Sample Sys. Isolation
*HSS-57-191B(291B) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS-57-191C(291C) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass D. Secondary containment No Line-up Necessary E. "A" RHR HV-51-lF079A 1 A RHR Sample OPEN (2F079A) Line Upstream Isolation Valve HV-51-1F080A 1 A RHR Sample OPEN (2F080A) Line Outboard
*HSS-57-191A(291A) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS-57-191B(291B) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass l
- Only necessary if containment isolation signal is present o
<1 w> l I
EP-231 R2v. 2
- . Pcgo 10 of 45 TJY/jev
- SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION
'f'l
%' F . '
"B" RHR HV-51-lF079B (2F079B) 1 B RHR Line Upstream OPEN Isolation Valve HV-51-lF080B 1B RHR Sample OPEN (2F0808) Line Do'wnstream
( Isolation "HSS-57-191A(291A) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
*HSS-57-191B(291B) Containment BYPASS Isolation Signal Bypass
- Only necessary if containment isolation signal is present.
l 9.1.2.7 Have the shift verify that the liquid return line to the Suppression Pool is open by placing the following switch in the appropriate position: v. UNIT SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION 1 HS-52-101D Supp Pool Suction OPEN 2 HS-52-101A Supp Pool Suction OPEN l 9.1.2.8 Appoint one Group member to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample, using the I following guidelines: - l A. Adequate Shielding is available for the sample. I B. Remote handling tools are in place (as I required). l l C. Protective clothing and equipment are l l readily available (as required by HP). l D. Copies of the appropriate sample l handling and analysis procedures are on I hand.
- E. Equipment is properly calibrated, "f'l ]
warmed-up and in place. l [6'."'
h- . _ _ .- - . . - - ___ 1
- EP-231 Rev. 2
- . Page 11 of 45 TJY/jmv
, "'l . USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES
'w.d FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB.
I EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and i Handling of Highly i Radioactive Liquid i l Samples l EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and l Handling of Highly I Radioactive Particulate i Filters and Iodine l Cartridges l EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and l Handling of Highly l Radioactive Gas Samples l l IF THE ROUTE IS INACCESSIBLE, EXIT l IMMEDIATELY AND CONSULT CHEMISTRY SAMPLING l AND ANALYSIS GROUP LEADER FOR ALTERNATIVE
, . I ROUTES.
l 9.1.2.9 If a large volume liquid sample is to be I taken and an outside route is to be taken, I contact the Fire and Damage Repair Team l Leader for providing the means of l transportation for the large volume CASK. l 9.1.2.10 Brief the Health Physics Technician and Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group - members on the following: - A. Team identification B. Communications equipment and channel C. Type of sample (s) to be collected l D. Location of sample points l E. Suggested Routes to be taken F. Precautions for operating the PASS G. Sample transport techniques J H. Projected amount of time required to gg# collect and tranport the sample
EP-231 Rev. 2 Page 12 of 45 TJY/jmv (.(j i I. Review the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparaticr. l and analysis J. Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection K. Alternatives for obtaining and practiced methods of remotely handling the sample (s) l L. Proper completion of data sheets l 9.1.2.11 Instruct group members to immediately report the following as they occur or as the information becomes available. l 9.1.2.12 Copy Appendix EP-230-2, Chemistry Sampling l and Analysis COL for each sample taken. l Fill out all pertinant information as it I becomes available. A. Sample locations that are not accessible or any other reason why the sample can not be collected. (Ya' B. When the sample and group members arrive i at the hot lab. C. Results of the analysis. 9.1.3 The Health Physics Technician shall: l 9.1.3.1 Determine the appropriate route to be taken. I A. SUGGEST ROUTE AND APPROXIMATE TIMES ARE l AS FOLLOWS: (SEE APPENDIX EP-231-7) l 1. Proceeding past the filter l domineralizers and entering the l Turbine Enclosure, El. 217'-0", I turning right and proceeding down I the hall to Area 8. l TIME: Approximately 2 min. l l l I - m _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ . . . _ _ _ _ .
EP-231 Rev. 2 Pege 13 of 45 TJY/jmv
- 2. Proceeding past the condensate demineralizers, turning left and
' C(-sllj
'~'l exiting the Turbine Enclosure (door
#242), turning right, proceeding I around the Turbine Enclosure and re-I entering the Turbine Enclosure (door i #249) and proceeding to the RASS.
l TIME: Approx. 5 min. 1 IF THE ROUTE IS INACCESSIBLE, EXIT l IMMEDIATELY AND CONSULT CHEMISTRY SAMPLING l AND ANALYSIS GROUP LEADER FOR ALTERNATIVE l ROUTES. l l 9.1.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. 9.1.3.3 Provide group members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. ( l 9.1.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: A. RWP requirements B. Routes to PASS Facility C. Authorized doses - D. Radiological concerns and precautions E. Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab F. Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA G. Stay times and Abort Criteria l 9.1.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining l and transporting samples from the PASS. l to l
. EP-231 Rev. 2 Page 14 of 45 TJY/jmv i r
kg . 9.1.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location. If the general area dose rates exceed 5 R/hr at the door leading to the Turbine Enclosure, 217'-0" El. or 10 R/hr within the Turbine enclosure (enroute to or at the sampling point) instruct Group n Members to immediately exit the area and i report to the Chemistry Sampling and ! Analysis Group Leader. I 9.1.3.7 Survey the sample area (concentrating ) especially on the PASS) and the sample container once the sample has been collected 1 and the shielded sample cask. 1 l 9.1.3.8 Documer.t the sample cask survey results and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at the hot lab. I 9.1.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-241, EP-242 or EP-243.
~
9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: 9.1.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job b'riefing at the chemistry lab. I 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the Administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient - exposure remaining to successfully completc the assigned task. I 9.1.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample. PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS l 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the approriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the H.P. technician or RWP). 9.1.4.5 Obtain the key to the control panel power i from the Group Leader. (IF necessary).
., ._ - . , ~ . . - _.-- - -
EP-231 Rev. 2 Pcge 15 of 45
,' TJY/jmv
_ 9.1.4.6 Once the group has been briefed and the l qj appropriate equipment has been assembled proceed to the PASS using the pre-determined route and collect the sample in accordance with the appropriate appendix to this I procedure. (see following), I Appendix Title EP-231 Procedure for Draining the Trap, Sump and Collector EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining 14.4 ml Gas Sample EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining Iodine / Particulate Sample EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining a small Volume Liquid Sample EP-231 Procedure for Obtaining a Large Liquid Sample and/or a Dissolved Gas Sample lh EP-231 Procedure for Flushing the Liquid and Dissolved Gas System 9.1.4.7 Once the H.P. technician has surveyed the sample cask, take the sample to the hot lab retracing the route back from the sample point. Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, the sample vill be handled and stored in a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. l 9.1.4.8 Inform Contact the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the hot lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. 9.2 FOLLOW-UP l 9.2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader I shall: 9.2.1.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director (( ) and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF). l
~ '
EP-231 R;v. 2 Pcgo 16 of 45
,' TJY/jmv Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader
((x.s) I l 9.2.2 shall: I 9.2.2.1 Notify Shift Supervision that a sample has been taken and the aligned valves may be returned to the " NORMAL" position.
! 9.2.2.2 Have group member (s) dose mo'nitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded.
I 9.2.2.3 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. I 9.2.2.4 Instruct the group members to perform calculations (if any) on the Data Sheet of the appropriate Appendix. I 9.2.2.5 Collect the Control Panel Power Key from the group member and return it to the Team Leader. I 9.2.2.6 Instruct the appropriate group members to refer to the appropriate procedure for (, , guidance on sample preparation and handling. Samole Procedure No. Liquid (EP-241) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples Iodine (EP-242) Sample Preparation and. (Particulate) Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges Gas (EP-243) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples l 9.2.2.7 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets and report the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling I . and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data l Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. I 9.2.2.8 Enter Data into RMMS, if appropriate.
EP-231 R;v. 2
. . P ga 17 of 45
. TJY/jmv Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Cgl 9.2.3 members shall:
O . I 9.2.3.1 Complete the appropriate Appendix Data l Sheet (s) when applicable. I 9.2.3.2 Prepare, handle, and analyze the sample using the appropriate procedure. I 9.2.3.3 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. I 9.2.3.4 Properly file the analysis report and report back to the Group Leader for reassignment
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation 10.2 M-102 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 217'-0" 10.3 M-30, Rev. 2 - Post Accident Sampling P&ID 10.4 M-42, Proposed Rev. 24 - Nuclear Boiler Vessel Instrumentation 10.5 M-51, Sht. 1 - Rev. 21, Sht. 2 - Rev. 21, Residual Heat Removal P&ID 10.6 M Sht. 1 - Proposed Rev. 23, Containment Atmosphere Control P&ID 10.7 M1-D24-200 1, Vol. I & II, GEK83344, Operation and Maintenance Instructions - PASS, Vol. I& II 10.8 A-107, Rev. 30, Architectural Floor Plan at Elevation 217'-0". p G
EP-231 R;v. 2
* * ~
Appandix 1 Pcg3 18 of 45 TJY/jmv . APPENDIX EP-231-1 PROCEDURE FOR DRAINING THE TRAP, SUMP AND COLLECTOR (til .
/
1 1. Check that the nitrogen supply valves are open and that the l pressure is set at 100 p,sig by opening the following valves: l Demin Water Tank' ' N2 Bottle 1 Unit 1 1 30-0017 PC7-30-074 30-1114 1 30-0022 l or or l N2 Bottle 2 Unit 2 l PCV-30-073 30-2114 1 30-0023 l 2. Check that the Demineralized Flush Water Tank OOT 945 is full and is pressurized ~at 100 psig and the Valves (30-0014, 30-1100 (30-2100) are open te the sample station. I If not, open valves 30-0011 and 30-0015, verify that valve 30-
,1
~
0014 is open, remove the plug on the Hydro Test Tap by valve 30-l 0015, and SLOWLY open valve 30-0010. Continue flow until water I appears at the test tap. Close valve 30-0010 FIRST, then close I valves 30-0011 and 30-0015. Replace the Test Tap plug and I secure. I 3. Verify that the damper is open to Secondary Containment. l 4. Check that FCV-627 is open and if it is not, use the knob adjacent to PCV-627 on the control panel to have a 15 psi ' reading on the gauge. l A GOOD WAY TO BE SURE THAT THE DISCHARGE LINE IS OPEN IS TO l ESTABLISH A FLOW THRU FCV-627 BECAUSE THIS FLOW CAN BE OBSERVED I AT THE CONTROL PANEL ON FLOW INDICATOR FI-664. I 5. Turn all control panel switches up and "OFF" (except HC-723, place in position 4 " SPARE") and then TURN the control Panel l Power Selector Switch HC-600 to "A" (Alternate "B"). l 6. Drain Collector -Tank, Trap and Sump by turning Switch HC-715-1 clockwise through its eight positions pausing approximately 5 seconds at each position. (O f
EP-231 R;v. 2 Appandix 1 Pcgo 19 of 45 TJY/jmv . APPENDIX EP-231-1 ( _. PROCEDURE FOR DRAINING THE TRAP, SUMP AND COLLECTOR (CONT)
\_/ =
1 7. Turn all switches (except for HC-723 which is left in position i 4) to their "OFF" position. (Leave HC-600 in the ON position if I more samples are to be taken). . I 8. If no more samples are to be taken, close nitrogen supply valves I opened in Step No. 2. I 9. Close FCV-627 by setting PCV-627 to O psig. I 10. If no more samples are to be taken, close the Demin Water Tank i valves opened in Step No. 1. I 11. If no more samples are to be taken, close the damper to l Secondary Containment. e
\
(/ ~t) , l
EP-231 Rsv. 2
, Apptndix 2 20 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-2 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE C'k 7 Q) -
- 1. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1.
- 2. With the sump drain system switch in the "OFF" position, place Switch HC-700 (liquid / gas selector) in the " GAS" position.
I Ensure N2 bottle valves are open and regulated to approximately 100 psig. Make sure the gas chiller E-703 is on. Quickly inspect the needle in the gas port to determine that its condition is satisfactory for obtaining a sample.
- 3. Install the gas filter drawer into position. If a particulate / iodine sample will be obtained later, make sure that the desired filter cartridges are properly installed in the I cartridge retainer. Verify that the drawer position light is I green.
- 4. Turn Switch HC-723 (GAS SAMPLE SELECTOR SWITCH) to the desired sample location:
POSITION LOCATION 1 Drywell Atmosphere
. 2 Suppression Pool Atmosphere
- 3 Secondary Containment Atmosphere 4 Spare In addition, open all required Reactor system valves in the gas sample and return line:
SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION Upper Drywell (291') HSS-57-146(246) Sup Pool /Drywell DRYWELL Air To Post - ACDT Samp Lower Drywell (242') HSS-57-147(247) Sup Pool /Drywell DRYWELL Air To Post ACDT Samp Suppression Pool (222') HSS-57-147(247) Sup Pool /Drywell SUPP POOL (250 Deg Azimuth Air To Post from North) ACDT Samp Suppression Pool (222') HSS-57-146(246) Sup Pool /Drywell SUPP POOL (70 Deg Azimuth Air To Post from North) 's ACDT Samp Secondary Containment No Line-up Necessary k()
EP-231 R2v. 2 Appandix 2 21 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-2 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE (CONT) C.-m L) -
- 5. Place a standard 14.4 milliliter off gas vial into the gas vial positioner, slide the positioner into the gas port. Observe that the bottle status light changes from red to green. If the light does not change to green, reposition the bottle.
- 6. Turn the 10 ml Gas Sample Switch HC-705 to position 2 and circulate gas for a period long enough to assure that the sample lines are flushed out with gas being sampled. The minimum time required is 5 minutes.
Be sure that the flow as read by the rotameter thru the sample i enclosure window is in the expected range of 11.8 to 16.5 SLPM. Record flow and flush duration on data sheet.
- 7. Turn HC-705 to position 3 and evacuate the off gas vial. Record pressure PI-708 of the evacuated vial on the data sheet. Make sure the vacuum in the gas vial reaches a stable minimum reading.
- 8. Turn HC-705 to position 4, "TAKE SAMPLE". Make sure that PI-708 does not change.
lh If the pressure changes significantly, it may indicate a system leak. Therefore, turn Switch HC-705 counter clockwise to I position 2. Remove the sample vial and place in a plactic bag I for transportation to the hot lab. Place a new 14.4 ml off gas sample vial into the gas positioner and return to Step 5.
- 9. Press the HC-720 button to obtain the sample. Keep button depressed until a steady pressure is reached (approximately 5 '
seconds). Record pressure from PI-708 on data sheet. This pressure should correspond to actual pressure of sample being obtained. Record sample temperature TI-724 on data sheet.
- 10. Turn HC-705 to position 5 " FLUSH SYSTEM" and flush for approximately 1 minute.
- 11. Turn HC-705 to position 6, 7 and 8; and then straight up to "OFF".
I 12. Turn Switch HSS-57-146 or HSS-57-147 (opened is Step 4) to the CLOSE position. ,
- k. )
. EP-231 Rav. 2
~
Appandix 2 22 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-2 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE (CONT)
- 13. Wearing cotton liners and gloves, and observing ALARA practices, I withdraw the gas vial positioner and immediately have the HP l technician survey the gas sample vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on the Data Sheet. Keep the vial at the maximum distance from the individual and quickly insert the sample bottle into the gas vial cask. Close and latch the gas vial cask. Put a stopper or the gas vial positioner back into the port in the sample station.
I 14. Turn the Gas Chiller E-703 off. I 15. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1. l e (Q
- _ . , ~ _ - . - . - ___ _ . ._ - . _ _ . _. _ - _ _ . . _ ,
EP-231 Rev. 2 Appendix 2 23 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-2 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A 14.4 ML GAS SAMPLE (CONT) l l Data Sheet for 14.4 ML Gas Sample ' l DESIRED ANALYSIS . A. B. C.
- 1. Sample Source Date Time 1 2. Sample Flow FI-725 (SLPM)
- 3. Flush Duration (Min.)
- 4. Absolute Pressure of Vial PI-708 (PSIA)
- 5. Final Sample Pressure PI-708 (PSIA)
- 6. Sample Temperature f TI-724 (F)
- 7. Calculated Sample Volume (ML)
V= (14.7)(14.4) (T F + 460) (530) (P PSIA) l 8. Initi&l Contact Dose Rate (mR) Name l l . l l . l
<~s 1 l
s
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. _ - 1
. EP-231 Rav. 2
. Appendix 3
. Page 24 of 45 TJY/jmv
\/ .
APPENDIX EP-231-3 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE I 1. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1
- 2. Verify that HC-715-1 SUMP DRAIN SYSTEM SWITCH is in the "OFF" position. Place Switch HC-700 (LIQUID / GAS SELECTOR) in the
" GAS" position.
- 3. If the gas filter drawer is already in place and there is any doubt about the desired filters being in place, pull the drawer and check the filter cartridge (s). Put the desired filter cartridge (s) into the cartridge retainer, put the cartridge retainer into the gas filter drawer and put the drawer into the sample station and verify that the drawer position light is
. green. If not, reposition the drawer.
- 4. Decide whether a timed or non-timed sample is desired and record. Generally speaking, if a high activity condition exists
~
or is suspected, a timed sample should be taken. For a timed
. sample, set the Timer KC-712 between the range of 0 to 30 seconds. Select a low enough time so that the activity on the filter cartridge will not be unnecessarily high and cause special handling problems. Observe the RE-7C4 reading to determine if there'is a rapid activity buildup. Set the Switch HC-704 located to the left of the timer labeled TIME SAMPLE on either YES or NO.
- 5. Check that the nitrogen supply system is operating with pressure at 100 psig. Make sure the Gas Cooler E-703 is on.
- 6. Turn the GAS SAMPLE SELECTOR SWITCH (HC-723) to the desired sample source.
SAMPLE SOURCE POSITION Drywell Atmosphere 1 Suppression Pool Atmosphere 2 Secondary Containment Atmosphere 3 Spare 4
EP-231 Rav. 2
. . Appandix 3 Page 25 of 45 .
TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-3
~
\~/ PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE (CONT)
- 7. Open all required Reactor system valves in the gas sample and
. return lines for the aopropriate sample:
SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION 1-Upper Drywell (291') HSS-57-146(246) Sup Pool /Drywell DRYWELL Air To Post ACDT Samp Lower Drywell (242') HSS-57-147(247) Sup Pool /Drywell DRYWELL , Air To Post ACDT Samp , Suppression Pool (222') HSS-57-147(247) Sup Pool /Drywell SUPP POOL (250 Deg Azimuth Air To Post from North) ACDT Samp Suppression Pool (222') HSS-57-146(246) Sup Pool /Dryvell SUPP POOL (70 Deg Azimuth Air To Post e from North) ACDT Samp Secondary Containment No Line-up Necessary
- 8. Turn the IODINE CARTRIDGE SAMPLE SWITCH HC-712 to position 2 and circulate gas for a period long enough to assure that the sample lines are flushed out with the gas being sampled. Minimum flush time is approximately 5 minutes. Record the flush time on the data sheet.
- I
- 9. Be sure the flow as read by the rotometer which is visible thru the window in the sample station enclosure is in the expected i l range of 11.8 to 16.5 slpm. Record the flow (FI-725), I temperature (TI-724) and pressure (PI-726 and PI-727) on the data sheet. The two pressure gages (PI-726 and PI-727), as read thru the window, should be the same.
I STEPS 10 AND 11 MUST BE DONE IN CONJUNCTION WITH EACH OTHER l
- 10. Turn HC-712 to position 3. The sample gas will start to flow through the filter cartridge. On the DATA SHEET record PI-727, PI-726, FI-725, the flow duration in seconds and RI-704.
(( ) 5 _ , .4--=,---,-e.e.+- ,- --n.,, ,. m y .w s%., ,n--,, _ , - . - ,,,y, - , - . ,-e2-,a w wwn+-w-- w -- v e-
EP-231 Rcv. 2 Appandix 3 Page 26 of 45 TJY/jmv ( APPENDIX EP-231-3 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE (CONT) l l
- 11. After the timer has timed out for a timed sampid or after the predetermined time has elapsed for a non-timed sample, turn Selector Switch HC-712 to position 4 for 10 seconds to evacuate the filter cartridge. A vacuum will be quickly drawn on the system.
I 12. Turn Switch HC-712 to position 5 which will admit a nitrogen flush through the filter cartridge to remove Krypton and Xenon gases. This purge should last approximately 20 seconds or until RI-704 is stable. Record the final radiation, RI-704.
- 13. Rotate HC-712 to up and "OFF" position. Turn other switches to the upright and "OFF" positions. Remove filter and cartridge I retainer and immediately survey the cartridges and record the l Initial Contact Dose Rate on the Data Sheet and put the holder I in a plastic bag. Tape bags closed. If available, install a l new cartridge retainer complete with filter paper and iodine l cartridges. Put drawer back into sample enclosure. Use a pole
'l or rope to increase distance while transporting. Sample or
(},gg I place the sample into a transport cask.
- 14. Turn Switch HSS-57-146 or HSS-57-147 opened 'in Step 7 to the CLOSE position.
I 15. Turn the Gas Chiller E-703 off. I 16. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1. O v
Mf-83X Mev. s Apprndix 3 Pcge 27 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-3 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING IODINE / PARTICULATE SAMPLE (CONT) () - Data Sheet for Iodine / Particulate Sample i DESIRED ANALYSIS l A. . l B. __ l ESTIMATED SAMPLING TIME
- 1. Sample Source Date Time
- 2. Orifice Size 3.0
- 3. Timed Sample Yes or No
- 4. Flush Time in Minutes l 5. Sample Flow FI-725 (not thru cartridge) (slpm)
- 6. Temperature TI-724 (F)
- 7. Pressure PI-726 (PSIG)
- 8. Pressure PI 727 (PSIG)
- 9. Pressure PI-726 (critical flow thru cartridge) (PSIG)
- 10. Pressure PI-727 (PSIG)
- 11. Flow FI-725 (scfh)
- 12. Flow Duration seconds .
J l'. Radiation RI-704 (mR/hr)
- 14. Final Radiation RI-704 (mr/hr)
I 15. Initial Contact Dose Rate (mR) NOTE: When critical flow is obtained through the cartridge
- assembly, a flow of 3.0 liters per minute +15% is achieved. This is true as long as PI-727 Is at a minimum of 12 inches mercury vacuum.
Name l l _
-....L--.. . . . - _ - ~ . . - -.~ .- - ...
,' ,' EP-231 Rev. 2 Appendix 4 Page 28 of 45 TJY/jmv
(:) APPENDIX EP-231-4 C. PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SNMPLE l IF A SAMPLE IS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE JET PUMP (JET PUMP 4 SENSING l LINE), THERE EXISTS THE POSSIBILITY OF EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE XV-l 42-lF059H TRIPPING WHICH WILL REQUIRE MANUAL RESETTING BY l OPERATIONS. THE ALARMS ARE LOCATED ON LOCAL PANEL 10C228 (20C228) l AND MAIN CONTROL BOARD ANNUNCIATOR 1BC802-35 (2BC802-35) (EXCESS l FLOW CHECK VALVE OPERATED PANEL C228). IF AT ANY TIME WHILE l SAMPLING AN INDICATION OF DECREASING FLOW (FCV627) AND/OR DECREASING l PRESSURE (PI661) IS NOTICED, CONTACT THE CONTROL ROOM AND REQUEST l MONITORING OF THESE ANNUNCIATORS.
- 1. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1.
- 2. Verify that the nitrogen supply is still on and the pressure is regulated to 100 psig.
I 3. Verify that the Demineralized Flush Water Tank 00T 945 is I adequately filled and is still pressurized at 100 psig and the Valves (30-0014, 30-1100,(30-2100)) are open to the sample station. ()l -
- 4. Load the syringe with 10cc of demineralized water. Place the stopcock on the syringe and load the assembly onto the injection port.
- 5. Check that the small volume cask is in the cask positioner, and
; that both are hanging from the hooks below the sample station.
- 6. Remove stopper and carrying handle from the small cask by unscrewing it and lifting it out. Leave stopper near by.
- 7. Put a 15 ML sample bottle with an outer aluminum retainer ring, I and neoprene cap into the small volume cask. Check that the bottle lifting lever is free to move up and down. The bottle must fit snugly in the holder and be vertically aligned. If the
! bottle does not fit snugly, use a small pad of rubber or felt, thick enough to hold vial against the upper yoke of the vial I holder and/or attach the bottle to the vial holder with Velco I tape. I CAUTION: THE LEAD SHIELDING DRAWER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 70 POUNDS.
- 8. Make certain the lead shielding drawer i.s out so that the needles under the sample station enclosure are exposed. Quickly
~N inspect the needles with a mirror and flashlight. Check that (d the longest part of the needle is towards the center of the sample vial.
. . EP-231, Rev. 2
. . Appandix 4
- Page 29 of 45
. . TJY/jmy APPENDIX EP-231-4 kTl '
PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT)
- 9. Swing the cask into position under the sample station and lock the arms of the cask holder so the cask and bottle will remain i in position.
l l 10. Back off PCV-627. l l 11. To check the fit and operation of the sample vial without i bringing a hot sample into the system, turn HC-616-1 SMALL l VOLUME SAMPLE switch to position 3 (FLUSH LOOP). I 12. With control panel power on and all other switches in the up and "OFF" position, set Switch HC-700 to the " LIQUID" position and Liquid Sample Selector Switch HC-626 to position 2 (Jet Pump Line) if a jet pump sample is desired or to position 4 (RPV or Suppression Pool) if the Reactor valves were set for a RHR l sample. Adust PCV-627 so that the flow thru FCV-627 does not i exceed 1 gpm (See FI-664). Also, if a RHR sample is desired, close the normal RHR sample
- lines by turning the respective switch:
fll SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH SWITCH NAME POSITION l "A" RHR HS-51-199A(299A) RHR Ex Normal CLOSE Sample ISLN Loop A l "B" RHR HS-51-199B(299B) RHR Hx Normal CLOSE Sample ISLN Loop B l 13. Raise the sample bottle into position on the needles by moving the lever on the side of the cask. I 14. Screw the lift rod in to hold the sample bottle in the engaged position. Note: If the vial does not clear the entry hole, lower the vial and rotate the small volume cask about 1/8" in either direction. If it still does not fit either the liquid vial positioner fixture or liquid tray positioner needs adjustment. Note: The green light for the small volume sample should be on. If the light remains red, unscrew the lift rod, lower the bottle and reposition. i l 15. Turn HC-616-1 to the up and OFF position. l
l, , EP-231, Rnv. 2 l AppDndix 4
,' Pcge 30 of 45 TJY/jmy t
APPENDIX EP-231-4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT) l l 16. Turn Liquid Sample Selector Switch HC-626 to position 1 (Jet Pump Line on Bypass) for a sample from the jet pump line or to l position 5 (RPV or Sup'n Pool on Bypass) for a sample from the l l RHR line. Adjust PCV-627 so that the flow thru FCV-627 does not l exceed 1 gpm. (See FI-664) Continue this flow thru bypass valve CV-626 for a long enough period to be assured that the sample lines are flushed. The minimum time required to do this is 7 minutes. Record the flow and flush time on the data sheet. I 17. After flush is completed, turn Switch HC-626 to position 2 (for jet pump sample) or position 4 (for RHR sample). Note that the flow on Indicator FI-664 is greatly reduced. Adjust Valve FCV-627 for a flow of 0.3 gpm, using PCV-627. I 18. Record the following on the data sheet: 1 Flow (FI-664) ~ l Pressure (PI-661)
,I Temperature (TI-660)
I {ggl Conductivity (CI-663)
)
l Radiation (RI-665) I 19. Turn Small Volume Liquid Selector HC-616-1 to "TAKE SAMPLE" position (position 1). Valve CV-616 will rotate and carry the sample into alignment with the line to the sample bottle. Wait for valve CV-616 light to come on. l
. j l 20. Open the stopcock on the syringe and inject 10cc of water into the line. Close the syringe stopcock. Remove the syringe and fill it with air. Reattach the syringe, open the stopcock and inject the air, then close the stopcock and remove the syringe.
I 21. Unscrew the lift rod and lower the sample bottle. l l l 22. Turn the Switch HC-616-1 (small volume sample sv) to the FLUSH i LOOP position (3). Make sure there is enough flow by adjusting , PCV-627 so that it is set to at least 15 psig. Flush for 5 I minutes and/or until RI-665 reaches a minimum. I 23. When the flush is complete, turn HC-626 (Liquid Sample Source l Selector Switch) "OFF" FIRST and then HC-616-1 to "OFF" l l (position 2). i { (]) l 24. Verify Switch HS-51-199A(299A) or HS-51-199B(299B) is in the j s l CLOSE position.
I EP-231, Rev. 2 Appandix 4 Page 31 of 45 TJY/jmy APPENDIX EP-231-4 ( )) PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT) i 25. Unlock the arms of the cask holder and swing the cask out. l 26. Remove the sample cask from the cask holder by using cotton ) I liners and gloves and immediately survey the liquid vial and , I record the Initial Contact Dose Rate.on the Data Sheet. If the ' I sample is greater than 100 mR/hr, use the sample cask to carry l the sample to the Hot Lab. I 27. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1. e l l l
66 App 2ndix 4 , Pege 32 of 45 I TJY/jmy
. APPENDIX EP-231-4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A SMALL VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE (CONT)
Data Sheet for Small Volume Licuid Sample DESIRED ANALYSIS A. B. C. D. E.
- 1. Sample Source Date Time
- 2. Bypass Flow FI-664 (gpm)
- 3. Flush Time Minutes
- 4. Sample Flow FI-664 (gpm) 5.
~
Pressure PI-661 (psig) (ll 6. Temperature TI-660 (F)
- 7. Conductivity Scale CI-663
- 8. Radiation RI-665 (mR/hr) l 9. Initial Contact Dose Rate __ (mR) 9 Name i
I I t _ _ , . . . . _ _ - --
EP-231 Rsv. 2 Appendix 5 Pege 33 of 45 .
' ~
TJY/jmv , APPENDIX EP-231-5
-s PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE
<-) -
AND/OR A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE IF A SAMPLE IS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE JET PUMP (JET PUMP 4 SENSING LINE), THERE EXISTS THE POSSIBILITY OF EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE XV-42-lF059H TRIPPING WHICH WILL REQUIRE MANUAL RESETTING BY OPERATIONS. THE ALARMS ARE LOCATED ON LOCAL PANEL 10C228 AND MAIN CONTROL BOARD ANNUNCIATOR 1BC802-35 (EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE OPERATED PANEL C228). IF AT ANY TIME WHILE SAMPLING AN INDICATION OF DECREASING FLOW (FCV627) AND/OR DECREASING PRESSURE (PI661) IS NOTICED, CONTACT THE CONTROL ROOM AND REQUEST MONITORING OF THESE ANNUNCIATORS.
- 1. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1.
I 2. Verify that the nitrogen supply is still on and the pressure is I regulated to 100 psig. l 3. Verify that the demineralized water tank is adequately filled I and pressurized to 100 psig.
- 4. If a dissolved gas sample is to be taken open the tracer gas bottle valve and regulate to 2-3 psig. Record pressure.
- 5. Make certain the lead shield drawer is out so that the needles under the sample station enclosure are exposed. Quickly inspect the needles with a mirror and flashlight. Check that the longest part of the needle is toward the center of the sample vial.
- 6. Remove lead stopper from large volume cask and put a 15 ML sample bottle with an outer aluminum retainer ring and a neoprene cap into the large cask. Note sample bottle must fit.
snugly in the holder and be vertically aligned. If necessary, I place small pad under sample vial and/or attach the vial to the I holder with velco Tape. With cask in fully lowered position, roll cask into position under the sample station. l 7. Back off PCV-627. I 8. Using the hydraulic pump slowly raise the cask, checking for proper alignment. Stop pumping when top cask ring is inside and the large volume cask is just below the bottom of the sample station. . I 9. To check the fit and operation of the sample vial without I bringing a hot sample into the system, turn HC-616-1 SMALL l VOLUME SAMPLE switch to position 3 (FLUSH LOOP). (
-^ ^-
c wemns- me. a Appendix 5
- - Page 34 of 45
- - TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE AND/OR A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE (CONT) i 10. Place the gas vial in the holder and insert into the dissolved I gas sample point. Note that the dissolved gas sample light I turns green. If it does not, readjust the vial position.
I 11. With control panel power on and all other switches in the up and "OFF" position, set Switch HC-700 to the liquid position,.and Liquid Sample Selector Switch HC-626 to position 2 if a jet pump sample is desired or to position 4 if the Reactor valves were I set for a RHR sample. Adjust PCV-627 so that the flow thru FCV-l 627 does not exceed 1 gpm (see FI-664). I 12. Push the plunger down which causes the sample bottle to be raised out of the cask and up onto the two needles. Note that the " bottle in" light will change from red to green. If the cask is not' aligned properly, lower bottle and reposition cask. I 13. Make certain that HC-616-1 (Small Volume Sample Switch) is in the "OFF" position. I 14. Turn the Liquid Sample Source Selector Switch HC-626 to position 1 for jet pump bypass line sample or 5 for RER sample. ( ]) If RHR sample is desired, close the sample line valves to the normal sample station: SAMPLE LOCATION SWITCH POSITION l "A" RHR HS-51-199A(299A) CLOSE l "B" RHR HS-51-199B(299B) CLOSE , I l 15. FI-664 on control panel should be approximately 1 gpm. PI-661, TI-660, CI-663 and RI-665 should start to have meaningful values. I 16. Adjust PCV-627 so that the flow on FI-664 does not exceed 1 gpm. Continue this flow for a long enough period (at least 7 minutes) to be assured that the sample lines are flushed out with liquid being sampled. RECORD THE FLOW FROM FI-664 AND FLUSH TIME ON DATA SHEET. I 17. When flush is completed, turn HC-626 Sample Source Selector Switch to position 2 for a jet pump sample or position 4 if Reactor valves were positioned for a RHR sample. Adjust FCV-627 for a flow of 0.3 gpm (to adjust FCV-627 use PCV-627).
EP-231 Rsv. 2 l , , Appandix 5 !
. . Pege 35 of 45 l
. . TJY/jmv l
- . APPENDIX EP-231-5 l PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE AND/OR A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE (CONT)
I 18. Turn the Dissolved Gas and Liquid Sample System Switch HC-601 to position 1 and observe that P-701 starts and Valve CV-622 rotates. I 19. Turn Switch HC-601 to position 2. Observe that P-601 starts. I 20. Record the following on the data sheet: l Flow (FI-664) l Pressure (PI-661) l Temperature (TI-660) l Conductivity (CI-663) l Radiation (RI-665) l 21. Turn Switch HC-601 to position 3 to isolate the sample and start
- the dissolved gas separator. Leave in this position for m approximately 10 seconds.
(')l l
- 22. IF IT IS NOT DESIRABLE TO INTRODUCE TRACER GAS, TURN HC-601 TO POSITION 5 QUICKLY JOH) VALVE WILL NOT ROTATE. PROCEED TO STEP 1 25.
l 23. Turn HC-601 to position 4 to inject tracer gas into valve CV-615. When the valve is rotated during the next step the tracer gas trapped in the passage of the ball valve will be inserted in the sample flow loop. Leave in this position for approximately 10 seconds. Read and record the tracer gas supply system pressure so tracer gas can be accurately calculated. The flow of tracer gas should be very small so that pressure drops in the line and valves will be insignificant. I 24. Turn HC-601 to position 5. Let some of the dissolved gas ; separate from the liquid. l 25. Read and record initial pressure PI-662. I 26. Turn HC-601 to position 6*. Pump P-601 stops and CV-653 opens relieving liquid loop pressure. -
- DO NOT LEAVE HC-601 IN POSITIGN 6 FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS.
, ,-s l 27 Turn HC-601 to position 7 This will bring the rest of
{,) dissolved gas into V-610. Leave in position for 10 seconds.
LW-2mFYeV.- 3 i Appendix 5
. Page 36 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE 7,
AND/OR A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE (CONT) l
\_) -
l 28. Read and record PI-662 on P-1. This will be the approximate pressure of the liquid loop.
- l 29. Turn HC-601 to position 8 for no more than 5 seconds (this will open CV-653 again). Dissolved gas will rise to hold up Cylinder V-610 and then into Collection Chamber V-662.
I 30. Turn HC-601 to position 9 to get ready to take the dissolved gas sample or to relieve the collection chamber pressure. Pump P-601 will stop so that if the relieve pressure option is next exercised record PI-662 as P2 on data sheet as this is the pressure of the liquid sample loop. l 31. Dissolved gas sample? l YES __ PROCEED TO STEP 32 l NO __ PROCEED TO STEP 33 1 32. To take the dissolved gas sample, Switch HC-652 will be used. When HC-652 is turned clockwise to gas sample, the pressure as indicated by PI-662 will decrease while the dissolved gas is drawn into sample bottle. Turn HC-652 to gas sample and hold for at least 10 seconds until PI-662 is very steady. Then release HC-652 and it will spring back to center position. Turn HC-652 again to gas sample. Verify equalized pressure and read PI-662. Record the steady pressure as P3 reading on the data I sheet. Proceed to Step 34. I 33. As an alternate to Step 28, when a dissolved gas sample is not I desired, it is only necessary to relieve the gas pressure back' to the suppression pool by rotating Switch HC-652 counter clockwise to relieve pressure position and hold it while watching PI-662. The pressure will equalize rapidly. I 34. Large Volume Sample? I YES __ PROCEED TO STEP 35 i NO __ PROCEED TO STEP 36 l l 1 35. If a large volume liquid sample is desired, turn HC-601 to position 10. HC-629-1 must be pushed and held for 10 seconds or i 5 more for liquid to be drawn into the sample bottle. Proceed I to Step 37. 1 m ((d l l ~ _. . _ - - l
. - - ,, .-$ , - l
WW-WT3 Wev. 3 Appandix 5
*
- Page 37 cf 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE
('() - AND/OR A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE (CONT) 1 36. If a large liquid sample is not desired, turn Switch HC-601 to I the "OFF" position very quickly so that Valve CV-620 will not I rotate and no radioactive liquid will be in the*line ahead of l CV-629. I 37. Turn HC-601 to "OFF". I 38. Lower liquid sample bottle into large cask by pulling up on the plunger handle. Note: Do not turn or twist bottle while it is on the needles because the needles will bend. l 39. Lower the cask on the cart by relieving hydraulic oil pressure with the small petcock handle on the hydraulic cylinder. I 40. Slide the lead shield drawer back into the enclosure to cover opening for the needles. I 41. Roll the cask out fror. under the sample station and immediately I survey the liquid vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate 1 on the Data Sheet. Quickly plug cask. Use the cask to transport the sample if greater than 100 mR/hr. Use RI-665 to f determine Gross Activity of the sample. l 42. Open and place gas vial carrying cask near sample station. Remove gas vial positioner from sample enclosure. Keep the vial at maximum distance from the individual and insert sample bottle into the gas vial cask. Close and latch the gas vial cask. l 43. Perform a flush of the liquid system with Switch HC-628-1 per Appendix EP-231-6. . 6 (C ) l l
.-., -.-.h-,,.-. ,- , . - - + . - .-.,e , , . , ,,-,ny, --
LW-703E MM. 5 Appsndix 5 Page 38 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-5 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LICUID SAMPLE AND/OR A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE (CObT) s_J DATA SHEET DESIRED ANALYSIS
- A.
B. C. D. E.
- 1. Sample Source Date Time 1 2. Krypton Tracer Gas Pressure psig I 3. Bypass Flow FI-664 gpm
-l 4. Flush Time Minutes l 5. Sample Flow FI-664 gpm l 6. Pressure PI-6Cl psig l 7. Temperature TI-660 I 8. Conductivity Meter Scale CI-663 ,
l 9. Radiation RI-665 l 10. Tracer Gas Supply System Pressure psig i 11. Initial Pressure P-O PI-662 1 12. Pressure P-1 PI-662 l 13. Stabilized Pressure P2 PI-662 l 14. Sample Pressure P3 PI-662 , l 15. Initial Contact Dose Rate (mR) (O
, EP-231 RLv. 2
. . Appsndix 5
. . Pega 39 of 45
. . TJY/jmv
- APPENDIX EP-231-5 J
~'s PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A LARGE VOLUME LIQUID SAMPLE
(/ ~ AND/OR A DISSOLVED GAS SAMPLE (CONT) DATA SHEET (CONT) 1 16. V1 H2 (From GC) ml l 17. V2 O2 (from GC) ml l 18. V2 Kr (from GC) ml i 19. Vol % O2 % O2 Kr l Vol % O2 = (V2 .2P-o) x (P-o + 14.7) 17317 V2 Kr
~
i 20. Vol % H2 % H2 Kr
. Vol % H2 = V1 x (P-o + 14.7) 17317 V2 Kr 1
\
Name i I l (Qs_
~
EP-231 Rcv. 2 Appandix 6 Pego 40 of 45 TJY/jmv -
~
APPENDIX EP-231-6 PROCEDURE FOR FLUSHING THE LIQUID AND DISSOLVED GAS SYSTEM i 1. Verify that the nitrogen supply is still on and the pressure is I regulated to 100 psig. .
~
l 2. Verify that the demin water tank is adequately filled and I pressurized to 100 psig.
- 3. Make sure that FCV-627 is open by adjusting PCV-627 to 15 psig.
I NEVER EXCEED 1 GPM ON FI-664
- 4. Switch HC-626 (Liquid Sample Source Selector Switch) must be in position 2 (jet pump) or 4 (RHR) and HC-700 (Liquid or Gas Selector Switch) must be in the LIQUID position.
- 5. Turn the FLUSH SYSTEM SWITCH (HC-628-1) to position 2 (Start Flush) which will close the inlet sample lines and start the flush with demineralized water from 00T 945. Observe that there is a flow per FI-664.
_ 6. After RI-665 shows radiation has decreased significantly, or after 5 minutes, turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 3 (Flush V-610 (} 7. Loop) to flush the V-610 loop. Watch RI-665. After a few minutes, turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 4 (Flush P-601 Loop) and flush the P-601 loop. Watch RI-665.
- 8. After a few minutes, turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 5 (Flush CV-615) and flush Valve CV-615. Watch RI-665.
- 9. After a few minutes, turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 6 (Flush-Piping Station) and flush the piping station for 3 minutes.
- 10. Turn Switch HC-628-1 to position 7 (Flush CV-622 Loop) for a few minutes to flush loop CV-622. Watch RI-665.
- 11. Turn HC-626 to "OFF" FIRST and then HC-628-1 to "OFF".
- 12. If RI-665 did not indicate an acceptable radiation level at any
- step of the operation, go back and repeat Steps 4 thru 11.
t l 13. Drain the system per Appendix EP-231-1. - O
l 1 i EP-231 Rev. 2
.. Appendix 7 '
. Page 41 of 45
. . TJY/jmv
- APPENDIX EP-231-7
.g
- f. 8 I E' 1- - -- x
- t*:.:. I1 4.' M EE e e.4Mo.,,.#.., ]! b .h-- 31ME;1, i li [e;. .j'i
' - l
-e B
~
) t.n g E.i _
. #/ l i
ik HA D Il ij i' i hash. c . "]{f ; en ! tbi i* i ._ d g _ e _ - -- l Pg '"q a[d LG
..J 4 -
G- @di
- A O
h m my I ' e7 ,
'] - %. _bl} . .. .
+ %ji w y ,: a ,
FJ_ g-- t qW l l l ( .n ;n a'+#' 3 " i
)
p) T- gm?,_-
.f .@
ghl **1
+ l - <
& ~' '"
lh $ 4 l l l, n W&c. = , ~~ y l
, e_ .. , .- , : ia 4..i ex .
, s ,
sia s> h
.b*o**g.
* . ==. . C o
l
,. '. .' ' W h j$ ;' y d " /;* **.* 1 l- 0i ! !
= -
qv., : --- e, .i r -{- - ! e, , i W [i 7l g
) , .
a 3 If "3 ' "
! ."", .'J G' [- -
=%[ j l1 Q, ! "d e 'l -- O,_!_1i [ *
'3 -
Wi4Qy#EM
, 4 l =1 , 4%, ==.. =
f f== e - -
-a ' y"
'l .
l
)
Q,,, .' n_ PJ l-e c -
%Wi 's-.
y ' g q gg5 s = gip i
- f .%[.W :,'. I j,
_Q ~ pvp).g f.,;.-gg_ t .n A..J y Q1egf.f _ aj, m-- 8 l J.. .c. h. gm gy? wlg w - e-. . , .,s 4 a, gi m g.a 4 t
,hN .e . ' . p _. -l- _ - . lE4 -f!i i h Ja N$b ' '3-- p @
m
- I
,, e 1 - _- - -
- ~
- Y ,
-- y &_ .m ;; -- - -e: .- '
[ M
~
g' ' $ l - _{ l Y. ' y .s$ & I % SI f up f.9 W,RS$w.%%
% c .
- i ,
M. .h,,lftf
~
j "E e e eeG,. ..!j, 6 D. M.A...,A ly hag __('I I' ;c d M ii W d i P Ek .we.m
- s
.J: Jr .s .
- - - .i (h- ( f_ 04 hO "
G
$) . O ([g i
.s l.
,_? -
~
APPENDIX'EP-898-@~ DIAGRAM OF CONTROL PANEL - LEFT SIDE EP-2blRev. 2 Appendix 8
- Page 42 of 45 TJY/jmv I
i P ' I 'LttW&D D M Wd SNMPi E PE N E GastrbAE GMhfluL8 butt P54 g W P54 P3-M PM M M F MM ' kitiin 4 I Gu EsmPs4 StTuRi4 Ft0W enA'Pti gp, g m i TEME tt.m er g g ,. p .
- g g swTts LYMIT5
. . o kai W ps g M oren WeeaN b OMe*
PCV4ty Plow Covrg - OT*Lar.g' I HC tis i anacw sysTs.n swm.H 5 00rywilMr I3 - kk@b,i. gy -
'l . I 3
, , . .n.arn 0 ned hh hTri l ,
.. 1 0&rNLc Rc4% L'ist.he:A wn,ggg w stancs.suscwt swsM . gg IsiuL'%N OM SerM. til g a O I
1 I to G If 5
- HC % 1Smet il a sclor ssW Ws,wru.sweitu mg b Sms.sst esbart momu - cmon Lu3e 4.n4 _
gp'#fF i o o -;. 146 No 1 0 is %
~~ 1 9
W h _ . . . 4 1 6 6 4 1 01. 3 a G Altr i lit bol Oh6oldo G% r1.4g.' - samps,g swaysy I shnets SwsttH kC, 71'), l YY, M1Pli It4 dm $ 0O um-i .m 4Y >a.% nun vx on.1. ui e%
%A !
Syt cm sm k h ' h #1' gg. bl j
'%2s.uf m ;;w.s
. ,aw :
EP-231 Rev. 2
-
- Appendix 9
'- ' Pege 43 of 45
, , TJY/jmv -
z APPENDIX EP- 231-9 DIAGRAM OF CONTROL PANEL - RIGHT SIDE O-r Ataneis Ai,ggi tu m.nuss haulaun rasn mi ra u n sesai 000 ooo ooo l
* * * ^* e su % au's af Hmm E ui tu kl So7 RI WIT RI~/04
. ARCA 1.i a u s cackwcet
.,,M O N IT O N . NoaJ nw t1ouiTom ,_
O
/ -
', 3)
~
, t11. x to +v/m
- d. yy _.
y
\
f l l
\ ) ~
15}E ! Sttesoc Cowcuct M l l (O
N Pago 44 of 45 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-231-10
. . . , . . _ CONTROL PANEL SWITCH LAYOUT . ~ .
HC-715-1, SUMP DRAIN . - SYSTEM SWITCH
- 1. OFF ,
- 2. BLOW COLLECTOR HC-600, POWER .
- 3. DRAIN COOLER TRAP SELECTOR SWITCH -
- 4. BLOW COLLECTOR . . ,
- 5. EVACUATE COLLECTOR 5 A
* . ~t
- 6. SUMP TO COLLECTOR A 2 a '
4
- 7. BLOW COLLECTOR u ,
&l
- 8. OFF HC-626, LIQUID SAMPLE HC-700 LIQUID OR GAS l SOURCE SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTOR WITCH HC-723, GAS SAMPLE -
- 1. JET PUMP LINE ON BYPASS
- 2. JET PUf1P LINE
- 3. OFF g LIQUID (g) SAS g
SEEAR M
- 1. ORYWELL ATMOSPHERE j
i
- 4. RPV OR SUPPRESSION POOL 2. SUP'N POOL ATMOSPHERE i
- 5. RPV OR SUP'N P0OL DN BYPASS 3. SECONDARY CONT'MT ATM
, 4. SPARE i HC-616-1.. SMALL HC-705.10 ML BAS VOL SAMPLE SW SAMPLE SWITCH b
9 0 1. OFF
- 1. TAKE SAMPLE
- 2. OFF E. CIRCULATE GAS .
- 3. FLUSH LOOP 3. EVACUATE BOTTLE
- 4. TAKE SAMPLE .
- 01. DISSOLVED GAS AND 5. FLUSH SYSTEM QUID SAMPLE SWITCH
- 1. OFF HC-7
- 2. START P-701 AND FLOW "' ' '
- 3. START P-601 b
- 4. CIRCULATE AND SEPARATE GAS
- 5. INJECT TRACER SAS - HC-712. 10 DINE CARTRID3E
- 6. CIRCULATE TRACER GAS 8 SAMPLE SWITCH
- 7. COLLECT DISSOLVED GAS 1. OFF
- 8. CIRCULATE AGAIN E. CIRCULATE GAS
.9. COLLECT DIS'LVD GAS AGAIN .
- 3. GAS THRU CARTR E E
- 10. TAKE GAS SAM AND/08 RELIEVE 4. EVACUATE CARTRIDGE
- 11. TAKE LIQUID SAMPLE 5. FLUSH CARTRIDGE
^
H 2 '. HC-629-1
. HC-704
-f
KC-712 HC-628-1 FLl!SH '
. SYSTEM SWITCH g . .(TIMEDSAMPLE)
- 1. OFF
- l 2. START FLUSH
- 3. FLUSH V-610 LOOP : -
- 4. FLUSH P-601 LOOP
- l
- 5. FLUSH CV-615
- 6. FLUSH PIPING ' STATION .
- 7. FLUSH CV-622 LOOP '
- 8. OFF 1
' 1 s . . l l
l EP-231 Rsv. 2
-
- Page 45 of 45 l
. TJY/jmv , ., APPENDIX EP-231-11 SCHEMATIC OF POST ACCIDENT SAMPLE STATION O-
{N > M, - gCv.ni-cv.7i9g 1
. . . . C.v 788 *
^5 i Pi.voc i l
QRYWELL ATMOS g
- g= *'
,)
, cv.no :
suP'N PQQL ATMOS
- CV.71U s 8 '
y .A.,LG l,"' "~^~ ' { e-@ .
;i, @g..,l, @, ,
3 criis r n ..,m cor
- 'r 3ND cQNT'MT ATMOS \
\s P.701
.r,.ix . St.ss" vnn.
IOQiNS CARThlDGG T.717
$ 2 GWP'N PQQL ATMQG \ OV.79i
- --. q - _
T PUMia \ D WATER ,, gy,7g
-Wh \ CV430. FP..ccii HHn $$bS" \
CV4G3 b Cv4Gi
\ #/
cv.cas v \ g . Cv4Ga k g5g,ED, CV464 vgny h c;g'aa \ CV430 g, ,, CV410 g .. Y h N riaisciliiim 3 ,.i . M s. :
- CV430
, p Wcu cv.717 Vil' P90L -
'CV436 (co) CV a --
SUP'N PQQL 1 f SYRINQE 7, e g h CV400
'""4'*
- C ^
PCV437 i 34 g CV.733 4
- kIAGGI CV.634 sMALL voLUMn L lOWlO SAMPl.E i una oLuun I .
\ ,'. LIQUID SAMPLE m
' % ,,g g pgg k
\ * @' E hM, P e OV.716 h CV'734 [
= = - Ri!! >
) -
, CV.716 l
l .-_ _ -_ _ __ . . - _ _ - - - - - . - _
. _ . . - .- ~-
.. .- .~~s ..n. l
.i a.-
3840090260 EP-233 Rev. 2 Page 1 of 13 7 jmv . l
;Q ,e PHILADELPHI A ELECTRIC COMPANY
., LIMERICf' GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE )
- t. EP-233 RETRIEVING AND CHANGING SAMPLE FILTERS AND CARTRIDGES FROM THE CONTAINMENT LEAK DETECTOR DURING EMERGENCIES 1.0 PUPSOSE This procedure provides guidelines for retrieving and changing particulate filters and charcoal cartridges (or silver zeolite cartridges) located at the Containment Leak Detector following accident conditions.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group members to perform the steps necessary in this procedure. ( 3.0 APPENDICES , 3.1 EP-233 Data Sheet 4.0 PREREQUISITES . l None 5.O SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 5.1 Appropriate health physics survey equipment 5.2 Respiratory protective e p, 5.3 Anti-contamination el 4,'s,. :. w1,H Et~
,, 3, % w.FJ 5.4 Designated remote handling dev}7 gass y
. r 5.5 Transport container (shielded l O( "' "'*"
MjD ON!.Y VMN RID
'P-
. g. EP-233 R2v. 2 Page 2 of 13
]
TJY/jrv
; 5.7 2-Combined Filter / Cartridge holder assembly 5.8 2-Extra particulate filters 5.9 2-Extra iodine cartridges 5.10 Shielded container -
~
5.11 Extremity dosimetry 5.12 Plastic bags 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented when a Containment Filter / Cartridge sample is to be taken from the
/~ ' Containment Leak Detector during an Emergency
+%
8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 8.2 Do not use elevators. 8.3 Eye protection should be worn by all personnel when obtaining samples from the sample stations. 8.4 Continuous coverage by a Health Physics Technician may substitute for the Radiation Work Permit. 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Actions , 9.1.1 (Interim) Chemist y Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.1.1.1 Af ter discussing the situation with the C. (Interim) Emergency Director determine if (73 Mg,j a filter / cartridge sample from the Containment Leak Detector is required.
. . EP-233 Rav. 2 Page 3 of 13 TJY/jmv
-l l'
( Lo 9.1.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status I) \ Board to forecast anticipated k- radiological conditions.
~
9.1.1.3 Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and check on the latest developments related to radiological conditions and inform him
- what sample (s) are to be taken and that Health Physics' coverage is required.
9.1.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability. 9.1.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader what analyses are l required. 9.1.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) and inform the Plant Survey Group Leader of this development.
.e l 9.1.1.7 the Chemistry Sampling and Direct,in Analys Group Leader to collect and analyse the filter / cartridge sample.
9.1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader;shall: 9.1.2.1 After discussing the situation with the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team , Leader contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and request a Health Physics technician to report to the Chemistry Lab to perform the following. A.- Provide the Group Leader with radiological conditions that would impact the sample selection. B. Brief the group memb'ers ori radiological conditicns, precautions and requirements for' entering the area and radiation level cutoffs for handling and analyzing the sample. C. Provide constant coverage of the sampling and analysis portions of this procedure. O, s_ 7' _ _ _ ,
EP-233 Rev. 2 Page 4 of 13 TJY/jtv l l
,e D. Provide Group Members with the k
appropriate dosimetry, protective l clothing and respiratory equipment 9.1.2.2 Select the sample location A. One location for each unit exists
, where the sample may be taken from:
Unit EQUIP NO. LOCATION AREA 1 10S 182 Rx-283' 16 2 20S 182 Rx-283' 17
! 9.1.2.3 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment and once briefed by the H.P. Technician to collect and transport the sample to l the Chemistry Hot Lab.
9.1.2.4 Contact the Dose Assessment Team Leader (TSC) for an estimated sampling time and record this time on Appendix EP-233-1. Verify that this time is feasible. E r Y 9.1.2.5 Brief the Health Physics Technician and l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following. A. Squad identifier B. Communications equipment and channel C. Type of sample (s) to be collected , l D. Location of sample points l E. Suggested routes to be taken F. Sample transport technique G. Projected amount of time required to collect and transpor t the sample H. Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis I. Alternatives for obtaining and practical methods of remotely C handling the sample (s)
\1(}
EP-233 Rev. 2 Page 5 of 13 TJY/j=v
, l
-# J. Special tools and equipment required 7, S '
for sample handling and/or
/ '
collection. l K. Proper completion of Data Sheets. l 9.1.2.6 Instruct group members to' immediately
- report the following as they occur or as the information becomes available.
A. Sample locations that are not accessible or any other reason why the sample can not be collected. B. When the sample and group members arrive at the hot lab. C. Results of the analysis. l 9.1.2.7 Contact Shif t operations in the Control Room to request system line up so that the selected semple can be taken from the desired Sample Station and sample point. If the Containment Leak Detector is
% . d(_ isolated, shift operations shall defeat the signal by placing. jumpers across the following contacts: -
DO NOT DEFEAT ISOLATION OF HIGH DRYWELL PRESSURE WHEN DRYWELL PRESSURE IS GREATER THAN 5 PSIG. Panel Relay Contacts Isolation Signal , 10C609 B21H-K120C T4-M4 High D/W Pressure (20C609) or -38" Vessel Level 10C611 B21H-K120B T4-M4 High D/W Pressure (20C611)' or -38" Vessel Level 9.1.2.8 Appoint one Group member to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample, using the following guidelines: j A. Adequate shielding is available for the sample. ,' B. Remote handling tools are in place (as required). (, C. Protective clothing and equipment are readily available (as required c (.$ by EP). l
EP-233 Rev. 2 . Page 6 of 13
} TCY/jmv
{3 g D. Copies of the appropriate sample s ,/ - handling and analysis procedures are on hand. E. Equipment is properly calibrated , warmed-up and in pla,ge. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and
^
Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and f,. Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples m (t 9.1.2.9 Copy Appendix EP-230-2, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis COL for each sample taken. Fill out all pertinent information as it becomes available. 9.1.3 Vhy Health Physics Technician shall: l 9.1.3.1 Determine which route should be used for-collecting and transporting the sample. A. SUGGESTED ROUTES AND APPROXIMATE TIMES ARE AS FOLLOWS Entering the N.W. corner-Unit 1 or (N.E. corner-Unit 2) of Rx. Encl. 217' and proceeding up the stairs to 283' El. TIME: Approx.,5' min. B. Proceeding past the filter demineralizer access hatches and
<w exiting the Radwaste Encl. 217' El.,
( turning lef t and entering the S.W.- Unit 1 or-(S.E.-Unit 2) corner of Rx. t ( Encl. 217' El. and proceeding upstairs to 283' El. TIME: Approx. 6 min.
EP-233 Rev. 2 Pcge 7 of 13 l TJY/jmv 1 g l 9.1.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey T s
.' equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated.
9.1.3.3 Pro"ida Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. r. l 9.1.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: 1 I A. RWP requirements I B. Routes to be used ! C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions E. Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab F. Suggested methods to maintain G. Stay times a d Abort Criteria l 9.1.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the sample filter and cartridges from the Containment Leak Detector. l 9.1.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the . sample location. Upon entering the power block, the surveyors shall note trends in general radiation levels enroute to the Containment Leak Detector. If general area dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 10 R/hr gamma or 10 rad /hr beta prior to arriving at the door leading to Rx.-283', exit immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. If dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 5 R/hr at the door leading.to Rx. 283', leave the area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling a'nd Analysis Group Lead er. ( l 9.1.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. O
. . EP-233 Rev. 2 !
Pagt 8 of 13 ! TJY/jmv , l l
/y ( l 9.1.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results
(_/ - and give them to the Chemistry Sampling l and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at the hot lab. l 9.1.3.9 Provide constant coverage"during sample
- preparation and handling as specified in EP-241, 242 or 243.
9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: 9.1.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab. l 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task. l 9.1.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect
- the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample (for
'k ' (' additional information, refer to prerequisite 4.2) ,
PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS l 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the appropriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the H.P. technician or RWP) 9.1.4.5 Once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the Containment Leak Detector area and retrieve and change the sample filters and cartridges as follows: A. The HP Technician shall survey the Containment Leak Detector concentrating especially on the particulate filter / iodine cartridge assembly and sample lines. B. Obtain the sample. The time required to obtain a sample is approximately
. 10 minutes.
(O
EP-233 Rev. 2 . Page 9 of 13 , l TJY/jmv C.
~~
FILTER / CARTRIDGE HOLDER ASSEMBLY (Y q) , CHANGE METHOD
- 1. Verify that HS-26-190-1 and HS-26-190-2 (Pump 1 and Pump 2 switches) are in the ON position and that both pump 1 and pump 2
.. lights are lit. j l
- 2. Verify flow (FI-26-190) indicate flow. ,
1
- 3. Put switch HSS-26-190 (OPERATE / PURGE) in PURGE position and verify that the purge light l is lit.
4. Allow to purge for one minute.
- 5. Close valves V-2 and V-3.
- 6. Remove holder assembly, bag and place in a shielded container.
THIS ASSEMBLY MAY BE USED LATER.
's ',
SEE STEP 13. W 7. Install a new' filter / cartridge assembly back into the line.
- 8. Open valves V-2 and V-3.
- 9. Close valve V-8.
- 10. Put switch ESS-26-190 in OPERATE' position and verify that the OPERATE light is lit. Record the time as TIME-1 and flow as FLOW-1 from FI-26-190 in Appendix EP-233-1.
- 11. Allow flow for the desired amount ,
of sample collection time and then turn BSS-26-190 to PURGE and record time- (TIME-2) and flow (FLOW-2) in'EP-233-1.
- 12. Allow to purge for one minute.
- 13. Close valves V-2 and V-3.
Ce
EP-233 Rev. 2 Page 10 of 13 !
- n. l TJY/jmv '
I () t 14. Remove holder assembly and immediately have the Health Physics Technician Survey the sample and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on Appendix EP-233-1 and bag and place the sample in a shiel'ded transport
~
container.
- 15. Reinstall the holder assembly previously removed (Step 5) if appropriate, or install a new holder assembly.
- 16. Open valves V-2, V-3 and V-8.
- 17. Put switch BSS-26-190 in OPERATE position and verify that the OPERATE light is lit.
l 18. Return to the hot lab with the sample by retracing one of the previously suggested routes. ( l 19. Contact the Control Room and inform them that a sample has been taken and to return the system to the' original alignment. (i.e. Remove jumpers) 9.1.4.6 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, the sample will be handled and stored in a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. . l 9.1.4.7 Inform the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the hot lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. 9.2 Follow-up 9.2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: , l 9.2.1.1 Complete Appendix'EP-233-1 l 9.2.1.2 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-242 Sample Preparation and
.( Bandling of Highly Radioactive Particulate and Iodine Cartridges.
(O __ . _ , . _. . - - . . . - ~ _ _ _ _ , _ . . _ . . _ . -
i EP-233 Rev. 2
. Page 11 of 13
]
TJY/jmv I
./
f( l 9.2.1.3 Repor t the results to the Chemistry
. Sampling and Analysis Group Leader.
l 9.2.1.4 Properly file the data sheets and report back to the Group Leader for reassignment. s
.. 9.2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall:
, 9.2.2.1 Ensure Group member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. 9.2.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and 4 Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab.. 9.2.2.3 Direct group members to refer to EP-242
- Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Particulate and iodine cartridges for guidance for sample preparation and handling.
-: / 9.2.2.4 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets report
,((]).' k the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis, Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets' to Appendix EP-230-2. i 9.2.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.2.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency . Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF) . 1
10.0 REFERENCES
l 4 10.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team l Activation 10.2 EP-242 - Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate and Iodine Cartridges 4 10.3 M-102 - General Arrangement Plan at 11. 217'-0"
' 10.4 M-104 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 269'-0" &
283'-0"
- -.- _.--- : = - - - .- ..:-.-.-..- -.-.--.- .- -.
e . 4-' EP-233 Rev. 2 . 1 i Page 12 of 13 ., l TJY/jIrv h c;
' ' ~ -};
~
10.5 M Sh.-1, Rev. 8: Sh. 2, Rev. 9; Sh. 3, Rev. 3;
. s Sh. 4, Rev. 3 - Plant Process Radiation .
Monitoring P&ID 10.6' E-519, Sh. 1 of 2; Rev. 2 9% a 5 - i t [ 4 j , (- 'l } !O . { j i !Y 1 d i i i 9 e 'F t t I 1 - 4 l 4
<-,<..-r,.-....we ....mr.-, .-e cr--,-...w-v-.w,w%-ww. -e ---
EP-233 R2v. 2 I
". Page 13 of 13
, I TJY/jmv {
APPENDIX EP-233-1
~
DATA SHEE"'
,, Containment Leak Detector Particulate / Iodine Grab Sample 1
l ESTIMATED SAMPLING TIME: l DATE: TIME: TIME-1: _ Ar \ (- FLOW-1: TIME-2: . FLOW-2: l INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE: . l TOTAL TIME: l AVG. FLOW: l ANALYSES: I G l NAME: A i bs
'l 3840090270 EP-234 nrv. 2 Pcg2 1 of 13 f., M l Tv jmv PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
. LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE
\
EP-234 OBTAINING CONTAINMENT GAS SAMPLES FROM THE CONTAINMENT LEAK DETEC'IOR DURING EMERGENCIES 1.0 PURPOSE This procedure provides guidelines for obtaining gas samples from the Containment Leak Detector during emergencies. l 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group members to perform the steps necessary in this procedure.
~
3.0 APPENDICES l 3.1 EP-234 -l - Diagram of Gas Sampling Apparatus 3.2 EP-234 Data Sheet 4.0 PREREQUISITES ., l None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 5.1 Appropriate health physics si vp q ment 5.2 Respiratoryprotectiveequipkent {, G f' , , ." I ,
' " h r .. ' L. b,u [
5.3 Anti-C clothing -. , ,.. , ,, " ' * : - 2 .c
- . ,r.h . "
5.4 Designated remote handling devices e i
' v , li f,'
5.5 Transport container (shieldf l8Jp p , 7, lil! ,II b e J!Q[ . 5.6 Dosimetry l#1 11 j {i
I i 4 l EP-234 RDv. 2 1 7 . Pcga 2 of 13 l
.] TJY/jmv i 5.7 Shielded container for discarding invalid samples 5.8 Extremity dosimetry ;
l 5.9 3-Gas Sampling Apparatuses 5.10 3 off-gas vials 5.11 Appropriate microsyringes 5.12 Plastic bags i 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented when a gas sample shall
' l be taken from the containment Leak Detector during an Emergency.
8.0 PRECAUTIONS , 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 8.2 Do not use elevators. 8.3 Eye protection should be worn by all personnel when obtaining samples from the sample stations. 8.4 Continuous coverage by a Healt'h Physics Technician may substitute for the Radiation Work Permit. 9.0 PROCEDURE . 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and Analysis l Team Leader shall:
)
9.1.1.1 After discussing the situation with the (Interim) Emergency Director determine if a gas sample from the containment leak l detector is required
\
_ _. _ _ . . . - - _ , , . - ~ - - - - --
U
.' l EP-234 R2v. 2 Pcg2 3 of 13 6
. l. TJY/jmv ,
9.1.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board to forecast anticipated radiological
- conditions. ,
9.1.1.3 Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and check on the latest developments related to radiological conditions and inform him what sample (s) are to be taken'and that Health Physics' coverase is required. 9.1.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain the desired sample system availability. 9.1.1. 5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader what analyses are required. 9.1.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) and inform the Plant Survey Group Leader of this development. l 9.1.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the filter / cartridge sample. 9.1.2 Chemistry Sampling and, Analysis Group Leader shall: 9.1.2.1 After discussing the situation with the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and request a Health Physics technician to report to the Chendstry Lab to perform the following. A. Provide the Group Leader with radiological conditions that would impact the sample selection. B. Brief the group members on radiological conditions, precautions and requirements for entering the area and radiation level cutoffs for handling and analyzing the sample. . < C. Provide constant coverage of the i sampling and analysis portions of this procedure.
l EP-234 Rav. 2 PEga 4 of 13 l TJY/jmv D. Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. 9.1.2.2 Select the sample location A. One location for each'* unit exists where the sampit~may be taken from: Unit EQUIP NO. LOCATION AREA 1 10S 182 Rx-283' 16 2 20S 182 Rx-283' 17 l 9.1.2.3 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment and once briefed by the H.P. Technician to collect and transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. l 9.1.2.4 Brief the Health Physics Technician and Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following. q A. Squad identifier B. Communications equipment and channel C. Type of sample (s) to be collected l D. Location of sample points l E. Suggested routes to be taken , F. Sample transport technique G. Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample H. Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis I. Alternatives fo.r obtaining and practical i methods of remotely handling the j sample (s) , J. Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection. W K. Proper completion of Data Sheets
]
O l l
u l EP-234 R2v. 2 Pega 5 of 13 { TJY/jmv l 9.1.2.5 Instruct group members to immediately repor t W e the folowing as they occur or as the information becomes available. A. Sample locations that are not accessible or any other reason why
- the sample can not be collected.
B. When the sample and group members arrive at the hot lab. C. Results of the analysis. l 9.1.2.6 Contact Shift operations in the Control Room to request system line up so that the selected sample can be taken from the desired Sample Station and sample point. If the Containment Leak Detector is isolated, shift operations shall defeat the signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts: DO NOT DEFEAT ISOLATION OF HIGH DRYWELL PRESSURE WHEN DRYWELL PRESSURE IS GREATER THAN 5 PSIG. Panel Relay Contacts Iholation Sicnal 10C609 B21H-K120C T4-M4 High D/W Pressure (20C609) or -38" Vessel Level 10C611 B21H-K120B T4-M4 High D/W Pressure (20C611) or -38" Vessel Level 9.1.2.7 Appoint one Group member to prepare the Hot
. Lab for receiving the sample, using the following guidelines:
A. Adequate shielding is available for the sample. j B. Remote handling tools are in place (as required). C. Protective clothing and equipment are readily available (as required by HP). D. Copies of the appropriate sample handling and analysis procedures are on ha nd . E. Equipment is properly calibrated, warned-up and in place.
*] EP-234 R2v. 2 Pcg2 6 of 13 l
TJY/jmv USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB.
- EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Pr5paration and
' Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 9.1.2.8 Copy Appendix EP-230-2, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis COL for each sample taken.
Fill out all pertinent information as it becomes available. 9.1.3 The Health Physics Technician shall l 9.1.3.1 Determine which route should be used for h collecting and transporting the sample. A. SUGGESTED ROUTES'AND APPROXIMATE TIMES
, ARE AS FOLLOWS:
Entering the N.W. corner-Unit 1 or (N.E. corner-Unit 2) of Rx. Encl. 217' and proceeding up the stairs to 283' El. TIME: Approx. 5 min. - . B. Proceeding past the filter demineralizer access hatches and exiting the Radwaste Encl. 217 ' El. , turning lef t and entering the S.W.-Unit 1 or (S.E.-Unit
- 2) corner of Rx. Encl. 217' El. and proceeding upstairs to 283' El.
TIME: Approx. 6 min.
] 9.1.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated.
9.1.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate kgjll] dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment.
- j' EP-234 Rav. 2 Page 7 of 13 g TJY/jmv
[ 9.1.3.4 Per form a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: A. RWP requirements
. B. Routes to b,e used C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions E. Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab F. Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA G. Stay times and Abort Criteria l 9.1.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the sample from the Containment Leak Detector.
l 9.1.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample W location. Upon entering the power block, the surveyors will note trends in general
. radiation levels enroute to the Containment Leak Detector. If general area dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 10 R/hr gamma or 10 rad /hr beta prior to arriving at the door leading to Rx.-283', exit immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. If dose rates (unanticipated) exceed 5 R/hr at the door leading to Rx. . 283', leave the area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader.
l 9.1.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. l 9.1.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated i group member) when arriving at the hot lab. l 9.1.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-241, 242 or 243.
.l EP-234 R2v. 2 ,
. Pcg2 8 of 13 i
.. j . TJY/jmv l
- l 9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group '
members shall: 9.1.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab. l 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the administrative exposure guidelinec, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task. 9.1.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment (prepare three evacuated off-gas sample vials) to collect the sample and ensure that the hot
- lab is ready to accept the sample (for additional information, refer to prerequisite 4.2)
PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the appropriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the H.P. technician or RWP) l 9.1.4.5 Once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the Containment Leak Detector l area and collect a containment gas sample. A. Proceed to the Containment Leak Detector. B. Have the H.P. Technician survey the. Containment Leak Detector. -
. C. Obtain the sample. The time required to obtain a sample is approximately 10 minutes.
D. SAMPLING METHOD
- 1. Verify that HS-26-190-1 and BS 190-2 (pump 1 and pump 2 switches) are in the ON position and that both pump 1 and pump 2 lights are lit.
- 2. Verify flow (FI-26-190) indicates flow.
!CO l - l l l
- - - - -- y- - w--- ---w- w-
l EP-234 Rav. 2 Pega 9 of 13 l TJY/jmv
- 3. Put switch HSS-26-190
,. (OPERATE / PURGE) in PURGE position and verify that the PURGE light is lit.
- 4. Allow to purge fo,r one minute.
- 5. Close valves V-2 and V-3.
- 6. Disconnect the filter holder assembly on the outlet side and install the gas sampling apparatus making sure the sample valve and septum valve are closed. (Appendix EP-234-1).
- 7. Open valves V-2 and V-3.
- 8. Close valve V-8.
- 9. Put switch HSS-26-190 in OPERATE position and verify that the OPERATE light is lit.
- 10. Open the sample valve.
- 11. Open the septum valve.
- 12. Insert the 1.0 m1 microsyringe through the septum valve and the sample valve into the sample tee.
- 13. Flush the microsyringe by taking,a 0.1 al sample and injecting it back into the sample tee two times.
- 14. Take a 0.1 al sample and remove the microsyringe from the sample tee.
Inject the sample into an evacuated 14.4 ml off gas vial. Place the microsyringe in a plastic bag and secure.
- 15. Have the HP Technician immediately survey the.v,ial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate in Appendix EP-234-2 and using remote handling tools, place the vial into an appropriate shielded transport g container.-
l l 16. Complete Appendix EP-234-2. l l
. ~ . . - _ . . - __ _ - - _-
l EP-234 Rov. 2 P;go 10 of 13
.l TJY/jmv l 17. Close the sample and septum valves.
W 18. Take the sample to the hot lab retracing one of the previously suggested routes.
- 19. Contact Control Room
- and inform that a sample has been taken and to return the system to the original alignment. (i.e. remove jumpers) .
9.1.4.7 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot , lab, the sample will be handled and stored in a manner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. 9.1.4.8 Inform the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the hot lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 9.2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: l 9.2.1.1 Complete Appendix EP-234-2 ,
~
l 9.2.1.2 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-243 Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples. l 9.2.1.3 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. . l 9.2.1.4 Properly file the data sheets and report
. back to the Group Leader for reassignment.
9.2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: , l 9.2.2.1 Ensure Group Member (s) dose is monitored to ' ensure that exposure limits have not been exceed ed . 9.2.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. 9.2.2.3 Direct Group Members to refer to EP-243 ,(,jlh Sample Preparation and Handling of , Radioactive Gas Samples for guidance for ' sample preparation and handling.
---- -- . , - - =~ . - - - - - -t----
e i l l EP-234 R2v. 2
.. . Paga 11 of 13 TJY/jmv
,l 9.2.2.4 Obtain and review all Data Sheets and repor t the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling -
and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. i 9.2.3 Chendstry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall .. 9.2.3.1 Repor t the results to the Emergency Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coord ina tor (EOF).
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation 10.2 EP-243 - Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 10.3 M-102 - Gene ral Arrangement Plan at El. 217 '-0" 10.4 M-104 - General Arrangement Plan at El. 269'-0"
& 283'-0" 10.5 M-26 P&ID, Sh.1, Rev. 8: Sh. 2, Rev. 9 Sh. 3, Rev. 3; Sh. 4, Rev. 3 - Plant Process Radiation Monitoring.:.
10.6 E-519,'Sh. 1 of 2r Rev. 2
- e s
O 6 LO 6
EP . ne,, , YS? 7- >
~
.1 of 13 W~
' TJY/jiv
.- APPENDIX EP-234-1
- I I l 7 DIAGRAM OF GAS SAMPLING APPARATUS -
,V- 2.
N7 $ ( Jg> V . ! l ' . FLOW a 8 . i i _ n . y j ouicic
- - -s- .
i htScountiTS ' II l M ,,,
,'s., ,tr, u t a e. _
, s ,3. -
~
i ; l s. ,.+
= .
~
va lve R l
.- ,, i,1 1,I mu m i I - I
. f, - . 1
. A ;
l
- r t
\ l 4 i Mi!G _1 1 ~
- -' 1 I l 'l * -
i #2c r . j
-u J.. I i
. N .
~ - . . - - ~ .. - n- _ , _-n -
.o e
*l EP-234 Rav. 2
. Page 13 of 13 TJY/jmv APPENDIX EP-234-2 DATA SHEET Containment Ieak Detector - Gas Grab Sample
~
DATE: TIME: VOLUME: n.I ml INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE:
! ANALYSES:
NAME e e
# 9 i
l G
s ! s , 3840090280 EP-225 Rav. 2 l
, Page 1 of 14 l TJY mey l
~
l PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY ' C/fl}/ LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE
- t. EP-235 OBTAINING REACTOR WATER SAMPLES FROM SAMPLE SINKS FOLLOWING ACCIDENT CONDITIONS 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for consideration prior to, during and after obtaining a reactor water sample following accident conditions with major fuel damage.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group members in performing the steps necessary in this procedure.
" ~
3.0 APPENDICES , 3.1 EP-235-1 Data Sheet 4.0 PREREQUISITES . l None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 5.1 Appropriate Health Physics Survey Equipment 5.2 Anti-C clothing l h ! 5.3 Dosimetry J w. . 2 s c'si -.L d 5.4 3 oz. sample bottle with lid fr. f 5.5 Tongs or remote tooling for hol dt[ khe' sample o bottle during sampling 1IA.'D 04 Y WEN RED
O
% 9 EP-235 Rev. 2
~ Page 2 of 14 TJY/mey
, 5.6 Respiratory protective equipment 5.7 Eye Protection 5.8 Extremity dosimetry
., 5.9 Plastic bags.
6.0 SYMPTOMS
. None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented when a Reactor water sample mutt be taken from the Reactor Enclosure sample stations during an emergency situation.
()' 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 In all steps of this procedure, an ALARA concept is mandatory. Sampling and Analysis Group members' exposure should be limited to the administrative guide levels in EP-230, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation, Appendix EP-230-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines. ,, 8.2 Do not use elevators. 8.3 Eye protection should be worn by all personnel obtaining the sample. 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: (" 9.1.1.1 After discussing the situation with the (Interim) Emergency Director, determine r ( if a reactor water sample is required. i l l
% 9 EP-235 Rev. 2 Page 3 of 14 TOY /mev
(_) 9.1.1.2 Determine preference of sampling points from below:
- 1. Peactor Water Clean up Filter Domineralizer Inlet
, l 2. Renctor Water Recirculation Inlet l 3. Main Steam from Reactor Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader of sampling point
- preference.
9.1.1.3 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board to forecast anticipated radiological conditions. 9.1.1.4 Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and check on the latest developments related to radiological conditions and inform him what sample (s) are to be taken and that Health Physics' coverage is required. A 9.1.1.5 Request input from the Control Room (via jll Eestgency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability. 9.1.1.6 Deteimine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader what analyses are required. 9.1.1.7 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) and inform the Plant Survey Group Leader of this development. l 9.1.1.8 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and I analyze the reactor water sample from the sample sink 9.1.2 Chemistry Sampling
- a'nd Analysis Group Leader shall:
8.1.2.1 Af ter discussing the situation with the Team Leader, contact the Plant Survey C'- ] Group Leader and request a Health Physics kr3 (_) technician to report to the chemistry lab to perform the following s
, - . - - - , - - - -,--a. - . - . - . . - - . - - , - -
'
- EP-235 R2v. 2 Pcg2 4 of 14 TJY/mev
(
\m '
t' A. Provide the Group Leader with W ( radiological conditions that would impact the sample and route determination. B. Brief the Group Members on radiological conditions, precautions e and requirements for 'ntering the
'- area and radiation level cut-of fs for handling and analyzing the sample C. Provide radiation survey equipment for constant coverage of the sampling and analysis portions of this
~
procedure D. Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. 9.1.2.2 Determine which sample location is to be l used. One location (for each unit) exists where
- a sample may be taken from:
(g UNIT EQUIP. NO. LOCATION AREA
, 1 10S 292 RX-2'53' 15 2 20S 292 RX-253' 17 9.1.2.3 Determine which sample point is to be used based on system availability and radiological conditions. Check with shift operations whether a semple can be'-
taken from the desired sample station and sample point l A. Three sample points are available:
- 1. Reactor Clean up Filter demin.
l Inlet
- 2. Reactor Water Recirculation l Inlet l 3. Main Stea's from Reactor l 9.1.2.4 If the reactor water clean up filter e domin inlet sample point is to be used, t contact the control room to determine if a Grcup III isolation signal is present.
/]? *
- EP-235 R2v. 2 Page 5 of 14 TJY/mev A. If the Group III isolation signal is
((~ l pre sent , request shift operations to defeat the signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts: PRIOR SHIFT APPROVAL IS REQUIRED FOR THIS STEP. , l B. Panel Relay Contacts Isolation Sienal 10C622 B21H-K40A T1-M1 SLCS Initiation (20C622) 10C623 B21H-K40B T1-Nu SLCS Initiation (20C623) 10C623 B21H-K42 T1-M1 Non-Regen HX (20C623) Outlet High Temp 10C609 B21H-K3A T2-M2 -38" Vessel Level (20C609)
, 10C609 B21H-K3C T2-M2 -38" Vessel Level (20C609)
DO NOT DEFEAT THE ISOLATIONS OF HIGH RWCU DIFFERENTIAL YLOW, HIGH AREA TEMPERATURE OR HIGH DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE ON ROOM VENTILATION AS THIS INDICATES A LEAK IN THE SYSTEM. .... j 9.1.2.5 If the Reactor Water Recirculation Inlet sample line has been isolated, contact the Control Room and request shif t operations to defeat the isolation signal by placing jumpers across the following contacts: PRIOR SHIFT APPROVAL IS REQUIRED FOR THIS STEP l A. Panel Relay Contacts Isolation Signal 10C609 C71A-K7E T1-M1 Main Steam Line (20C609) High Radiation 10C611 C71A-K7H T1-M1 Main Steam Line (20C611) - High Radiation 10C609 B21H-K3A ,- T2-M2 -38" vessel level 1 (20C609) 10C611 B21H-K3C T2-M2 -38" Vessel Level (20C609) 0 ' l
~
l _
.. --- l l
EP-235 Re . 2 Page 6 of 14
- l. TJY/mey i
k 9.1.2.6 If the Main Steam from Reactor sample point has been isolated, contact the Control Room and request Shif t Operations to defeat the isolation signal by placing ; jumpers across the following contacts: ) PRIOR SHIFT APPROVAL IS ib:0UIRED FOR THIS SEP ISOLATION VALVE PANEL RELAY CONTACTS SIGNAL HV-41-lF084 10C622 B21H-K23A T3-M3 -38" vessel Level , (20C622) High Steam Line Radiation HV-41-lF085 10C633 B21B-K23D T3-M3 -38" Vessel Level (20C632) High Steam Line Radiation 9.1.2.7 Brief shift personnel on possible control room indications during sampling process. C l 9.1.2.8 Assign the appropriate number of group
members to obtain the necessary equipment and once briefed by the H.P. technician to collect and transport the sample to
]
- the Chemistry Bot Lab..
l 9.1.2.9 Brief the Health Physics technician and Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members on the following: ; A. Squad identifier B. Communications equipment and channel C. Type of sample (s) to be collected D. Location of sample points l l E. Suggested routes to be taken F. Sample transport technique l G. Projected amouht of time required to collect and transport the sample H. Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis () C
1 EP-23 5 Rav. 2 , Page 7 of 14
, TJY/mev l
I. Alternatives for obtaining and practical methods of remotely !
, handling the sample (s) j i
l J. Proper completion of Data Sheets l K. pment required Special for sampletools and equ,1,d/or handling an collection l 9.1.2.10 Instruct Group Members to immediately report the following as they occur or as the information becomes available. A. Sample locations that are not accessible or any other reason why the sample can not be collected B. When the sample and group members arrive at the hot lab C. Results of the analysis 9.1.2.11 Appoint one Group Member to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample, using
- the following guidelines:
A. Adequate shielding is available for the sample. , B. Remote handling tools are in place (as required). C. Protective clothing and equipment are readily available (as required by HP) . - D. Copies of the appropriate sample handling and analysis procedures are on hand. E. Equipment is properly calibrated, warmed-up and in place. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS
. GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. . .
EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples D(
EP-235 Rev. 2 Page 8 of 14 TJY/mev EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges
. EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 9.1.2.12 Copy Appendix EP-230-2, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis COL for each sample taken. Fill out all pertinent information as it becomes available.
9.1.3 The Health Physics Technician shall: 9.1.3.1 Determine which route shall be used to collect and transport the sample l Succested routes to Sample Stations ares l A. UNIT 1
- 1. Enter the Reactor Building, 217' elevation, N.W. corner, up the stairs to 253' elevation.
l TIME: Approx. 3 min.
- 2. Enter the Reactor Building, 217-',
elevation N.W. corner, procede to the S.W. corner, upstairs to 253' elevation. l TIME: Approx. 4 min. l B. UNIT 2
- 1. Enter the Reactor Building, 217' elevation N.E. corner, up the ,
l stairs to 253' elevation. l TIME: Approx. 5 min.
- 2. Enter the Reactor Building, 217'
~T L
( elevation, procede to the S.W. corner, upstairs to 253' (J k elevation. l TIME: Approx. 5 min.
l EP-235 Rev. 2 . Page 9 of 14 TJY/mev
]' 9.1.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated.
9.1.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, prqtective clothing and respiratory equipment. l 9.1.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the 1 Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain l the sample to discuss the following: l 4 A. RWP requirements ) B. Routes to be used C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions E. Review of procedure for obtaining and transpor ting sample to hot lab g,. <~ F. Suggested methods to maintain ( exposures ALARA G. Stay times and Abort Criteria l 9.1.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the reactor water sample. l 9.1.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location, if upon entering the - Power Block, if general area dose rater (unanticipated exceed 10 R/hr gamma or 10 rad /hr beta prior to arriving at the point specified below, exit immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. If the general area dose rate (unanticipated) exceeds 5 R/hr at the door leading to Rx. 253, leave the area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader with this information. l 9.1.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. D
EP-235 Rev. 2 Page 10 of 14 TJY/mev l 9.1.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results
-k and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at the hot lab.
l 9.1.3.9 Provide constant coverage,during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-241. 9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall:
. 9.1.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab 1 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the Administrative Exposure Guidelines, or may not have suf ficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task.
l 9.1.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is
..~
- c. ready to accept the sample (for l additional information, refer to Prerequiste 4.2)
PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAN LE CONTAINERS l 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the appropriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the H.P. technician or RWP) 9.1.4.5 Once the Group has been briefed and the - appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the reactor water sample sink and collect the reactor water sample as follows: A. Proceed to the RWCI Sample Station in the Reactor Building and request the H.P. technician to survey the area concentrating on the sample sink primarily. B. Request the Health Physics Technician to survey the area, concentrating on
- the sample sink.
(,,.. C. Proceed to the predetermined grab l , sample point. . l 1
- . EP-235 Rov. 2 Page 11 of 14 TJY/mev i l
D. Ensure that a flow is present. If l not, attempt to initiate flow by
. opening root valves. If flow is not established, exit and consult Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Lead er l E. SAMPLING METHOD Obtain a 1 oz. sample (about 1" up from bottom) or less in a 3 oz.
bottle. Use tongs or other remote handling tools which hold the sample bottle without operator attention. When required amount of sample is obtained remove bottle from hood, quickly place lid on bottle and transport with tongs, other remote tools, or lead shielded carrying container. F. Have the HP Technician survey the . vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate in Appendix EP-235-1. 4., [I^' l G. Complete the Data Sheet in Appendix
\ EP-325-1.
l ' E. Take the sample t$ the hot lab retracing one of the previously suggested routes. 9.1.4.6 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, the sample will be handled and stored in a manner that personnel . exposures are kept ALARA. 9.1.4.7 Contact the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the hot lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. 9.1.4.8 Contact control Room and inform them that l
- a sample has been taken and to return the system to the original alignment (i.e.
remove jumpers) . - l - l 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 9.2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall l (:)(
\
i EP-235 Rev. 2 Page 12 of 14 l TJY/mey 9.2.1.1 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-241, Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples. A. Properly in place and shielded , the sample will be processed
, remotely (where and when possible) .
Careful handling of the sample is mandatory in preparation for analysis to minimize radiological conditions. 9.2.1.2 Repor t the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis. Group Leader. 9.2.1.3 Properly file the data sheets and report back to the Group Leader for re-assignment. 9.2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 9.2.2.1 Ensure Group Member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not
,=
(" h been exceeded, 9.2.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. 9.2.2.3 Direct Group Members to refer to EP-241, Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples for guidance for sample preparation and handling. . 9.2.2.4 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets and repor t the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. 9.2.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.2.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF). l l b 1
. - - e
EP-235 Rev. 2 Page 13 of 14 TJY/mev i I
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation 10.2 M-23 P&ID, Sh. 3, Rev. 12 Process Sampling 10.3 M-102 General Arrangement Plan at el. 217'-0" 10.4 M-103 General Arrangement Plan at el. 239'-0"
& 253'-0" 10.5 EP-241 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Liquids e
s 9 9 m 5
EP-235 Rev. 2 Page 14 of 14 TJY/mey APPENDIX EP-235-1 ) DATA SHEET Reactor Water Grab Sample w l DATE: TIME: SAMPLE LOCATION: UNIT 1 UNIT 2 SAMPLE POINT:
- 1. REACTOR WATER CLEAN UP FILTER DEMIN INLET
- 2. REACTOR WATER RECIRCULATION INLET
- 3. MAIN STEAM FROM REACTOR VOLUdE: _
l INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE ANALYSES: NAME: I O l l l
. ! 3840090290 EP-22c Re.c. 1
-- g Page 1 of 1: I T'Y'f.v C ' PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY 6lc # LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE
~
EP-236 OBTAINING COOLING TOWER BLOWDOWN LINE NkTER SAMPLES FOLLOWING RADIOACTIVE LIOUID RELEASE AFTER ACCICENT CONDITIONS 1.0 PURPOSE
. The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines to obtain Blowdown Line water samples following radioactive liquid releases af ter accident conditions.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group members in performing the steps necessary in this procedure.
? .
( 3.0 APPENDICES l 3.1 EP-236-1 Data Sheet 4.0 PREREOUISITES l None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMEhi 5.1 Appropriate Health Physics survey equipment 5.2 1 liter sample bottles wit ? ? 5.3 Plastic bags -, ,, p yj ..,3a,. ), 5.4 Tape (. -[ 3Ud
- K9 DNLY EN RD LO l
l l
^"MO ~ Jn l
- - _. :_ . '^L . - .- _-
l _ _ - - - - -- - - - .
s .
. - - - . - . . - a.
t - . t t l EP-236 Rev. 1 Page 2 of 12 I T.'Y/j: v
'g 6.0 SYMPTOMS J
None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented when a Cooling Tower Blowdown Line water sample shall be taken during an emergency situation. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the i administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 ) Emergency Exposure Guidelines. l 4 8.2 If the Plant Survey Group Leader in conjunction with l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader determines ) that health physics coverage is not necessary, the steps performed by the health physics technician may be omitted. {' 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 Actions 1 9.1.1 (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 1 9.1.1.1 Af ter discussing the situation with the ' . j Emergency Director determine if a cooling l tower blowdown line water sample is ' required. 9.1.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board to forecast anticipated radiological conditions. 9.1.1.3 Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and check on the latest developments related to radiological conditions and inform him what sample (s) are to tie taken and that Health Physics' coverage may be required. 9.1.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via { Emergency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability. tO
=. y s y g
. g .%
l
- l EP-236 Rev. 1 Page 3 of 12 h..g l TJY/jrc V
b.
- at 9.1.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis l Group Leader what analyses are required.
9.1.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the Emergency Director for Group 1 Members (as required) and inform the Plant 1 Survey Group Leader of this developmen* l l 9.1.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the cooling tower blowdown line water sample. i 9.1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 1 9.1.2.1 Af ter discussing the situation with the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader -
~
contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and j request a Health Physics technician to - report to the Chemistry Lab to perform the l following, if necessary. l A. Provide the Group Leader with
;. C radiological conditions that would impact the sample selection.
B. Brief the group members on radiological conditions, precautions and requirements for entering ~the area and radiation level cutoffs for handling and analyzing the sample. C. Provide constant coverage of the ~ sampling and analysis portions of this procedure. D. Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. l 9.1.2.2 Select the appropriate sample point. Four loctions exisc where the sample may be taken l fron. . A. Units 1 and 2 Cooling Tower Blowdown Line sample points (Sx-09-104-(204)) . Located in the pit between the Cooling Towers. (O
..aw- - _
mg.. +- . - rigggg A- - r
.g
. . -- - w . .
l ,. , 'e i
, l EP-236 Rev, 1 Page 4 of 10 i
- l TOY /j: v
{[ W B. Effluent to river sample pump discharge j grab sample (68-0061) and composite l sample (68-0060) located behind Contro' 1 Panel OBC 580 in the Holding Pond Enclosure. 9.1.2.3 Assign the appropriate nunber of group
- r. members to obtain the necessary equipment and, once briefed by the H.P. technician, te collect and transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab.
9.1.2.4 Brief the Health Physics Technician and Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following. l A. Team identification l B. Communications equipment and channel l C. Type of sample (s) to be collected l D. Location of sample points l E. Suggested routes to be taken l F. Sample transport technique G. Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample H. Review the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparatio-and analysis . I. Alternatives for obtaining and practical methods of remotely handling the sample (s) J. Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection l K. Proper completion of data sheets 9.1.2.5 Instruct group memebers to immediately , report the following as they occur or as the : information becomes available. ; A. ( i Sample locations that are not accessabile or any other reason why the sample can not be collected. CO
- w g r. = :j
-1 -. _ , l EP-23C Rev. 1 Page 5 of 1:
l TJY/jre
) B. When the sample and group members arrive Er at the hot lab.
l C. Results of the analysis. 9.1. 2. 6 Appoint one Group member to prepare the Ect Lab for receiving the sample, using the following guidelines: A. Adequate shielding is available for the sample. B. Remote handling tools are in place (as 1
. required). I l
l C. Protective clothing and equipment are readily available (as required by HP). j D. Copies of the appropriate sample ' handling and analysis procedures are or. l
- ha nd .
E. Equipment is properly calibrated warmed-up and in place. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCED"RES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Liquid Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Particulate' Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 9.1.2.7 Copy Appendix EP-230-2, Cheadstry Sampling and Analysis COL for each sample taken. Fill out all pertinent information as it becomes available. - CO
-;- w : y .q g;g l
. -n---
_ _ _ _ =r ~_ _
. u -- . __.
i l EP-236 Fev. 1 Page C cf 1:
] TJY/fre C 9.1.3 The Health Physics Technician if called vper shall:
9.1.3.1 Determine which route should be used for collecting and transporting the sample based on the following. . l A. SUGGESTED ROUTES AND APPROXIMATE TIMIF AS POLLOWS: For a Cooling Tower sample Exit the protected area through the Guard Station, turn left and proceed to the pit between the Cooling Towers. TIME: Approx.10 minutes l B. For an effluent to river discharge line sample, exit the protected area through the Guard Station, turn right and proceed down the hill on the road to the Holding Pond Enclosure. TIME: Approx. 10 minutes
'( ) _
l C. The following are .the times required to obtain the samples: Type of sample Location T ir.c Grab Pit Between 5 Min. Cooling Towers Grab Holding Pond Enclosure 5 Min. Composite Holding Pond Enclosure 5 1:ir l 9.1.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. 9.1.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. l 9.1.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: A. RWP requirements l 3. Routes to be used (O i . _ .
. , _ _ _ _ - _ _ .- - _ - - = : ., - , l EP-02C Rev. 1 Page 7 of 12 l T:1*/ ?':
C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions E. Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab r-F. Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA G. Stay times and Abort Criteria 9.1.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzing the sample, if required.
] 9.1.3.6 Document the sample survey results and give them to the Cher.istry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group
, member) when arriving at the hot lab.
9.1.3.7 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP 241, if required. C. , 9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: 9.1.4.i Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab. l 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the Administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient - exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task. l 9.1.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample (for additional information, refer to prerequisite 4.2) PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS l 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the appropriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the B.P. technician or RWP). C l
.O l
I
, _%ID2N ~ T' '
9 l EP-236 Rev. 1 Pace 6 of 12 l TJY/jr'c 9.1.4.5 Once the Group has been beiefed and the appropriate equipment has been assembled, proceed to the appropriate sampline locatic.- . and retrieve the water sample using the l following. l A. COOLING TOWER BLOWDON LINE GRAB SA!'.PLE
- 1) Proceed to the desired sample poir.:
(SX-09-104, 204).
- 2) Position a one liter sample bottle
, under the sample point.
- 3) Open SX-09-104, -204 and fill sample bottle.
l 4) Close SX-09-104, -204. l 5) Place lid on sample bottle and secure. l 6) Place in a plastic bag and secure with tape.
- 7) Return switch opened in step No. 2 to the desired position.
l 8) Proceed to step 9.1.4.6. l B. EFFLUENT TO RIVER SAMPLE PUMP DISCHARGE LINE GRAB SAMPLE l 1) Proceed to Control Panel OBC 580.'
- 2) verify that switch BS68-003A (Effluent to River Sample Pump OAP900) or BS68-003B (Effluent to River Sample Pump OBP900) is on.
- 3) Open back panel and locate sample point. (Valve 68-0061) .
l 4) Ensure that a flow is present. If not, attemp't to initiate flow by opening root valves. If flow is not established, contact Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader for alternate sample points. l 5) obtain a one liter grab sample.
,.. l 6) Place lid on sample bottle and secure.
1 e ,. ;
' ~
~
j.. . . . - g l l -
_ _ _ _ . . .+MTM:. --.'E - . + _ . _ _ . . . . l
] EP-23E Rev. 1 . Page 9 of 12 l T.7Y/j: v hl y
- 7) Place in a plastic bag and secure with tape.
} 8) Return switch opened in step No. 2
} to the desired position.
- 9) Have the EP Techn'ician survey the r sample and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate on Appendix EP-236-1.
l 10) Proceed to step 9.1.4.6.
~
] C. EFFLUENT TO RIVER SAMPLE PUMP DISCRARGE LINE COMPOSITE SAMPLE
} 1) Proceed to Control Panel OBC 580.
- 2) Verify that switch RS68-003A (Effluent to River Sample Pump OAP900) or HS68-003B (Effluent to River Sample Pump OBP900) is on.
- 3) Open back panel and locate composite (Valve 68-(- sampling container.
0061). l 4) Prom the comp 6 site sampling bottle throughly six the sample and transfer a 1 liter dip' sample to an appropriate sample bottle. l 5) Place lid on sample bottle and , secure. . l 6) Place in a plastic bag and secure with tape.
- 7) Return switch opened in step No. 2 to the desired position.
- 8) Bave the EP Technician survey the sample and record the Initial Contact Dos.e Rate on Appendix EP-236-1. . .
9.1.4.6 Complete the Data Sheet in Appendix EP-236-
- 2. .
(b 9.1.4.7 Transport the sample to the counting room by retracing the route back from the sample point. (O
. a.
. 7 .
\* aJ? s El^
>
- Gs , z . - ..
( t
, , _ .'-.f~ L: 4...
- l EP-236 Rev. 1 Page 10 of 12 l TJY/frv l 9.2 Follow-up 9.2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall:
9.2.1.1 Repor t the results to the (Inte rim) Emergency Director Dose Kssessment Team e Leader and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF). 9.2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: Complete Appendix EP-236-1. l 9.2.2.1 l 9.2.2.2 Bave the group member (s) dose monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. 9.2.2.3 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the counting Room. 9.2.2.4 Direct group memeber to refer to EP-241 f Sampling Preparation and Handling of _ L- radioactive liquid samples for guidance for sample preparation and handling. 9.2.2.5 Obtain and review all data sheets and report the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all data sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. 9.2.3 Chemistry sampling and Analysis Group , members shall: 9.2.3.1 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-241, Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Liquid Samples. 9.2.3.2 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 9.2.3.3 Properly file the analysis report and report back to the Group Le,ader for reassignment. l (O ! _ i
.... s ...... .. l
4
~
~. m n m. M l EP-236 Rev. 1
.. Page 11 of 1:
l TCY/? - l
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activatic-10.2 M-09 P&ID, Sh. 1, Rev. 19, Circulating Water 10.3 M-68 P&ID, Rev. 4, Plant Waste Water Ef fluent 10.4 EP-241 - Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Liquid Samples i i a i I l \ l e e 'l . ] (O ,
.... , , .q.y l EP-22C Aev,
- Page 12 of 1:
\ 7 : '.' , ' ~ - -
( APPENDIX EP-236-1 DATA SHEET ' 1 i ANALYSIS: l 1 DATE: l l TIME: l i SAMPLE LOCATION: TYPE OF SAMPLE: VOLUME: O . O S MAME:
\
'O :
. . ~~
i g----9-*r- r -
*- *----w-w- --v- m-m-r- --w rt
I .. . . . . - . . . . - . . . . I EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 1 of 21
. 3843010660 T naRf3mv U
3 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY CfW I LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-237 OBTAINING THE IODINE / PARTICULATE AND/OR GAS SAMPLES FROM THE NORTH VENT WIDE RANGE GAS MONITOR (WRGM) 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for obtaining particulate / iodine and/or gas samples from the North Vent WRGM following accident conditions. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group members to perform the steps necessary in this procedure. 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-237-1 Data Sheet 4.0 PREREQUISITES l None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 5.1 Appropriate health physics survey i t i 5.2 Respiratory protective e I b. 5.3 Anti-C clothing 5.4 Dosimetry 5.5 3-off gas via)s q
}
\ l LO
- __ f- "
N?s' =
0 . , l EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv tu ,/ 5.6 Adjustable wrench 5.7 Channel lock pliers 5.8 Extremity dosimetry 5.9 Extra filter 5.10 Extra cartridge 5.11 2-septum valves 5.12 Transport cask 5.13 Designated remote handling tools 5.14 Plastic bags 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented when a particulate, iodine or gas sample shall be taken from the North Vent WRGM during an emergency situation. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 8.2 Do not use elevators. 8.3 Eye protection should be worn when obtaining samples from the sample stations. 8.4 Continuous coverage by a Health Physics Technician may substitute for the Radiation Work Permit. p
i l i . , e l EP-237 Rav. 2 .
- Page 3 of 21 l
- TJY/JRR/jmv 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Actions 9.1.1 (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall:
9.1.1.1 After discussing the situation with the (Interim) Emergency Director, determine if a filter / cartridge or gas sample is required from the North Vent WRGM. I 9.1.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board I to forecast anticipated radiological I conditions. I 9.1.1.3 Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and I check on the latest developments related to I radiological conditions and inform him what I sample (s) are to be taken and that Health i Physics coverage is required. I 9.1.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via i Emergency Director) to ascertain desired I sample system availability. h W I l 9.1.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis l Group Leader what analyses are required. I 9.1.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations I from the Emergency Director for Group l Members (as required) and inform the Plant l Survey Group Leader of this development. I 9.1.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader to collect and analyze the appropriate samples. 9.1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 1 9.1.2.1 After discussing the situation with the l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader I contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and request a Health Physics technician to report to the Chemistry Lab to perform the following: A. Provide the Group Leader with radiological conditions that would impact the sample selection. f3 l \,)
,-.-.w _
w.
s . . l l l EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 4 of 21 j TJY/JRR/jmv B. Brief the Group Members on radiological ( conditions, precautions and requirements for entering the area and radiation level cutoffs for handling and analyzing the sample. C. Provide constant coverage of the sampling and analysis portions of this procedure. I D. Provide Group Members with the l appropriate Dosimetry, Protective l Clothing and Respiratory Equipment. 9.1.2.2 One location exists where the sample may be taken from: North Rack # Location Area Stack 01S908/02S908 Rx-411' 13 l 9.1.2.3 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment and once briefed by the Health Physics technician to collect and transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab. h '$ . 9.1.2.4 Determine what type (s) of sample (s) are to
\J \ be taken:
A. Local Particulate / Iodine Sample B. Remote Particulate / Iodine Sample C. Gas Grab Sample l 9.1.2.5 If a particulate / Iodine sample is to be l taken, contact the Dose Assessment Team l Leader (TSC) for an estimated sampling time l and record this time on Appendix EP-237-1. l Verify that this time is feasible. l 9.1.2.6 Brief the Health Physics Technician and Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following: A. Squad identifier B. Communications equipment and channel C. Type and sampling time of sample (s) to be collected ,
'a T
l l l l
.. . ... - . . . . . ~ .
1
i
. . - . . _ _ . _ _ _ . . . ._c__... .
! EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 5 of 21
- TJY/JRR/jmv l D. Location of= sample point g
l E. Suggested routes to be taken F. Sample transport technique G. Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample H. Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, , preparation and analysis I. Alternatives for obtaining and practical methods of remotely handling the sample (s) J. Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or cellection i K. Proper completion of Data Sheets. I 9.1.2.7 Instruct group members to immediately report the following as they occur or as the information becomes available, r A. Sample locations that are not accessible or any other reason why the sample can not be collected. B. When the sample and group members arrive at the hot lab. C. Results of the analysis. I 9.1.2.8 Appoint one Group menber to prepare the Hot I Lab for receiving the sample, using the I following guidelines: l A. Adequate shielding is available for the i sample. I B. Remote handling tools are in place (as I required). l l C. Protective clothing and equipment are I readily available (as required by HP). I D. Copies of the appropriate sample 1 I handling and analysis procedures are on ( l hand. l tj
I EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 6 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv g i E. Equipment is properly calibrated, I warmed-up and in place. I USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES l FOR PREPARATION OF THE HOT LAB. I EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and l Handling of Highly 1 Radioactive Liquid Samples, i EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and 1 IIandling of Highly l Radioactive Particulate i Filters and Iodine
! Cartridges.
I EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and l Handling of Highly i Radioactive Gas Samples. l 9.1.2.9 Copy Appendix EP-230-2, Chemistry Sampling I and Analysis COL for each sample taken. I Fill out all pertinent information as it I becomes available. t 9.1.3 The Health Physics Technician shall: W l 9.1.3.1 Determine which route should be used to collect and transport the sample. A. SUGGESTED ROUTES AND APPROXIMATE TIMES ARE DESCRIBED:
- 1. Walking up the stairs (Turb. Encl.
217') by the 13.2 kV bus cage to 332' El. proceeding across 332' El. to the stairs next to the North Stack then up the stairs to 411' El. TIME: Approx. 10 Mins.
- 2. Proceeding up the stairs in the N.W.
} corner of RX-217' (Unit 1) to 352' ) El., walking across the refuel floor ' to the door on the south wall between the 2 units. Entering and proceeding up the ladders to 411' I El. TIME: Approx. 15 Mins. i'h
s
- t l' EP-237 Rev. 2
'+ Page 7 of 21
~s TJY/JRR/jmv w g I 9.1.3.2 . Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated.
I 9.1.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate i Dos'imetry, Protective Clothing and 1 Respiratory Equipment. I 9.1.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample, to discuss the following: A. RWP requirenents B. Routes to be used C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions 1 E. Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab F ' Suggested methods to maintain exposures ALARA t G. Stay times and Abort Criteria
! 9.1.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transporting and analyzidg the sample filter / cartridge and/or gas sample from the WRGM. ,
! 9.1.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute to and at the sanple location.
A. Upon entering the power block, the surveyortshall note tcends in general radiation' levels enroute to the sample point. If general area dose rates j (unanticipated) exceed 10 R/hr gamma or ' 10 Rad /hr beta, prior to arriving at the point specified below, immediately report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. The following dose rates shall be determined prior to entry: B. If the dose rate (unanticipated) exceeds 5 R/hr at the door leading to 217', 332', 352', or 411' El. exit the area immediately and report to Chemistry
/,O L) l i
I i
I EP-237 Rev. 2
- Page 8 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv Sampling and Analysis Group Leader with
( this information. With dose rates less than 5 R/hr., enter the desired elevation through that door. Take careful note of the dose rates. C. If using the route suggested in procedure step 9.1.2.3, remember the stairs are next to the North Vent. If general area dose rate (unanticipated) exceeds 10 R/hr. gamma or 10 Rad /hr beta, exit the area immediately and report to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. I 9.1.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. I 9.1.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at the hot lab. I 9.1.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-242 or 243.
?
9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group
\ members shall:
9.1.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab. I 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approacning the administrative exposure guidelines or do not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task. l 9.1.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample (for additional information, refer to prerequisite 4.2). A. Properly label all sample containers. B. If a gas sample is to be taken, prepare three evacuated gas sampling vials. l 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the appropriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the H.P. technician or RWP). J
. . . . . . ~ . - . - - - - - . _ . . . . .
I EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 9 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv 9.1.4.5 Once the group has been briefed and the ( appropriate equipment has been assembled collect and transport the sample as follows: A. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM or Control Room. B. Request the HP Technician to survey the area concentrating especially on the North Vent WRGM. C.. SAMPLING METHOD Perform the appropriate section for the desired sample:
- 1. For obtaining Local Particulate / Iodine Sample
- 2. For obtaining Remote Particulate / Iodine Sample
- 3. For obtaining a Gas Grab Sample D. FOR OBTAINING LOCAL PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE I 1. Locate Control Room Panel l Timer / Control Assembly (RIX-26-076, l KIC-26-076-1, KIC-26-076-2).
I 2. Verify POWER switch is ON. l 3. Verify the green LED's on RIX-26-076 l (NORTH STACK W.R. ACCIDENT) are lit. 1 4. Press CLEAR. I S. Press MON, 1, 3, 6, ITEM and the I channel number will be displayed. I Record channel number. I CHANNEL NUMBER RANGE BUTTON I 1 LOW RANGE l 2 MID RANGE I 3 HIGH RANGE l
! 6. Push appropriate channel (RANGE) I l button. Record concentration, fy \m_ ./
l EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 10 of 21 , TJY/JRR/jmv l 7. Inform the Group Leader of the Range k I and Concentration and have him I verify that the Estimated Sampling l Time and Range Selection are I feasible. Record the Range i Selection and Sampling Time. I 8. Proceed to the appropriate Section i for the desired sample: SECTION D-1 LOW RANGE D-2 MID/HIGH RANGE D-1 LOW RANGE I 9. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM. I 10. Verify that the isolation valves I (26-0026, 26-0027, 26-0028, 26-0029) i on either side of the quick-I disconnects for GRAB SAMPLE 1 are i OPEN. I 11. Locate Sample Conditioning Skid
, I Control Station Electrical l Enclosure. Open lid and set HSS l 076-2, SKID CONTROL switch to LOCAL.
I 12. Verify the green REMOTE CONTROL l DISABLE lamp is lit. I 13. Verify that the POWER DISCONNECT I SWITCH is ON. I 14. On the Sample Detection Skid, ensure I that the PUMP ON LOW green light is I lit. If not, place the followin'g I switches in the appropriate l position: l RANGE SWITCH NO. NAME POSITION , 1 i LOW HSS-26-076-8 Low Pump ON I HS-26-076-10 Flow Control HAND 1 (Low) i HSS-26-076-6 Flow Control OPEN l (Low) v
_ -~..__ _ .... 1 l EP-237 Rev. 2 l I Page 11 of 21
, TJY/JRR/jmv l
- 15. Ensure that the PUMP ON LOW green
(^ light is lit. If not, exit the l I area. I
- 16. Record position (A or B) of HSS 076-4, FILTER SELECTOR LOW RANGE l
I switch. I
- 17. Turn HSS-26-076-4 to GRAB 1 position I
and immediately record the time as I TIME-1 and record the flow from FI-l 26-076-2. i l
- 18. After the desired time has expired, i 1
turn HSS-26-076-4 to position A or B i I and immediately record the time as TIME-2 and record the position. 1 I
- 19. Close the isolation valves (26-0026, l
26-0027, 26-0-28, 26-0029). I 20. Release the band on the holder I assembly and immediately have the HP I Technician survey the sample and I record the Initial Contact Dose Rate. ("% 1
\m.) ( l
- 21. Remove the cartridge, bag and place I
into an appropriate transport cask. I
- 22. Install a new cartridge and filter i paper into the asserably.
I
- 23. Reclip the band on the holder i assembly.
I
- 24. Open the isolation valves (26-0026, i 26-0027, 26-0028, 26-0029).
l
- 25. Place the following switches in the i
I appropriate position: RANGE SWITCH NO. NAME POSITION j LOW HSS-26-076-8 Low Pump AUTO HS-26-076-10 Flow Control AUTO (Low) HSS-26-076-6 Flow Control OPEN l 1.. (Low) ! l
- 26. Set HSS-26-076-2, SKID CONTROL l switch to REMOTE.
W M4
l EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 12 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv W 27. Close Sample Conditioning Skid I Control Station Electrical Enclosure lid and secure.
- 28. Transport the sample to the Chemistry Hot Lab.
D-2 MID/HIGH RANGE l 9. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM.
- 10. Verify that the isolation valves (26-0021, 26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024) on either side of the quick-disconnects for GRAB SAMPLE 2 are OPEN.
- 11. Locate Sample Conditioning Skid Control Station Electrical Enclosure. Open lid and set HSS 076-2, SKID CONTROL switch to LOCAL.
I
- 12. Verify the green REMOTE CONTROL l
DISABLE lamp is lit.
.. I
- 13. Verify that the POWER DISCONNECT l SWITCH is ON.
( l
- 14. On the Sample Detection Skid, ensure I
that the PUMP ON MID/HIGH green I light is lit. If not, place the following switches in the appropriate position: RANGE SWITCH NO. NAME POSITION l MID/ HSS-26-076-7 Mid/High ON HIGH Pump HS-26-076-9 Flow Control RAND (Mid/High) HSS-26-076-5 Flow Control OPEN (Mid/High)
- 15. Ensure that the PUMP ON MID/HIGH green light is lit. If not, exit the area.
- 16. Record position (C or D) of HSS 076-3, FILTER SELECTOR HIGH RANGE 5 switch.
- v()
l 1 . \ l EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 13 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv l 17. Turn HSS-26-076-3 to GRAB 2 position ( I and immediately record the time as I TIME-1 and record the flow from FI-1 26-076-1. I 18. After the desired time has expired, I turn HSS-26-076-3 to position C or D l and immediately record the time as i TIME-2 and record the position. I 19. Close the isolation valves (26-0021, l 26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024). I 20. Open the door to the holder assembly I and immediately have the HP l Technician survey the holder I assembly and record the Initial I Contact Dose Rate, i 21. Release the quick-disconnects on I either side of the holder assembly I and place the holder assembly into I an appropriate transport cask. I 22. Install a new holder assembly.
~~'
I 23. Close the door to the holder i . assembly. I 24. Open the isolation valves (26-0021, i 26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024). I 25. Place the following switches in the I appropriate position: RANGE SWITCH NO. NAME POSITION MID/ HSS-26-076-7 Mid/High AUTO HIGH Pump HS-26-076-9 Flow Control AUTO (Mid/High) HSS-26-076-5 Flow Control OPEN (Mid/High) I 26. Set HSS-26-076-2, SKID CONTROL l switch to REMOTE. I 27. Close Sample Conditioning Skid l Control Station Electrical Enclosure l lid and secure. 1 1 ([~1 l
l l EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 14 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv l 28. fransport the sample to the ( l Chemistry Hot Lab. E. FOR OBTAINING REMOTE PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE
- 1. Locate Control Room Panel Timer / Control Assembly (RIX-26-076, KIC-26-076-1, KIC-26-076-2).
- 2. Verify POWER switch is ON.
- 3. Verify SKID CONT-REMOTE light is lit.
IF SKID CONT-REMOTE LIGHT IS NOT LIT AND SKID CONT-LOCAL LIGHT IS LIT, THEN THE SAMPLE CONDITION SKID CONTROL STATION ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE LID IS OPEN AND/OR THE SKID CONTROL SWITCH (HSS-076-2) IS IN THE LOCAL POSITION. Tell group leader remote sample is impossible and ask for further instructions. l 4. Verify the green LED's on RIX-26-076 l (NORTH STACK W.R. ACCIDENT). I 5. Press CLEAR. I 6. Press MON, 1, 3, 6, ITEM and the I channel number will be displayed. l Record channel number. 1 CHANNEL NUMBER RANGE BUTTON l 1 LOW RANGE l 2 MID RANGE l 3 !!IGH RANGE l 7. Push appropriate channel (Range) l button. Record concentration. I 8. Inform the Group Leader of the Range l and Concentration and have him ; l verify that the Estimated Sampling l time and Range Selection is l feasible. Record range selection i and sampling time. ys . O
I I EP-237 Rrv. 2 Page 15 of 21 . TJY/JRR/jmv l 9. Proceed to the following section for l l, I the appropriate Range: SECTION E-1 LOW RANGE E-2 MID/HIGH RANGE E-1 LOW RANGE l 10. Record letter (A or B) of prefilter I in service (HSS-26-076-10). I 11. Set KIC-26-076-2, LOW RANGE GRAB l SAMPLE TIMER, to the desired sample I time by use of the screwdriver I adjustment and record the SAMPLING l TIME. I 12. Press START TIMER pushbutton (HS 1 076-2) and verify the timer display I is counting. Record the time as I TIME-1. I 13. Press MON, 0, 2, 8, ITEM and the i flow will be displayed. Record the i flow. I 14. When the timer stops counting, grab i sample has been taken. Record time I as TIME-2. I 15. Press CLEAR. I 16. Turn HSS-26-076-10 to the desired I prefilter and record the letter (A i or B) or prefilter in service. I 17. Proceed to the North Vent WRGM. I GROUP MEMBERS AT THE WRGM PERFORM: 1 18. Close the isolation valves (26-0026, I l 26-0027, 26-0028, 26-0029) on each i side of the quick-disconnects on l GRAB SAMPLE 1. l l 19. Release the band on the holder I assembly and immediately have the HP l Technician survey the sampic and I record the Initial Contact Dose
._ . . _ _ . _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ . . i '
. . l l EP-237 Rev. 2 l Page 16 of 21 l TJY/JRR/jmv i Rate. Remove the cartridge, bag and
( 1 place into an appropriate transport I cask. 1 20. Install a new cartridge and filter i paper into the assembly and reclip i the band. I 21. Open the isolation valves (26-0026, I . 26-0027, 26-0028, 26-0029). I 22. Transport the sample to the I Chemistry Hot Lab. E-2 MID/HIGH RANGE I 10. Record letter (C or D) of prefilter I in service (HSS-26-076-9). I 11. Set KIC-26-076-1, MID HIGH RANGE l GRAB SAMPLE TIMER, to the desired I sample time by use of the I screwdriver adjustment and record I the SAMPLING TIME. I 12. Press START TIMER pushbutton (HS l 076-1) and verify the timer display I is counting. Record the time as i TIME-1. I 13. Press MON, 0, 7, 2, ITEM and the I flow will be displayed. Record the i flow. I 14. When the timer stops counting, grab l sample has been taken. Record time I as TIME-2. I 15. Press CLEAR. I 16. Turn HSS-26-076-9 to the desired I prefilter and record the letter (C l or D) or prefilter in service. I 17. Proceed to the North Vent NRCM. I GROUP MEMBERS AT THE WRGM PERFORM: 1 18. Close the isolation valves (26-0021, l 26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024) on each I side of the quick-disconnects on l GRAB SAMPLE 2.
'd
I EP-237 Rev. 2
. Page 17 of 21
. TJY/JRR/jmv i 19. Open the door to the holder assembly ( l and immediately have the HP l Technician survey the holder I assembly and record the Initial I Contact Dose Rate. l 20. Release the quick-disconnects on I either side of the holder assembly I and place the holder assembly into I an appropriate transport cask. I 21. Install a new holder assembly. I 22. Open the isolation valves (26-0021, 1 26-0022, 26-0023, 26-0024). I 23. Transport the sample to the l Chemistry Hot Lab. F. FOR OBTAINING A GAS GRAB SAMPLE
- 1. Verify that the green OPERATE light on the RM80/J BOX assembly is on.
- 2. Verify that Power Disconnect Switch on Sample Detection Skid assembly is on.
3 Verify that either PUMP ON LOW or PUMP ON MID/HIGH or both green lights are lit.
- 4. Verify that either MID/HIGH FLOW or LOW RANGE FLOW switches or both visual flow meters on sample detection skid are indicating flow.
- 5. Locate sample tap valve and verify that it is closed.
- 6. Remove plug and install septum valve and verify valve is closed.
- 7. Open sample tap valve.
- 8. Open septum valve.
- 9. Insert the 1.0 ml microsyringe through the septum valve and the septum valve into the tee Connection.
L]J
I EP-237 Rev. 2 l Page 18 of 21 I TJY/JRR/jmv g
- 10. Flush the microsyringe by taking a 0.1 m1 sample and injecting it back into the sample tee two times.
- 11. Take a 0.1 m1 sample and remove the microsyringe from the sample tee.
Inject the sample into an evacuated 14.4 ml off gas vial.
- 12. Using remote handling tools, place the vial into an appropriate container for transportation to the Hot Lab.
- 13. Close the septum valve.
- 14. Close the sample tap valve.
I 15. Record the sample volume and Time in I Appendix EP-237-3. I 16. Have the HP Technician survey the i vial and record the Initial Contact l Dose Rate. Lt. I 17. Transport the sample to the Hot Lab I,\-) by retracing the route back from the sample station. 9.1.4.6 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, the sample will be handled and stored in a magner that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. 9.1.4.7 Contact the Group Leader as soon as the sample reaches the hot lab and inform him that the sample collection has been completed and what the sample status is. 9.2 Follow-uo 9.2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: I 9.2.1.1 Complete Appendix EP-237-1. I 9.2.1.2 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-242 or EP-243. I 9.2.1.3 Report the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. n I h x/ I
l EP-237 Rev. 2 l Page 19 of 21 i a TJY/JRR/jmv ] j 9.2.1.4 Properly file the Data Sheets and report ( back to the Group Leader for reassignment. 9.2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 9.2.2.1 Ensure Group member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceeded. 9.2.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. 9.2.2.3 Direct group members to refer to EP-242 Sample Preparation and Handling of Radioactive Particulate and Iodine Cartridges or EP-243 Sample Preparation & Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples, for guidance for sample preparation and handling. 9.2.2.4 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets and report the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling l and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data
. . . I Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2.
Pn
\ s- l 1 9.2.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader i shall:
l 9.2.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director l and the Health Physics and Chemistry l Coordinator (EOF). l
10.0 REFERENCES
l 10.1 EP-230 - Chemistry Sampling And Analysis Team l Activation i 10.2 M-102 - General Arrangement Plan At El. 217'-0" I l 10.3 M-106 - General Arrangement Plan At El. 352'-0"
! 10.4 General Arrangement Plan at El. 411'-0" 1G.5 M-26 P&ID, Sh. 1, Rev. 8, Sh. 3, Rev. 3, Sh. 4, Rev. 3, - Plant Process Radiation Monitoring fs "v'
'~ x1
. , _ . _ l <.". ra 6 -mi s . . . , ~ . . . . - . - m -
.. . _ _ . . . ~ . - - - - - - -
.O i l EP-237 Rev. 2
- Page 20 of 21
. TJY/JRR/jmv l 10.6 EP-242 - Sample Preparation And Handling Of Highly
( l Radioactive Particulate Filters And Iodine l Cartridges l 10.7 EP-243 - Sample Preparation And Handling Of Highly l Radioactive Gas Samples O i 4 4 i s i l J j i 1
- O i
3
. -.-a. . . _ - -- -
! EP-237 Rev. 2 Page 21 of 21 TJY/JRR/jmv l APPENDIX EP-237-1 l DATA SHEET l Sample: ,
l Analysis: , Est. Sampling Time: u D. FOR OBTAINING LOCAL PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE Channel number: (1,2 or 3) Conc. Range Selection (Low or Mid/High) Sampling Time I l D-1 LOW RANGE ID-2 MID/HIGH RANGE Prefilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D) Time-1 Time-1 Flow (FI-26-076-2) Flow (FI-26-076-1) Time-2 Time-2 Prefilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D) Initial Contact Dose Rate Initial Contact Dose Rate (%.
'~'
- E. FOR OBTAINING REMOTE PARTICULATE / IODINE SAMPLE Channel number: (1,2 or 3)
Conc. Range Selection (Low or Mid/High) Sampling Time 1 l E-1 LOW RANGE lE-2 MID/HIGH RANGE Prefilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D) Sampling Time Sampling Time Time-1 Time Flow Flow Time-2 Time-2 Prefilter (A or B) Prefilter (C or D) Initial Contact Dose Rate Initial Contact Cose Rate F. FOR OBTAINING A GAS GRAB SAMPLE Time Vol. ( NAME: (m) l l 1
_ - - . _ _ .- --~ ~
- ge
? . 3840090300 EP-238 Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1: T'Y/rg :' PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-238 OBTAINING LIQUID RADWASTE SAMPLES FROM RADWASTE SAMP*_E SINK FOLLOWING ACCIDENT CONDITIONS 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for consideration, prior to, during and after obtaining sar.ples from the radwaste sample sink, following accident conditions. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the group members in performing the steps necessary in this procedure. A 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-238 Data Sheet i 4.0 PPIREQUISITES l Hone ! 1 5.0 SPECIAL EOUIPMENT 5.1 Appropriate Health Physics Survey Equipment 5.2 Anti-C clothing y 5.3 {t Dosimetry ,i
, :. ( $ v ' , '
5.4 3 oz sample bottle with lid 1 5..cf (c3 5.5 Tongs, remote tooling land /ortleak' ikcontainer "v for holding the sample ,,,. O V 5.6 Respiratory protective equ l k' -
, s. . :_ . . :- ., ;.; , =_ , = . ..: . z ..
EP-238 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 1C TJY/mgd
. 5.7 Eye Protection 5.P Extremity dosimetry j 5.9 Plastic bags ,
L' 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented when a Liquid Radwaste sample shall be taken from the Radwaste Sample Sink during an emergency situation. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS lh - 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 8.2 Eye protection should be worn by all personnel obtaining the sample. 8.3 Do NOT use elevators 8.4 Continous coverage by a Health Physics Technician hay substitute for the Radiation Work Permit 1 ( Rh'P) l . 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 (Interim) Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall:. ' , 9.1.1.1 Af ter discussing the situation with the (Interim) Emergency Director, determine if a liquid radwaste sample is required. k' 9.1.1.2 Determine preference of the Sampling Point (~ from M-23 P&ID, Sheet 1 Process Sampling. V) 1 l
~ . . - . .
\
- = .. . _ -. - _. = - . . __ ---_.
IP-238 Rev. 2 Page 3 of 10 TJY/cgd 9.1.1.3 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board to forecast anticipated radiological conditions. 9.1.1.4 Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and check on the latest develqpments related to
- . radiological conditions and inform him what sample (s) are to be taken and that Health Physics' coverage is required.
9.1.1.5 Request input from the Control Room (via Emergency Director) to ascertain the desired sample system availability. 9.1.1.6 Determine what . 7alyses are required and 4 inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader what analyses are required. 9.1.1.7 Request Emergency Exposure Authorizations from the Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) and inform the Plant Survey Group Leader of this development. e 9.1.1.8 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis (, Group Leader to collect and analyze the liquid sample from the radwaste sample sink (Radwaste Enclosure 162') 9.1.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall: 9.1.2.1 After discussing the situation with the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and request a Health Physics technician to report to the Chemistry Lab to perform the following. A. Provide the Group Leader with radiological conditions that would
] impact the sample and route selection.
B. Brief the group members on radiological conditions, precautions and requirements for entering the area and radiation level cutoffs for handling and analyzing the sample, j l C. Provide radiation survey equipment for l (. ) constant coverage of the sampling and analysis portions of this procedure. (0
. . . . _ . . . . . . _ . __ _ . . . j
.y EP-238 Rev. 2 Page 4 of 10 TJY/cgd l D. Provide Group Members with the l appropriate dosimetry, protective ) clothing and respiratory equipment. j 9.1.2.2 Determine which sample point is to be used i based on system availability and i radiological conditions. **Chenck with Shif t i e Operations whether a sample can be taken from the desired sample point. (See M-23 P
& ID, sheet 1 for reference) l 9.1.2.3 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment and once briefed by the B.P. Technician to collect and transport the sample to the l Chemistry Bot Lab. j
\ 9.1.2.4 Brief the Bealth Physics Technician and l Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members on the following. j A. Team identifier
. B. Communications equipment and channel ll - c. Type of sample (s) to be collected l D. Location of sampli points l E. Suggested routes to be taken F. Saaple transport technique ,
G. Projected amount of time required to. collect and transport the sample B. Review of the procedures to be followed for sample collection, handling, preparation and analysis I. Alternatives for obtaining and practical methods of remotely handling the sample (s) J. Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection. l K. Proper completion of Data Sheets
] 9.1.2.5 Instruct group members to immediately report l the folowing as they occur or as the information becomes available.,
O
. . . . . - - l l ?
EP-238 Rev. 2 C<'s ( ,) Page 5 of it TJY/cg:' l
, A. Sample locations that are not accessible j or any other reason why the sample can not be collected.
B. When the sample and group members arrive at the hot lab. - C. Results of the analysis. 9.1.2.6 Appoint one Group member to prepare the Hot Lab for receiving the sample, using the following guidelines: A. Adequate shielding is available for the sample. B. Remote handling tools are in place (as required). C. Protective clothing and equipment are readily available (as required by HP). D. Copies of the appropriate sample handling and analysis procedures are on hand . E. Equipment is properly calibrated, warmed-up and in place. USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES AS GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE BOT LAB. EP-241 (LIQUID) Sample Preparation and", Bandling of Bi hly Radioactive Li uld Samples EP-242 (IODINE) Sample Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Particulate Filters and Iodine Cartridges EP-243 (GAS) Sample Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples 9.1.2.7 Copy Appendiz EP-230-2, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis COL for each sample taken.
'" Fill out all pertinent information as it becomes available.
D
- - - - - - - , - - - . . , . . n .-
a - - - . . - l
, l r EP-238 Rev. 2 Page 6 of 10 TOY /mgd k
9.1.3 The Health Physics Technician shall: l 9.1.3.1 Select the sample route using the following: A. SUGGESTED ROUTES f (1) Down the stairs near the Counting Room (217' elevation) to 162' l elevation. TIME: Approx. 3 min. (2) Walking past the domineralizers exiting the Radwaste Encl. on 217' elevation (Door 337) turn right, proceeding until the next door (Door 339), reentering the Radwaste Encl. and proceeding down the stairs to 162' elevation. TIME: Approx. 3 min.
. B. The following are approximate times required to obtain the samples lh -
LOCATION TIME TO SAMPLE Radwaste Sample 3 mins. or less Sink depending on flow l 9.1.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. , 9.1.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. l 9.1.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following: A. RWP requirements B. Routes to be used C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions E. Review of procedure for obtaining and transporting sample to bot lao i F. Suggested methods to maintain erposures
~
ALARA
EP-23E Rev. 2 Page 7 of 10 TOY /mgd G. Stay times and Abort Criteria l 9.1.3.5 Provide constant coverage while obtaining, transpcrting and analyzing the sample fro: the Containment Leak Detector.
- . l 9.1.3.6 Monitor dose rates enroute and at the sample location. Upon entering the power block, the surveyors will note trends in general radiation levels enroute to the Containment Leak Detector. If general area dose rater (unanticipated) exceed 10 R/hr gamma or 10 rad /hr beta prior to arriving at the point specified below, exit immediately and repor t to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Le ad er.
If the general dose rate (unanticipated) exceeds 5 R/hr at the door leading to Rx. 162', leave the area immediately and repor t to Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader with this information. l 9.1.3.7 Survey the sample area and sample cask. l 9.1.3.8 Document the sample cask survey results and give them to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader (or other designated group member) when arriving at the hot lab. l 9.1.3.9 Provide constant coverage during sample preparation and handling as specified in EP-241. . 9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group members shall: l 9.1.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the . chemistry lab. l l 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the administrative exposure guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task.~ , l 9.1.4.3 obtain the necessary equipment (prepare three evacuated off-gas sample vials) to collect the sample and ensure that the hot (;-j lab is ready to accept the sample (for l additional information, refer to !
/ prerequisite 4.2) }
PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS
.~. l
_m.., -. . . .- -_ ,,-_._y_ ,. , _ , . . . . . _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ , _ _ . _ . , - , . _ _ . _ . , . _ _ _ . , _ ,
1
)
EP-238 Rev. O f Page E cf 20
\
T:Y/myd i
-j 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the appropriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the H.P. technician or RWP) 9.1.4.5 Once the group has been briefed and the appropriate equipment has'.been assembled, proceed to the appropriate radwaste sink and collect the sample as follows:
A. Proceed to the Radwaste Sample Sink. l B. Have the H.P. Technician survey the area, concentrating on the Sample Sink C. Proceed to the predetermined Grab Sample Point. D. Ensure that a flow is present. If not, attempt to initiate flow by opening root valves. If flow is not - established, exit and consult Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. I E. SAMPLING METHOD Obtain a 1 oz. sample (,' (about l' up f rom bottom) or less in a 3 oz. bottle. Usetongs or other remote handling tools which hold the sample bottle without operator attention. When required amount of sample is obtained remove bottle and transpcrt with tongs, other remote tools, or lead carrying container. F. Have the Health Physics Technician survey the vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate in Appendix EP-235-1. G. Complete the Data Sheet in Appendix EP-238-1. l E. Take the sample to the hot lab retracing one of the previously I suggested routes. 9.2 FOLLOW-UP ',' 9.2.1 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: (_. 9.2.1.1 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-241 Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Liquids.
- a. ..
d 1 EP-238 Rev. l Page 9 of 10 T0l*/msd g 9.2.1.2 heport the results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. 9.2.1.3 Properly file the data sheets and report back to the Group Leader for reassignment. 9.2.2 Chemistry Sampling and An'alysis Group Leader
;- shall:
9.2.2.1 Ensure Group Member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceed ed . 9.2.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab. 9.2.2.3 Direct Group Members to refer to EP-241 Sample Preparation and Bandling of Radioactive Liquid: for guidance for sample preparation and handling. 9.2.2.4 Obtain and review all Data Sheets and repor t _ the sample results to the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data k~
% Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2.
9.2.3 Chemistry Sampling and' Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.2.3.1 Report the results to the Emergency Director and the Health Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF). ,
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation 10.2 M-23 P&ID, Sh. 1 Rev. 9 Process Sampling ! 10.3 M-100 General Arrangement Plan at El.177'-0" 10.4 M-102 General Arrangement Plan,at El. 217'-0" 10.5 EP-241 Sample Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Liquids O
.. ~
- EP-238 Rev. 2 Page 10 of 1C TJY/cgd k-APPENDIX EP-238-1 DATA SHEET
, Liquid Radwaste Grab Samples l DATE:
TIME: SAMPLE LOCATION: l SAMPLE POINT: VOLUME: l INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATEt l ANALYSES: . I l . l NAME: I I 1 l
- l t
to l l
.. l
y _
. -- __ . . ,,--:--+ - - -
= -
4 . 3840090310 EP-240 Rev. 2 Page 1 of 12
'l
. PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION Y
EMERGENCY PI.AN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE r EP-240 OBTAINING OFF-GAS SAMPLES FROM THE AIR EJECTOR / HOLDUP PIPE DISCHARGE SAMPLE STATION 1.0 PURPOSE
~
The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for consideration prior to, during and after obtaining an off-gas sample from the Air Ejector / Holdup Pipe Discharge Sample Station. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall direct the Group Members in performing the steps necessary in this procedure. 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-240-1 Data Sheet 4.0 PREREQUISITES l None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMEfff 5.1 Appropriate health physics survey equi' t 5.2 Respiratory protective e
' ' (. u we s.: o 5.3 Anti-C clothing Fr P 5.4 Dosimetry 5.5 14.4 al off-gas vials with septuns l <. O VA!.1 Oh!.Y WH.. RED 9
L
. . - -- _ - _ ~ . - -.
= .._ m - - - - _, ,_ _ _ . _ _ _ - - - _
O. c EP-240 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 12 [O L./ TJY/med -
.- 5.6 Tongs or other remote tooling or lead carrying container 5.7 Eye Protection 5.8 Thermometer '
6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented when an off-gas sample shall be taken from the Air Ejector /Boldup Pipe Discharge Sample Point during an* Emergency situation. r 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Planned radiation exposurar should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-230-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. - 8.2 Do not use elevators. 8.3 Eye protection should be worn by all personnel when obtaining samples from the sample station. . 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 Chemistry sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.1.1.1 Af ter discussing the, situation with the (Interin) Emergency Director, determine if an off-gas sample from the Air
, Ejector /Noldup Pipe Discharge Sample Station
, is required dJ 9.1.1.2 Check the Plant Radiation Level Status Board to forecast anticipated radiological l
{} conditions. we
- , - . _ . -. . - , ,,_,-. , _ - - _ . . . . -w.
l 3_q . &_. . _ x.
'_ - -ld ' * .- - n: ; 7. -* .' '
~
- t -
EP-240 Rev. 2 Page 3 of 12 TJY/msd 9.1.1.3 Contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and check on the latest developments related to radiological conditions and inform him what sample (s) are to be taken and that Health Physics' coverage is required. t' 9.1.1.4 Request input from the Control Room (via Roergency Director) to ascertain desired sample system availability. 9.1.1.5 Determine what analyses are required and inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader what analyses are required. 9.1.1.6 Request Emergency Exposure Authorization from the Emergency Director for Group Members (as required) and inform the Plant Survey Group Leader of this development. l 9.1.1.7 Direct the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis l Group Leader to collect and analyze the appropriate samples I [h (h. 9.1,2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader v shall , j
~
, 9.1.2.1 After discussing the situation with the Team l Leader, contact the Plant Survey Group Leader and request a Bealth Physics technician to report to the Chemistry Lab to i perform the following: 1 l A. Provide the Group Leader with
- radiological conditions that would i impact the sample and route determination
- B. Brief the Group . Members on radiological
- conditions, precautions and requirements for entering the area and radiation level cut-offs for handling and analyzing the sample ,
! ] C. Provide radiation survey equipent for constant coverage of the sampling and analysis portions of the procedure I D. Provide Group Members with the k'kp apropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment. i f() j l 1
.-,..__-..,-...-..,__,n_.__-,,_,_ . , _ _ , .n,_ - , , , , _ . _ , ,_ _ . - . _ , _ _ - . , _ ., - ,. , _ ,
. ' = y .' K'*^ -"- n -
~
s - ~
~} . ~ ~ 7 77*: . . . _ - . . . ;
<. .M . - * -~ . -s- -
o EP-240 Rev. 2 Page 4 of 13 TJY/med ~ (L \
~
9.1.2.2 Select the sample location I The location for each unit where the sample may be taken ist i j
, Equip. No. Locat' ion Area l 10S 160 Turb. Encl. 200' 8 !
20S 160 Turb. Encl. 200' 8 '
] 9.1.2.3 Check with shift operations to verify that the desired sample can be collected from the desired sample station and sample point l 9.1.2.4 Assign the appropriate number of group members to obtain the necessary equipment and once briefed by the H.P. technician, to collect and transport the sample to the 1 Chemistry Bot Lab.
l 9.1.2.5 Brief the Health Physics technician and
~
Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members on the following: A. Squad identifier B. Communications equ'ipment and channel C. Type of sample (s) to be collected l D. Location of sample points l E. Suggested routes to be taken - F. Sample transport technigue G. Projected amount of time required to collect and transport the sample B. Review of the procedures to follow for sasple collection, handling, preparation and analysis I. Alternatives for obtaining and practical methods of remotely handling the sasple (s) _
'J. Special tools and equipment required for sample handling and/or collection !
)
l E. Proper completion of Data. Sheets l g - . . . . _ , _ _ . -. , .,,
EP-240 Rev. 2 ['.
- Page 6 of 13
) TJY/msd 9.1.2.8 Copy Appendix EP-230-2, Chemistry Sampling and Analysis COL for each sample taken.
Fill out all pertinent information as it becomes available, 9.1.3 The Health Physics Technician shall l 9.1.3.1 Determine which route should be used for collecting and transporting the sample ROUTES AND APPROXIMATE TIMES
- 1. Down the stairs in the S.W. corner of Turb. Encl. 217' to 200' El. and proceed forward down the hall to Area 8.
TIME: 3 Min.
- 2. Down the stairs by the 13.2 kV Bus Room on Turb. Encl. 217' to 200' El.
TIME: Gl 3 Min. Ce 9.1.3.2 Take appropriate radiation survey equipment and ensure that equipment is functional and calibrated. , 9.1.3.3 Provide Group Members with the appropriate dosimetry, protective clothing and respiratory equipment.
] 9.1.3.4 Perform a pre-job briefing with the Chemistry technicians assigned to obtain the sample to discuss the following:
A. RWP requirements B. Routes to be used C. Authorized doses D. Radiological concerns and precautions E. Review of proc e~ dure for obtaining and transporting sample to hot lab
/ F. Suggested methods to maintain exposures Q ALARA G. Stay times and Abort Criteria
^
= -- -
/
EP-240 Rev. 2 Page E of 12 e~ TJY/m;f (_) 4'
~
9.1.4 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall: 9.1.4.1 Assemble for a pre-job briefing at the chemistry lab ,
/ l 9.1.4.2 Inform the Group Leader if they are approaching the Adminstrative Exposure l Guidelines, or may not have sufficient exposure remaining to successfully complete the assigned task.
l 9.1.4.3 Obtain the necessary equipment to collect the sample and ensure that the hot lab is ready to accept the sample (for additional information, refer to Prerequiste 4.2) l 9.1.4.4 Obtain and don the appropriate protective clothing and equipment (as required by the B.P. technician or RWP) PROPERLY LABEL ALL SAMPLE CONTAINERS
/ 9.1.4.5 Once the group has been briefed and the
( appropriate equipment has been assemble, proceed to the Air Ejector / Holdup Pipe Discharge Sample Station and collect / transport the sample as follows: A. With general area dose rates less than 5 R/hr in the area of the Air Ejector /Boldup Pipe Discharge Sample Station, survey the control panel and if the general area dose rates are less ' than 5 R/hr open the door on the back of the panel. Survey the sample station concentrating on the inlet lines. B. The time to obtain a sample is approximately 15 minutes SAMPLING METHOD
- 1. Open valv,e',26-10?2 (-2022).
- 2. Verify thht the FUNCTION SELECTOR Switch (BSS-2 6-114 -I r -214 -1) is in
, the INSERT VIAL position.
k;p 3. Install a sample vial in the vial positioner. () w -w,-
/ EP-240 Rev. 2 r ( Page 9 of l? TJY/med l
- 4. Insert the vial positioner into the ;
vial positioning guide tube so that microswitch S3 is held closed by the vial.
- 5. Turn POWER switch (HS-26-ll4-1;-
214-1) to the ON* position.
- 6. Turn POWER switch (HS-26-114-3r-214-3) to the ON position.
- 7. Position the FUNCTION SELECTOR Switch (HSS-26-114-Ir-214-1) to the EVACUATE VIAL position. Indicator lamps DS2 (valve 2), DS3 (valve 3) and DS4 (pump) should be illuminated. Vacuum pump B1 (26-10P927;-20P927) should be running and the vacuum gauge (PI-26-ll4 r-214) should show a decreasing pressure level within the vial.
- 8. After vacuum gauge indicates
( greater than 25 in. Hg vacuum, position FUNCTION SELECTOR switch ChW to CHECK VACUUM position. Allow the sample line to purge for at least 10 minutes. Indicator lamp DS3 (valve 3) should have extinguished and lamps DS1 (valve 1), DS2 (valve 2) and DS4 (purg) should be illuminated. THE SAMPLE MAY BE COLLECTED DOWN TO 20 in. Hg VACUUM IF THE PUMP MILL NOT GIVE ANY MORE VACUUM.
- 9. Place FUNCTION SELECTOR Switch to PURGE position. Indicator lamp DSl (valve 1) should be illuminated. 1
- 10. Record in Appendix EP-240-1 the '
1 ambient temperature (deg. C) in the cabinet by. placing a thermometer in the back of the cabinet.
- 11. If the 1evel of vacuum holds within the sample vial, record the vial vacuum as VAC-I from PI-26-114r-
{ 214. (o .
EP-240 Rev. 2 Page 10 of 13 f(~T TJY/mgd O d . 12. Turn FUNCTION SELECTOR switch to FILL VIAL position. Indicator lamps DS1 (valve 1) and DS3 (valve
- 3) should be illuminated. Record the time in EP-240-1. .
- 13. After the vacuum gauge has stabilized, record in EP-240-1 the l final vial pressure as VAC-F in "Rg if pressure is < atmospheric or P in psig if pressure is >
atmospheric.
- 14. Turn FUNCTION SELECTOR Switch to REMOVE VIAL position and remove the vial and immediately have the EP Technician survey the vial and record the Initial Contact Dose Rate in Appendix EP-240-1 and place the vial in an appropriate shielded container for transpor tation to the Hot Lab.
- 15. Return FUNCTION SELECTOR switch to
{ (, INSERT VIAL position.
- 16. Turn POWER sw. itch (ES-26-114-3;-
214-3) to the OFF position.
- 17. Turn POWER switch (HS-26-114-1;-
214-1) to the OFF position.
- 18. Take the sample to the Hot Lab -
retracing backwards one of the - priviously suggested routes. 9.1.4.6 Upon introduction of the sample into the hot lab, the sample will be handled in a manne r that personnel exposures are kept ALARA. UNNECESSARY PERSONNEL SHALL NOT REMAIN IN THE HOT LAB. 9.1.4.7 Inform the Control Room that the required sample has been taken.
/
c c:) l l
. . . - . . . . , . , ~ . . - - - -
e --_. - .. a. - _ l
. EP-240 Rev. 2 l Page 11 of 13
( TJY/rgd
'I) ([
t 1 9.2 FOLLOW-UP l 9.2.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.2.1.1 Report the results to the Emergency Directer
- and the Bealth Physics and Chemistry Coordinator (EOF).
] 9.2.2 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall:
l 9.2.2.1 Ensure Group Member (s) dose is monitored to ensure that exposure limits have not been exceed ed l 9.2.2.2 Inform the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader that the required sample is in the hot lab l 9.7.2.3 Direct Group Members to refer to EP-243 Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples for Guidance for , Sample Preparation and Handling ' l 9.2.2.4 Obtain and review ALL Data Sheets and repor t the sample results to'.the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader and attach all Data Sheets to Appendix EP-230-2. l 9.2.3 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall l 9.2.3.1 Complete Appendix EP-240 -l . l 9.2.3.2 Prepare, handle and analyze the sample using EP-243 Preparation and Bandling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples. l 9.2.3.3 Report the results t'o the Chemistry Sampling i and Analysis Group Leader l l 9.2.3.4 Prop 2rly file the data sheets and report l back to the Group Leader for re-assignment. l LO p ,,,m -
'* - - - - - - I
, EP-240 Rev. 2 Page 12 of 13 TJY/c9d 0
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activatier. 10.2 M-101 General Arrangement Plan at El. 201'-0* 10.3 M-102 General Arrangement Plan at EI. 217 '-0* 10.4 M-26 P&ID, Sh. 2 Rev. 7 Sh. 4 Rev. 3; Plant Process-Radiation Monitoring 10.5 M-69 P&ID, Rev. 21 Gaseous Radwaste-Recombination 10.6 EP-243 Sample Preparation and Handling of Highly Radioactive Gas Samples (ijp C-9 4
- e e
( 1
. (C) . - - - - - - _ _ _ _ __ = - -
.s . . . - . . . - - _. ' EP -2 4 0 Rev. 2 Page 13 of 13
(,,s TJY/r::gd APPENDIX EP-240-1 DATA SHEET l OFF GAS SAMPLE , l"DATE: TIME: TEMP. (T) : Deg. C VACI: "Bg TIME: VACF: "Bg P Dsig { INITIAL CONTACT DOSE RATE: CALCULATION OF OFF GAS VOLUME VOL O.G. at STP = ( P) (14.4 al) (273 dec. K) (T+273 deg. K) (29.0"Bg) Where P= (VAf,'I - VACF) if final pressure is < atmospheric or P= (2.J4P + VACI) if final pressure is > atmospheric T = ambient Temp. In cabinet (degrees C) MAME: L ' ~ (O
. -- , .- , . - - - ,,-m-,- - -- - - - , , - - - , , - , , - - , , . - , - , , - - , . , - - - , - - - - - , - - , - - - - - - , ,---~.-v----.------,+--v4 ---
~~ ~
O *' 7. 3840090320 EP-241 Rev. 2
' - Page 1 of E TJY R E/r.lt o '
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC CO!!PANY
## l LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PIAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDUPI EP-241 gAf!PLE PREPARATION AND RANDLING OF HIGHLY RADIOACTIVE I.JOUID SAPGLES.
l 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for sample preparation and handling of highly radioactive liquid samples following accident conditions. l 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
, 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader is responsible for:
l a. Determining the processing procedure. [I (- b. Determining the method and location of to >1 tor e odeor.di re 1 e=iree-
- c. Having group member (s) exposure monitored in conjunction with Health Physics guidance to ensure that the Administrative Exposure Guidelines are not exceeded.
- d. Directing group member (s) and the assigned Bealth Physics technician to per form the -
necessary steps of this procedure and to report back the results of the sample analysis as soon as they become available. l 2.2 The Health Physics technician.is responsible for:
- a. Providing constant coverage for the necessary steps of this procedure.
- b. Monitoring the er gy, p 8th% IFh6ds during sample ha ipg .' t , , ;
. 1 ) .,
1 l c. Monitoring labora ry habitabi,l,it.,y,., , l d. Conducting a pre-job brie n rning : l 1. RWP requirements (O YE!D 0!!!.Y~ ME1 E
., 6 = -
3 EP-241 Rev. 0 Page 2 of 9 TJY/RGE/ la C1 O 2. Radiological concerns and precautions (ALARA). 3.. The use of staytimes to ensure that exposures do not exceed limits. 2.3 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis, Group members are.
.. responsible for:
- a. Preparing the hot lab post accident sample l
, preparation station to accept the sample.
- b. Performing sample dilution and analysis requirements as specified by the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader.
- c. Following RWP and Health Physics requirements as specified by the Health Physics technician.
l 3.0 APPENDICES
] 3.1 EP-241-1 Data Sheet
[ 4.0 PRERIOUISITES, 4.1 An RWP shall be assigned to the actual sample preparation and analysis task. 4.2 Ventilation in the sample preparation hood is . operating. - l 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT l 5.1 Appropriate Health Physics Survey Equipment l 5.2 Respiratory Protection Equipment if required. l 5.3 Anti-C Clothing. - l 5.4 Whole Body Dosimetry. - l 5.5 Extremity Dosimetry {; I 5. 6 Liquid sample vials with septum. (O 4
, , . . - , - - _ . . - - . - - - - - , , . . , - - - - . , , - - . m._ _ . _ - - _ _ - - - - , , - , , - - - , - -
e __._ EP-241 Rev. 2 e
' Page 3 of 9 TJY/RGE/cla (V/'S k l 5.7 Appropriate liquid microsyringes.
f 5.8 Rubber gloves j l 5.9 Plastic sample bags. l 5.10 Sample handling tongs. .
~
] 5.11 0.01N nitric acid solution (500 ml) .
l 5.12 Eye protection l '6. 0 SYMPTOMS l None
] 7.C ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented when preparing or handling highly radioactive liquid samples during an emergency situation.
h - l
\
l 8.0 PRECAUTIONS l 8.1 In all steps of this procedure, keep exposures ALARA. l 9.0 PROCEDURE 5 ] 9.1 ACTIONS l 9.1.1 Determination of processing procedure. ~ 9.1.1.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group 1 Leader shall obtain the appropriate EP-fn Sample Data Sheet and select one of the I following processing procedures based on the radiation levels of the sample,
- a. Send the samp16 off-site for analysis per EP-244 Offsite Analysis of High Activity Samples.
[ F h b. Place the sample in temporary storage for future analysis. i
- . . ~ , . . - - .
- _ ~ - .
)
EP-241 Rev. 2 Page 4 of 9 TJY/RGE/mla [] QJ Analyze the sample on-site. ( l l' c. COMPLETE SEC* ION I OF APPENDIX EP-241-1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group I 9.1.1.2 l Leader shall determine the following sample parameters based on sample dose rates and analysis requirements,
- a. Analysis to be performed.
l f
- b. Order of analysis l
- c. Number and magnitude of dilutions l
- d. Analysis sample volume desired l
PH DETERMINATION CANNOT BE PERFORMED ON DILUTED SAMPLES.
]
COMPLETE SECTION II OF APPENDIX EP-241-1. 9.1.2 Pre-Job Briefing l
' 9.1.2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader, Health Physics Technician and the e
{' Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Members shall assemble, and review this i procedure. , 9.1.2.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group 3 Leader shall direct group members to perfore the necessary steps of this procedure. SECTION 9.1.3 AND 9.1.4 SHOULD BE PERFORMED AS EARLY AS POSSIBLE. THE SAMPLE MAY NOT BE PLACED IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION UNTIL THESE SECTIONS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 9.1.2.3 The Health Physics Technician shall brief group members on:
- a. RWP requirements I
- b. Radiological concerns and 3 precautions (ALARA) l
- c. Staytimes and exposure limits l i
l' j 9.1.3 Preparation of sample preparation station for liquid samples g ,
l L EP-241 Rev. 2
- Page 5 of 9 l /
TJY/RGE/cla b
+ 1 9.1.3.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall prepare the dilution vials (with appropriate labels) per appendix EP-241-1 and place the vials in the appropriate dilution vial positions in the sample l preparation station. Place lead caps over ;
the vials (liquid position,) . THE LEAD CAPS MAY BE POSITIONED FOR GAS OR LIQUID SAMPLES. FOR THE PURPOSE OF THIS PROCEDURE THEY SHALL i BE IN THE LIQUID POSITION l 9.1.3.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall ensure that the necessary liquid micro syringes (with needles), sample handling tongs and sample analysis containers are in place and available to fulfill dilution and analysis requirements per appendix EP-241-1. 9.1.3.3 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall ensure that at least one pair of plastic gloves and two plastic sample bags are available for each gamma analysis to be performed. l 9.1.4 Preparation of analysis instrumentation. 9.1.4.1 The Chemistry Samplini and Analysis Group Member (s) shall insure that the appropriate analysis procedures specified in appendir. EP-241-1 are available and have been performed to the point that each analysis instrument is ready to accept the sample for analysis. - THE FOLLOWING STEPS ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CEEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBER (S) (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) AND REQUIRE CONSTANT HEALTH PHYSICS MONITORING. ALL RWP REQUIREMENTS MUST BE MET BEFORE PROCEEDING. 1 LEAD BRICKS IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION HAVE BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT THE SAMPLE. THE LEAD BRICK LABLED " SAMPLE VIAL A" RAS BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT A GAS OR LIQUID SAMPLE FROM THE. PASS. THE LEAD BRICK LABELED " SAMPLE VIAL B" BAS BEEN E DIFIED TO ACCEPT A LIQUID SAMPLE FROM THE REACTOR COOLANT SAMPLE STATION. 9.1.5 Transport of sample from transport cask to y sample preparation station. 1 i 1
EP-241 Rev. 2
. Page 6 of 9 TJY/RGH/mic 9.1.5.1 Remove the lead cap from the lead brick to l(
accept the sample. 9.1.5.2 Positon the sample transport cask as close to the Sample Preparation Station as possible.
.. 9.1.5.3 As quickly and carefully ds is possible, remove the sample from the transport cask and place it in the lead brick.
9.1.5.4 Quickly place the lead cap over the sample in the " liquid" position. 9.1.5.5 Retreat from the Sample Preparation Station and allow the Health Physics Technician to take dose rate readings. THE HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN SHALL INFORM THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBER OF THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION DOSE RATES AND STAY TIME. 9.1.6 Sample Dilution (if dilutions are not to be performed, proceed to step 9.1.7). DILUTIONS TO BE MADE ARE DESCRIBED IN APPENDIX EP-241-1. ALL ACCESDORIES USED',IN THE DILUTION PROCESS SHALL BE MAINTAINED BEHIND THE LEAD SHIELD WALL ONCE THEY HAVE BEEN CONTAMINATED. 9.1. 6.1 ' Insert the syringe thru the sample access hole in the lead cap then thru the sample vial septum and into the sample to be diluted. Withdraw the predetermined - (appendix EP-241-1) aliquot from the sample vial. 9.1.6.2 Withdraw the syringe from the sample and insert it in the predescribed method into the next sequential dilution vial to accept
.the sample (Dilution vial #1, 42 etc.).
Inject the aliquot into the dilution vial. 9.1.6.3 withdraw the syringe from the sample. Separate the needle ard the syringe and discard them in the shielded waste container. d!'
\
. EP-241 Rev. 2 l
- Page 7 of S
.JY/RGE/mla
/ 9.1.6.4 Remove the lead cap over the diluted sample.
k Grasp the sample vial securely with the sample handling tongs and raise the vial out of the lead brick (but not above the lead shield wall) . 9.1.6.5 Using the tongs, swirl the sample vial enough to ensure adequate
- mixing, replace the vial. ' Replace the lead cap (liquid position).
9.1.6.6 If further dilutions are necessary (per appendix EP-241-1) repeat steps 9.1.6.1 thru 9.1.6.5, always beginning with the last dilution vial to accept a sample aliquot. 9.1.6.7 When desired dilution is reached, the Health Physics Technician shall determine the dose rate of the diluted sample. 9.1.6.8 If the diluted sample dose rate is
! unacceptable, repeat steps 9.1.6.1 thru 9.1.6.5 until dose rate is acceptable.
t Indicate additional dilutions on appendix EP-241-1. L Of ~
\ 9.1.7 Sample Cup Preparation 9.1.7.1 For each analysis to b'e performed (appendix EP-241-1) use the syringe transfer method (step 9.1.6.1) to sequentially obtain the volume of sample required (Appendix EP-241-
- 1) from the appropriate diluted / undiluted sample source (appendix EP-241-1) . .
9.1.7.2 Inject the appropriate sample aliquot into l Its analysis cup. DUE TO THE AMOUNT OF SAMPLE BEING REMOVED FROM THE BOTTLE IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO VENT THE BOTTLE BY PLACING A NEEDLE TERU THE SEPTUM. , DDE TO THE SMALL VOLUME OF SAMPLE USED TO PERFORM PE d AND THE EFFECTS CO2 ABSORBTION WILL BAVE ON THE ANALYSIS, THE PE SHOULD BE DETERMINED IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE SAMPLE IS PLACED IN.ITS SAMPLE CUP.
] 9.2 FOLLOW-UP Of 9.2.1 Perform the predetermined analysis (Appendix s
~
,. EP-241-1) in the predetermined sequence (Appendix EP-241-1) .
*. . .. . - . ~ . . . . .-
.~ . - -
t EP-241 Rev. 2 Page 8 of 9 TJY/RGH/mla ( (- . 9.2.2 Disposal of samples and contaminated materials THE STORAGE AND/OR DISPOSAL OF THE UNUSED PORTION OF THE ORIGINAL SAMPLE WILL BE AT THE DISCRETION OF THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUPS LEADER AND THE HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN. , 9.2.2.1 The remaining samples and contaminated sample cups shall be disposed of in the shielded waste container. The sample handling tongs shall be used in the transfers. The samples and sample cups should be kept behind the lead shield wall as much as is possible. 9.2.2.2 Transfer and disposal of the shielded waste container will be at the discretion of the Health Physics Technician and the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. l
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 CH-901 - O's { Determination of Ions by Ion Chromatograph during Post Accident Conditions. 10.2 . CH-903 Determination of PH in Low Volume Water Samples during Post Accident Conditions. 10.3 Ch-904 Determination of Metals by DCP during Post Accident conditions. 10.4 CH-905 Determination of Gamma Isotopic activity-during Post Accident Conditions. 10.5 Ch-906 Determination of chloride by Specific ton during Post Accident Conditions. 10.6 CH-907 Determination of Boron at ppm levels during Post Accident Conditions. i 10.7 EP-230 Chemistry Stapling and Analysis Team Activation t 4 i J
. - . - -- - . _ _ _ _ . .~.-.- .
7 l *; EP-241 Rev. 2l
/^-- page 9 of 9 j 3
i
\ ,
JY/RGil/mla . - Appendix EP-241-1 [ . Data Sheet , ( l I. Sample Source Processing Procedures ( X) j. Grab Sample Point A. Sent Offsite for Analysis * ( ) Initial Sample Volume B. Placed in Temporary Storage *,** ( ) C. Analyzed on Site ( ) , Initial Contact Dose Rate - Sample Date/ Time / , i i II. **** j l l
*** Total Analysis Acceptable [; I Procedure Aliquot Magnitude Number of Dilution Sample Analysis ;*) l Order of Factor Volume Dose Rate l Analysis Analysis Number Size of Dilutions Dilutions I
l l i 1 2 l-3 , j
- 4 i
, 5 ,
6 r j l* If this method is used sign and date this data sheet and terminate this procedure. L I l ** The Cheml4try Sampling and Analysis Group Leader shall determine place of storage.
*** Dilution angnitudes of 10:1 can be obtained by transfering a 1 al aliquot of sample into 9 ml of blank water. Dilution magnitudes of 100:1 can be obtained by transfering a .1 ml aliquot Dilution magnitudes of 1000:1 can be obtained by I
*! of staple intp .9.9 al of blank water. k transferring a .01 mi aliquot of sample into,9.99 al of blank water. Nitric acid (0.0lN) 1 may be used .in place of blank water.
****Recommed bd Analysis Sample Volume DCP-4ml, IC-4 al, PH .3ml,Cl-Iml/100mi N2O (specific lon electrode), Doron-2m1 (titration method). If the gamma analysis sample is to be counted on the 2ND shelf, make the final dilution vial into e 14.4 cc gas vial containing the appropriate volume of P dilution solution.
DUE TO THE COMPLEXITY OF THE DILUTION AND ANALYSIS PROCESS, IT IS RECOMMENDED TilAT TIIE SAME MAGNITUDE OF DILUTION DE USED IVR ALL OF THE ANALYSIS. Signature Date Time l _ Chemistry Group Member /
,______/
IInni th Phynien Group F1 ember __ _ _ _ _._ ,_ _
/
c r e win f.e.v'n r
4 3840090330 EP-242 Rev. 2 i l i Page 1 of E TJV P GF. ,'. - g
'Y PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
. LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE SAMPLE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF HIGHLY RADIOACTIVE
- EP-242 PARTICULATE FILTERS AND IODINE CARTRIDGES 1
1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for ) sample preparation and handling of highly radioactive particulate filters ard iodine cartridges during an emergency , situation. 1 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
- 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader is !
responsi?>le fore 2.1.1 Determining the processing procedure.
)'
( l Determining the method and location of 2.1.2 sample storage and/or ' disposal as required. 2.1.3 Having group member (s) exposure monitored in conjunction with Health Physics guidance to ensure that the Administrative Exposure Guidelines are not exceeded. 2.1.4 Directing Group Member (s) and the assigned Bealth Physics technician to per form the necessary. steps of this procedure and to report back the results of the sample l analysis as soon as they become available. l 2.2 The Health Physics technician is responsible for: 2.2.1 Providing constant coverage for the necessary steps of this procedure. 2.2.2 Monitoring the a 5 he ' hands during sample b {[$. [ dj ie !.d.J r 2.2.3 Monitoring laboratory bdBdilh'lly. , Y] Odi E E KD DiaY WHEi RED l O ' l
+
EP-242 Rev. 2 l Page 2 of E 6 TJY/RGE/n: It
] 2.2.4 Conducting a pre-job briefing concerning:
l A. RWP requirements l B. Radiological concerns and precautions C. The use of staytimes'to ensure that exposures do not exceed limits. 2.3 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Members are responsible for: 2.3.1 Preparing the hot lab post-accident sample preparation station to accept the sample. 2.3.2 Following sample dilution and analysis requirements as specified by the Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader 2.3.3 Following RWP and Health Physics requirements as specified by the Health Physics technician. ( APPENDICES
$. . 3.0 l 3.1 EP-242-1 Data Sheet 4.0 PREREOUISITES f
4.1 An RWP shall be assigned to the actual sample , preparation and analysis task. 4.2 ventilation in the sample preparation hood is operating. a 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 5.1 Appropriate Bealth Physics Survey Equipment 1 5.2 Respiratory Protection Equipment if required 5.3 Anti-C clothing b' I 1 l
l EP-242 Rev. 2
- Page 3 of E TJY/RGE/no t
5.4 Whole Body Dosimetry l l 5.5 Extremity Dosimetry l 5.6 Purge cannister ! l 5.7 Eye protection - , l 5.8 Plastic sample bags 1 5.9 Sample handling tongs 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented when preparing or handling highly radioactive particulate filters and iodine cartridges during an emergency situation. ( 8.0 PRECAUTIONS l 8.1 In all steps of this procedure, keep exposures ALARA. 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS l 9.1.1 Determination of Processing Procedure 9.1.1.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall obtain the appropriate Sample Data Sheet and select one of the following processing procedures based on the radiation levels of the sample. A. Send the sample offsite for analyses per EP-244 Offsite Analysis of High Activity Samples. i L , O l .
,.,,,,-,.__,m . _ , . _ . . . - . . .
- ..~ .. - . . - . --_
. ...__ m. . _.
- ~ . - . . .
l EP-242 Rev. 2 ' Page 4 of 6 , TJY/RGE/n- I i ($
\. B. Place the sample in temporary storage
- for future analyses.
l C. Analyze the sample on-site. l COMPLETE SECTION I OF APPENDIX EP-242-1. I 9.1.1.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall determine the following sample parameters based on sample dose rates and gamma isoropic analyses requirements.
. A. Sample to be analyzed (silver zeolite and/or filter) l B. Order of analyses l C. Purge time of sample l D. Acceptable dose rate for gamma counting l COMPLETE SECTION II OF APPENDIX EP-243-1.
] 9.1.2 Pre-Job Briefing
-- 9.1.2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader, Bealth Physics technician and the Chemistry Sampling and' Analyses Group Members shall assemble and review this procedure.
9.1.2.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall direct group members to per. form the necessary steps of this procedure. . SECTION 9.1.3 AND 9.1.4 SHOULD BE PERFORMED AS EARLY AS POSSIBLE. THE SAMPLE MAY NOT BE PLACED IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION UNTIL THESE SECTIONS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 9.1.2.3 The Health Physics technician shall brief group members on: l A. RWP requirements B. Radiological concerns and precautions (ALARA) C. Staytimes and exposure limits (. 4 l
~w- ;
- EP-242 Rev. 2 l
- Page 5 of 8 TJY/RGH/no o
(t L NOTE l I THE FOLLOWING STEPS ARE TO BE PERFORNED BY THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBER (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED). 9.1.3 Preparation of Sample Stabion for Iodine and
- - Particulate Samples !
9.1.3.1 Determine the purge gas to be used (nitrogen or air) 9.1.3.2 Ensure that the desired purge gas system has adequate supply pressure and is aligned to the sample preparation station. 9.1.3.3 Place the purge cannister discharge line in the " discharge position". 9.1.3.4 If a purge cannister is to be used connect it to the quick disconnect fitting and place it behind the lead shield wall.
] 9.1.4 Preparation of Analysis Instrumentation
(~- Ensure that the appropriate analysis 6 9.1.4.1 procedure specified in Appendix EP-242-1 is available and has been performed to the point that each analysis instrument is ready to accept the sample for analysis.- l NOTE l ALL RWP REQUIREMENTS MUST BE MET BEFORE PROCEEDING. ', 9.1.5 Transport of Sample from Transport Casks to Sample Preparation Station 9.1.5.1 Position the sample transport casks as close to the Sample Preparation Station as possible. 9.1.5.2 As quickly and carefully as is possible, l remove the sample from the transport cask and place it behind',the lead shield wall.
?l 1
0
EP-242 Rev. 2
\ Page 6 of 8 TJY/RGB/no If a purge cannister is to be used, place
(- 9.1.5.3 the sample in its appropriate purge cannister and connect the quick disconnect fittings. Establish a purge gas flow in the same direction and flow rate as was used in the sampling process. 4
- 9.1.5.4 If a purge cannister is not used, connect I I
the quick disconnect fittings (on the sample chamber) . Establish a purge gas flow in the I same direction and flow rate as was used in l I the sampling process. 9.1.5.5 Retreat from the Sample Preparation Station and allow the sample to purge for the predetermined amount of time (Appendix EP-242-1). l l 9.1.5.6 When the desired purge time has elapsed , secure the purge gas and disconnect the l quick disconnect fittings. Keep the sample < shielded behind the lead shield wall. l 9.1.5.7 The Health Physics technician shall determine the dose rate of the purged sample. g< _, If the purged sample dose rate is ! 9.1.5.8 ' unacceptable (per Appendix EP-242-1) repeat steps 9.1.5.3 through 9.1.5.7 until the acceptable analysis dose rate is reached or no longer changes. l 9.2 FOLLOW-UP . l 9.2.1 Sample Analyses 9.2.1.1 Perform the gamma isotopic analysis as directed in Appendix EP-242-1. 9.2.2 Disposal of Samples and Contaminated Materials ! 9.2.2.1 Transfer and disposal of " analyzed samples" will be at the discretion of the Health Physics technician and the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader. I h 9 l l
_e_ _. EP-242 Rev. 2
' l Page 7 of 6 TJY/RGE/nc l
10.0 REFERENCES
-(
10.1 CH-905 Determination of Gamma Isotopic Activity D.: ring Post Accident Conditions 10.2 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activatier. l ,
... u.
f a G e l l 4 o Y l l l l l
- l
-- . . ~ . - - - --
g l EP-242 Rev. 2 , Page 8 of 6 TJY/RGF./n: ( l [ APPENDIX EP-242-1 DATA SHEET l l 1. Sample Source Grab Sample Point l Initial Sample volume Initial contact Dose Rate
~
l Sample Date/ Time / l Processing Procedures ( X) l (*) A. Sent offsite for analyses ( ) l (*) (**) B. Placed in temporary storage ( ) l C. Analyzed on-site ( ) (*) If this method is used, sign and date this data sheet and terminate this procedure. (**) The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shcIl determine the place of storage. l II. Gamma Isotopic Analysis requirements k- g.. 3 g....) Order of Procedure Sample to Purge Acceptable Dose Analysis Number be Analyzed Time Rate for Analysis l 1 CH-905 . l 2 CH-905 l 3 CH-905 - l 4 CH-905
\ 5 CH-905 l (***) silver zeolite cartridge (s) or filter paper
(****) since all samples are to be purged together, the same purge time should be used. l Signature ', Date Time l Chemistry Group Member I l Lealth Physics Group N:G er l Group Leader UD
s i 3840090340 ry_2n Res . 2 b.. Page 1 ef 10
- e e. .
.Y s-. ...
t~ PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
'fNf l
? LIMERICK GENERATING STATION l EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE 1 l
'~
EP-243 SAMPLE PREPARATION AND BANDLING OF HIGHLY RADIOACTIVE GAS SAMPLES l 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for sample preparation and handling of highly radioactive gas samples following accident conditions. l 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Leader is responsible for l 2.1.1 Determining the processing procedure. 2.1.2 Determining the method and location of sample storage and/or disposal as required. 2.1.3 ~ Baving group member (s) exposure monitored in conjunction with Health Physics guidance te ensure that the Administrative Exposure Guidelines arenot exceeded. 2.1.4 Directing Group Member (s) and the assigned Health Physics technician to perform the necessary steps of this procedure and to report back the results of the sample analysis as soon as they become available. l 2.2 The Health Physics technician'is responsible for: 2.2.1 Providing constant coverage for the necessary steps of this ocedure. r p 2.2.2 Monitoring the extr e' Nan 6s' during sample handl TD t1 ('. ,, i , , j 2.2.3 Monitoring laboratory habi hl .f T b
'I L !D O N !. Y E RE D
a e
? EP-243 Rev. 2 Page 2 of 10 TJY/RGE/nc r
l 2.2.4 Conducting a pre-job briefing concerning: l l A. RWP requirements l B. Radiological concerns and precautions q
. i l '
C. The use of staytimes"to ensure that l . exposures do not exceed limits. 2.3 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Members are responsible for:
)
2.3.1 Preparing the hot lab post-accident sample preparation station to accept the sample. l 2.3.2 Performing sample dilution and analysis ' requirements as specified by the Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader 2.3.3 Following RWP and Health Physics requirements as specified by the Health Physics technician. t l 3.0 APPENDICES l 3.1 EP-243-1 Data Sheet s l 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4.1 An RWP shall be assigned to the actual sample . preparation and analyses task. 4.2 ventilation in the sample preparation hood is operating. l 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT l 5.1 Appropriate Bealth Physics Survey Equipment l 5.2 Respiratory Protection Equipme'nt if required
, l 5.3 Anti-C clothing l 5. 4 Whole Body Dosimetry l 5.5 Extremity Dosimetry fm
r -- -- EP-243 Rev. 2
$ Page 3 of 10 TJY/RGF./nc
( ], 5. 6 Gas sample vials l 5.7 Appropriate gas syringes l 5.8 Rubber gloves
., l 5.9 Plastic sample bags
. l 5.10 Sample handling tongs i l 5.11 Eye prc.ection j 6.0 SYMPTOMS l None j 7.0 ACTION LEVEL , 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented when preparing or
~
handling highly radioactive gas sample during an emergency situation. ( l 8.0 PRECAUTIONS l 8.1 In all steps of this procedure keep exposures ALARA. l 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS l 9.1.1 Determination of Processing Procedure ! 9.1.1.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group l Leader shall obtain the appropriate EP-Sample Data Sheet and select one of the following processing procedures based on the radiation levels of.the sample. A. Send the sample offsite for analyses per EP-244 offsite Analysis of High
/ Activity Samples.
NCI
r , . _ . _ ~- EP-243 Rev. ;
! Page 4 of 10 e TJY/RGE/n 1
l k B. Place the sample in temporary storage for future analyses, I i l C. Analyze the sample on-site. l COMPLETE SECTION I OF APPENDIX EP-243-1. 9.1.1.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall determine the following sample parameters based on sample dose rates and analysis requirements.
- l. A. Analysis to be performed B. Order of analyses l
l C. Number and magnitude of dilutions D. Analyses sample volume required.
) { -
l SAMPLES FOR HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN DETERMINATION BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY.MUST NOT l I BE DILUTED. g ( l 9.1.2 COMPLETE SECTION II OF APPENDIX EP-243-1. Pre-Job Briefing I . 9.1.2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader, Health Physics technician and the
' Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Members shall assemble and review this procedure.
9.1.2.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Leader shall direct group members to perform the necessary steps of this procedure. SECTION 9.1.3 AND 9.1.4 SHOULD BE PERFORMED AS EARLY AS POSSIBLE. THE SAMPLE MAY NOT BE PLACED IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION UNTIL THESE SECTIONS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 9.1.2.3 The Health Physics technician shall brief group members on: - . l A. RWP requirements
;. B. Radiological concerns and precautions F
h C. (ALARA) staytimes and exposure limits [ ] k
)
L
_ . - . ~ . . _ l
* -- ~ _.
1 EP-243 Rev. 2 i Page 5 of 10
! TJY/RGE/no O 9.1.3 Preparation of Sample Preparation Station for Gas Samples 9.1.3.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group Member (s) shall prepare the dilution vials per Appendix D-243-1 and, place the vials in the appropriate dilution vial positions in
- the sample preparation station. Each dilution vial shall have the predetermined (D-243-1) aliquot *"nuw withdrawn from it.
Place lead caps over the vials (gas position). THE LEAD CAPS MAY BE POSITIONED FOR GAS OR LIQUID SAMPLES. FOR THE PURPOSE OF THIS PROCEDURE THEY SHALL BE IN THE GAS POSITION. 9.1.3.2 The Chemistry Sampling and Analyses Group Member (s) shall ensure that the necessary gas micro syringes (with needles), sample handling tongs and sample analysis containers are in place and available to fulfill dilution and analysis requirements per Appendix D-243-1. I The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group h b 9.1.3.3 Member (s) shall ensure that at least one j w pair of plastic gloves and two plastic i l sample bags are available for each gamma analysis to be performed. l f l 9.1.4 Preparation of Analysis Instrumentation l 9.1.4.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Group i Member (s) shall ensure that the appropriate analyses procedures specified in Appendix D-243-1 are available and have been performed to the point that each analysis instrument is ready to accept the sample for analysis. THE FOLLOWING STEPS ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CHEMIFTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSES GROUP MEMBER (UNLESS OTHERWISE ' SPECIFIED) AND REQUIRE CONSTANT BEALTH PHYSICS MONITORING. l ALL RWP REQUIREMENTS MUST BE MET BEFORE PROCEEDING. l LEAD BRICKS IN THE SAMPLE PREPARATIDN STATION BAVE BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT THE SAMPLE. THE LEAD BRICK LABELED l
" SAMPLE VIAL A" BAS BEEN MODIFIED TO ACCEPT A GAS OR LIQUID I SAMPLE FROM THE PASS!
1 i 1 l
. '-..-...... . -a ..=_ . . -.
EP-243 Rev. 2
& Page 6 of it TJY/RGE/n Transport of Sample from Transport Cask to l 9.1.5 Sample Preparation Station l l
l 9.1.5.1 Remove the lead cap from the lead brick te accept the sample. 9.1.5.2 Position the sample trans' port cask as close '
- to the Sample Preparation Station as possible.
l 9.1.5.3 As quickly and carefully as is possible, remove the sample from the transport cask and place it in the lead brick. 9.1.5.4 Quickly place the lead cap over the sample in the " gas position". i 9.1.5.5 Retreat from the Sample Preparation Station and allow the Health Physics technician to take dose rate readings. . THE HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN SHALL INFORM THE CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP MEMBERS OF THE SAMPLE PREPARATION STATION DOSE RATES AND STAY-TIME. 9.1.6 Sample Dilutions (If dilutions are not to be ' performed or if analyses are to be performed prior to dilution, proiceed to .9.2.1.2) . DILUTIONS TO BE MADE ARE PRESCRIBED IN APPENDIX EP-243-1. ALL ACCESSORIES USED IN THE DILUTION PROCESS SHALL BE MAINTAINED BEHIND THE LEAD SHIELD WALL ONCE THEY HAVE BEEN CONTAMINATED. 9.1.6.1 Insert the syringe through the sample access hole in the lead cap, then through the sample vial septum and into the sample to be diluted. 9.1.6.2 Mix the gas in the sample vial by pumping the syringe in and out. 9.1.6.3 set the syringe to the volume of sample to j be transferred per Appendix EP-243-1. I 9.1.6.4 Withdraw the syringe' form the sample and insert it in the predescribed method into the next sequential dilution vial to accept g the sample. Inject the aliquot into the dilution vial. 0 I. e . . - - - . . -. - .- . . - . - . . . . - - . - _ . - .- - - - - - - - -
I 2P-243 Rev. 2 i Page 7 of 10 TJY/RGE/n W 6 9.1. 6. 5 Mix the gas in the sample vial by pumping ti the syringe in and out. 9.1.6.6 Withdraw the syringe from the sample. Separate the needle and the syringe and discard them in the shielded waste container. 9.1.6.7 If further dilutions are necessary (per Appendix EP-243-1) repeat steps 9.1.6.1 1 through 9.1.6.6, always beginning with the ' last dilution vial to accept a sample aliquot. 9.1.6.8 When the desired dilution is reached, the Realth Physics technician shall determine ; the dose rate of the dilution sample. 9.1.6.9 If the dilution sample dose rate is unacceptable repeat steps 9.1.6.1 through 9.1.6.6 until the dose rate is acceptable. Indicate additional dilutions on Appendix EP-241-1.
, j 9.2 FOLLOW-UP
() \ 9.2.1 9.2.1.1 Sample Analysis Perform gamma isotopic analysis if directed by Appendix EP-243-1. Proceed to step 9.2.2. 9.2.1.2 Perform oxygen and hydrogen analysis if directed by Appendix EP-243-1. Proceed back to step 9.1.6.1 if dilutions are necessary for gamma isotopic anlysis per Appendix EP-243-1. 9.2.2 Disposal of Samples and Contaminated Materials 9.2.2.1 The remaining samples shall be disposed of in the shielded waste container. The sample handling tongs shall be used in the transfer. The samp1.es should be kept behind the lead shield wall as much as is possible. 9.2.2.2 Transfer and disposal of the shielded waste container will be at the discretion of the I
- f. Bealth Physics technician and the Chemistry b' Sampling and Analyses Group Leader.
( m,- - ~W
* * --w-- - , , - - - ,- --r,,-- -,---w--
** w . - - -
. ~ .. ... .
EP-243 Rev. 2 v Page 8 of 10 TJY/RGH/nc
} 10.0 REFEPINCES 10.1 CH-905 Determination of Gam:na Isotopic Activity During Post Accident Conditions 10.2 CH-902 Determination of Hydrogen and Oxygen Using a Gas Chromatograph During'Dost Accident
': Conditions 10.3 EP-230 Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Activation L
n v e b e 1 b( 0 _ ,4,9 . , - - ~ _ _ - --
r . E 3 Rev. 2 Page 9 of 10 TJY/RG11/no } l APPENDIX EP-243-1 , DATA SilEET l . l I. Sample Source Grab Sample Point Initial Sample volume Initial Contact Dose Rate
]
l Sample Date/ Time / l Processing Procedures (X) (*) A. Sent offsite for analyses ( ) l
? *
(*) (**) B. Placed in temporary storage ( ) l l C. Analyzed on-site ( ) l (*) If this method is used, sign and date this data sheet and terminate this procedure. i l (**) The Chemistry Sampilng and Analyses Group Leader shall determine the place of storage. l l II. ,
*** Total Analysis Acceptable Magnitude of Dilution Sample Analysis Order of Procedure Aliquot
- Dose Rate Analyses _ Analysis Number Size Dilutions Factor
- Volume l 1 _I _I _l .__
i 2 _I_I_I_ i 3 _I_I_1_ i 4 _I_I_I_ i 4
v 9 ( E b 3 Rev. 2 :
' Paspe 10 of 10 ,
TJY/RGil/no l
,t 1-
' APPENDIX EP-243-1 '
i . DATA SI1EET (CONT'D) l ! I (***) Due to the complexity of the dilution and analysis process itToin calculate recommended that the . the magnituc same magnitude of dilution be used for all of theRecommended analyses. sample volumen: GC - 100' 7 of dilution use the following tables: (*****) micro liters 2nd dilution 3rd dilution 4th dilution Aliquot Site let dilution l 207 2985 42998 1 al 14.4 g l 144 2070 29850 429900 f l .1 al s !
- Total Dilution Factor = Vs _ X Magnitude of Dilution 14.4 l Vs'=,' Volume of original sample (from the appropriate EP-231 Sample Data Sheet)
Signature.* Date Tim g l
E T
,. f- - ' 3840090350
- EP-244 Rev. O f e Page 1 of 3 gs VAW J /jmv L~
6 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-244 OFFSI*E ANALYSIS OF HIGH ACTIVITY SAMPLES 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to coordinate the shipment of high activity samples to off-site laboratories for analysis. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall contact the (Interim) Emergency Director and request off-site sample analysis as required. (i 2.2 The (Interim) Emerge.scy Director shall determine the
- b. need to ship a sartple off-site for analysis and request the Site Emergency Coordinator to arrange transportation for the sample.
2.3 The H.P. and Chemistry Coordinator shall complete the appropriate steps of this procedure. 2.4 The Personnel Safety Team Leader shall complete the appropriate steps of this procedure. . 3.0 APPENDICES i 3.1 EP-244 Of f-site Post Accident Sampling Analysis. l l 4.0 PREREQUISITE __S CONTROLLED 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT None p .
'/A
. D 01!Y WiEN RED .
l l l
. - ___ _ _ _ . - - . . _. . ~ . . - - _ _ , , - , . _ - _ -
r-EP-244 Rev. O I
-[ ,
Page 2 of 3 l VAW/JMU/jev [' k) he 6.0 SYMPTOMS
- None l
- - 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 Samples must be sent to specially equipped off-site laboratories when 1) the activity is judged to be too ,
great for the on-site facilities; and 2) when there is I a need to determine the condition of the core by off- l site analysis. The samples will be sent as directed 1 by the Emergency Director. l l 8.0 PRECAUTIONS None - l 9.0 PROCEDURE (' Is 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall: 9.1.1.1 Contact the (Interim) Emergency Director and request off-site sample analysis as
- required. ,
9.1.2 The (Interim) Emergency Director shall: 9.1.2.1 Determine the need to ship a sample off-site for analysis based on the limitations of the on-site analytical capabilities for hot samples or any need to determine core conditions by off-site analysis or both. 9.1.2.2 Contact the Site Emergency coordinator and request transportati,on of f-site.
~
9.2 FOLLOW-UP The Emergency Director shall I 9.2.1
* \
kL-f 9.2.1.1 Contact the Site Emergency Coordinator for I an estimated time of arrival of .the shipping ! cask.
~
l s s l EP-244 Rev. C ' .) ' Page 3 of 3 ; VAW/JMU/jnv ' 9.2.2 The Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: 9.2.2.1 Assign an individual to load the cask in accordance with all applicable Limerick radwaste shipping procedures including HP-713. .,
^
Note: Unless otherwise directed, the cask will be shipped to the Babcock and Wilcox Research Center in Lynchburg, Virginia.
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 HP-713 10.2 ~?-272 10.3 EP-284 10.4 EP-120 - Site Emergency Coordinator 10.5 Babcock and Wilcox - Project Technical Pl'an for Post Accident Sample Analysis Program { e
- e 9
CO 1
I 3840090360 EP-250, Rev. 1 Page 1 of E e RWD/VAW/9 G/rgs l cp l PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
- LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE I EP-250 PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM ACTIVATION 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the actions required to activate and assemble the Personnel Safety Team.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 A Shif t Health Physics Technician shall assume the role of the Interim Personnel Safety Team Leader and perform the necessary steps in this procedure. 2.2 The Personnel Safety Team Leader shall relieve the jw. ( Interim Personnel Safety Team Leader and per form the necessary steps in this procedure. (J 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-250-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines 4.0 PREREQUISITES None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
~
None . { N 6.0 SYMPTOMS r; 3 .- (, None g p+ j/ 1 L yD VED OM.Y E R0
R EP-250, Rev. 1 l
*s Page 2 of 5 RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs l
i '( 7.0 ACTION LEVEL l 7.1 The (Interim) Emergency Director shall activate the Personnel Safety Team at his discretion.
. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-250-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines.
9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 Interim Personnel Safety Team Leader (Shift Senior EP Technician) shall: l 9.1.1.1 Report to the OSC. 9.1.1.2 Contact the Emergency Director and discuss any radiological considerations. OJ ~ 9.1.1. 3, Prioritize assignment of available personnel from the Operations Support Center (OSC) to the required Personnel Safety Team Groups to carry out the following procedures, as necessary: l EP-251 Plant Survey Group . EP-252 Search and Rescue /First Aid EP-254 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group i EP-255 Vehicle Decontamination Procedure PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM ACTIVITIES SBOULD BE GIVEN TO TBE ASSESSMENT OF INPLANT RADIOLOGICAL CONDITIONS AND SUPPORT OF l EMERGENCY ENTRIES UNTIL SUCE TIME AS THE TSC BAS BEEN 1 ACTIVATED. . 9.1.1.4 Direct the group leaders to report the status and results of group activities via radios, telephone or plant page system. L . O
I EP-250, Rev. 1 (\ l Page 3 of E RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs l - l f( l 9.2 FOLLOW-UP Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: 9.2.1 9.2.1.1 Report to the Technical Support Center and contact the Interim Personnel Safety Team Leader in the OSC and asse'ss existing
- in-plant radiological conditions.
9.2.1.2 Based upon this assessment consider the need for implementation of protective actions for emergency workers including the need for KI in accordance with EP-313 Distribution of Thyroid Blocking Tablets. 9.2.1.3 Ensure Personnel Safety Team members are available at assembly areas (OSC on 269, Elev. Turbin? Enclosure or designated evacuation assembly area). Use EP-277 Personnel Safety Team Phone List to call additional personnel, if necessary. Assign additional team members to functional
~
9.2.1.4 groups as necessary per step 9.1.1.2 of this f..- procedure. , 9.2.1.5 Activate the Personnel, Dosimetry, Bioassay, f , and Respiratory Protection Group in accordance with EP-221, if technical health physics support is needed. , f 9.2.1.6 Designate group leaders for the functional groups formed. 9.2.1.7 Maintaincommunicationsviaanyavailabke means with the groups after they have been sent to perform their assigned tasks.
10.0 REFERENCES
i 10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG 0654, criteria for Preparation and Evaluation Rev. 1 of Radiological -Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants, f ( \ 10.3 10.4 EP-251 Plant Survey Group EP-252 Search and Itascue/First Aid l s o. i-
.. .... -.~ -.
(. EP-250, Rev. 1 \ l Page 4 of 5 RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs l 10.5 EP-254 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group 10.6 EP-255 Vehicle Decontamination Procedure 10.7 EP-277 Personnel Safety Team Phone List 10.8 EP-221 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassiy, and Respiratory
'- Protection Group l 10.9 EP-313 Distribution of Thyroid Blocking Tablets 0
O e 6 L
. . -.. -~. . . .
). . . . - . - EP-250, Rev. 1 Page 5 of 5 ' l RWD/VAW/ MPG /rgs l APPENDIX EP-250-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines l l Projected Whole Body Thyroid *- Authorized Function Dose Dose Bv
- 1. Life Saving and l Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem (Interim) !
Emergency ** Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an l Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem (Interim)
Emergency ** Director
- 3. Protection of Health l and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem (Interim)
Emergency **
- Director
) - l 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 (Interim)
Activities limits limits Emergency Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Activitie s Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A ,
- References EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis e
i M/ CO
\) ,
4
)
.5840090370 EP-251 Re*
- Page 1 of f i I. !- Rt'D/VAV !:tG/.la j PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMEN*ING PROCEDURE EP-251 PLANT SURVEY GROUP 1.C PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for the actions of the Plant Survey Group.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
- 2. 1 The Plant Survey Group Leader shall be responsible for directing the Plant Survey Squads by performing the steps in ^his procedure.
2.2 The Plant Survey Squads shall be responsible for conducting surveys and providing health physics coverage as directed by the Plant Survey Group Leader. 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-251-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4.1 Emergency has been declared per EP-101 classification of emergencies. 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT Plant Survey Kit l 6.0 SYMPTOMS va car m n . O 1
EP-251 Rav. 1 ; [ Page 2 of f
- Y l Rh*D/VAV/ MPG /mla 7.0 ACTION LEVEL Entry is authorized by the (Interim) Emergency 7.1 Director.
! 7.2 The Personnel Safety Team Leader direct a specifie l
survey or health physics activity tq be performed. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS
! 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-251-1, Emergency Exposure Guidelines.
8.2 Unless specific needs dictate, in-plant radiation surveys should be conducted in conjunction with entries performed for other purposes. ARM readings should be used in lieu of pre-entry surveys whenever possible. , 8.3 Until it is proven otherwise, airborne radioactive materials are presumed to be present in all affected areas of the plant. 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Actions 9.1.1 The Plant Survey Group leader shall: 9.1.1.1 Report to the Operations Support Center - (OSC). 9.1.1.2 Inform the OSC Coordinator of your presence and proposed course of action. Determine if any entries to affected areas are planned. 9.1.1.3 Establish communication with the Personnel Safety Team Leader and discuss plant radiological conditions, actual and projected. 9.1.1.4 Dispatch a EP Technician to the ARM panel in the Auxiliary Equipment room and direct him to establish an open telephone line with the l .OSC and TSC and provide ARM readings. i 1
I EP-251 Rev. 1 Pace 3 of E ') l RWD/VA9/ MPG /mla
- 9.1.1.5 Assign an individual to man the phone te the
( auxiliary equipment room and read ARM readings. 9.1.1.6 Determine the type (s) of survey information needed, the type (s) of surveys to be conducted, and specify the instrumentation to be used. 9.1.1.7 Assign a Health Physics Technician to accompany each team entering the affected area. 9.1.1.8 If survey informat;on is necessary, form a Plant Survey Squad comprised of at least twe Health Physics Tech 11cians. 9.1.1.9 Prepare ERWP per EP-401 and brief the technician / team.
] 9.1.2 Plant Survey Squad Members shall:
9.1.2.1 Check that all squad members are properly clothed and equipped with appropriate dosimetry and respiratory protection per the Emergency Radiation Work Permit (ERWP)
%. contained in EP-401.
L 9.1.2.2 Question that all squad members know where they are going, how to get there, and what they are expected to do. 9.1.2.3 Check that at least one squad member is equipped with an operating, calibrated lapel air sampler. 9.1.2.4 Check that the squad is equipped with any needed tools or equipment, e.g. , shielded container for samples, reach rods, etc. 9.1.2.5 Check that the maximum allowable exposures are known and understood by the team members. 9.1.2.6 Obtain the survey instruments specified by the Plant Survey Group Leader and check that they are calibrated and operable. 9.1.2.7 Estimate exposure accumulation for the job including transit time co and from the work area. (
g - EP-251 Rev. 1 l Page 4 cf f j RWD/VAY/lG0/mit 3 DO NOT PROCEED IF ENTRY PLUS EXIT EXPOSURES WOTLD EXCEED THE ALLOWABLE EXPOSURE. CONTACT THE PLANT ( SURVEY GROUP LEADER FOR INSTRUCTIONS. 9.1.2.8 Make entry and perform continuous dose rate surveys. IF RADIATION LEVELS EXCEED THE RANGC OF THE SUR?EY
- INSTRUMENT, DO NOT PROCEED.
9.1.2.9 Upon arrival at the area of interert, conduct rapid surveys and exposure estimates. Based on estimated exposures
~
determine a maximum stay time. 9.1.2.10 Continue to monitor area radiation dose rates during the conduct of activitics with particular interest in operations that could result in changed conditions, e.g. , sample i collection. 9.2 Follow-up 9.2.1 After completing the entries into affected areas, Plant Survey Squad members shall: 9.2.1.1 Record the results of all surveys on a 3 Survey Data Sheet.
}
l 9.2.1.2 Record exposures received by team members. I 9.2.1.3 Record cll observations and conditions. 9.2.1.4 Report survey results and personnel exposures to the Plant Survey Group Leader. 9.2.1.5 Collect and turn in team dosimetry for processing if directed by the Plant Survey Group Leader. 9.2.1.6 Analyze air sample media in accordance with HP-214. 9.2.1.7 Provide copies of all survey records to ttc Plant Survey Group Leader.
] 9.2.2 The Plant Survey Group Leader shall:
9.2.2.1 Report radiological and personnel exposure status to the Personnel Safety Team Leader. O Q) I
e -- . l EP-251 Rev. 1 l Page 5 of f RWD/VAV/ MPG /r.lt -) l r
' 9.2.2.2 Provide the plant survey squads and OSC coordinator with status updates as to
( changes in plant conditions. 9.2.2.3 Direct the plant survey squads to other locations as necessary. 9.2.2.4 Inform the Personnel Safeiy Team Leader of the need for additional personnel, if necessary.
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation of Rev. 1 Radiological Emergency Response Plans in Support of Nuclear Power Plants. l 10.3 HP-214 l 10.4 EP-401 l 10.5 EP-101 ( f.' O m)
......_..a. - . . . - . . -.
l EP-251, Rev. 1 -) - Page 6 of 6
! RWD/VAV/ PPG /nla i APPENDIX EP 251-1 Emeroency Exposure Guidelines Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorired Function Dese Dose By
! 1. Life Saving and (Interin)
Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Eme rg en cy *
- Director
'2. Operation of Equipment l to Mitigate an (Interin)
Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Emergency **
Director
- 3. Protection of Health (Interim) and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem Emergency **
Director
, 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency
; Activities limits limits Director (j 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Sta tion Activities Administra- Administra-tive Guide- tive Guide-lines lines N/A
- References EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis e
..._ _ .,_-- -_ - . _ _ ...~. _. - - -
4
, y. --.wwevsvu
EP-252 Rev. 1 l
Page 1 of 12 VAK/'.PG/ r g s
/
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
'N!/
'( LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-252 SEARC" AND RESCUE /FIRST AID 1.0 PUPSOSE The purpose of this procedure is to define the requiremer.tr and the actions of the Search and Rescue /First Aid Group.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Personnel Safety Team Leader shall control the Search and Rescue /First Aid Group exposure and provide of fsite medical support by performing the necessary steps in this procedure. 2.2 The Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Leader shall direct operations by performing the necessary steps in this procedure. 2.3 The Search and Rescue /First Aid Group members shall perform rescue operations by performing the necessary steps in this procedure. 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP 252-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines 3.2 EP 252-2 First Aid Equipment Locations 3.3 EP 252-3 Injured Personnel Report Form 3.4 EP-252-4 Medical Suppor 4.0 PREREQUISITES - None
?
4
- c. pv VA.: CN.Y WHEN RED r y v s..
- g ,. i 3~ _n , c p . n .
,d ana A
- a
s. l EP-252 Rev. 1 Page : cf 1: VAW/tPG/r - 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMINT 5.1 First Aid Kit 6.0 SYMPTO!!S .-
~
6.1 Missing personnel or personnel with injury receiring fir st aid. 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 The Search and Rescue /First Aid Group is activated whenever personnel are known to be missing or in need of help. 8.0 PRICAUTIONS 8.1 Personnel shall participate in search and rescue f. operations on a voluntary basis. 8.2 Proper radiological controls shall be followed as much C'.i~
> as practicable during search and rescue operations.
Continuous coverage by Health Physics technician may be substituted for a Radiation Work Permit. 8.3 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-252-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 8.4 Life-saving first aid treatment has priority over decontamination or treatment for radiation exposure. 8.5 Radiation exposure and group member contamination should be minimized as much as. practical. 8.6 If gross external contamination is found, internal contamination should be suspected. 8.7 Any material removed from a contaminated person shall be recovered for potential use for isotopic analysis. 8.8 The Search and Rescue /First Aid troup Leader will maintain contact with the Personnel Safety Team Leader a' at the designated assembly krea. g
\_ 1 1
v(
/
L
,\ -
l EP-252 Rey, 1 Page 2 of 1; VAi:/ MPG /rgs 8.9 If first aid team is unable to move an injured perser
- (
due to the nature of the injury, assistance of local
^
ambulance personnel may be utilized. 9.0 PROCEDURE .- 9.1 IfMEDI ATE ACTIONS 9.1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: 9.1.1.1 Select a qualified person at the OSC to be the Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Leader and to carry out Section 9.1.2 of this procedure. 9.1.1.2 Inform the Interim Emergency Director or the Emergency Director that search and rescue /first aid groups have been formed and of their intentions to enter the plant fer search and rescue operations. (Attempt tc locate missing person (s) by utilizing plant paging system just prior to actually
.. dispatching the search and rescue group (s)) .
' 9.1.1.3 Obtain exposure limits from the Emergency Director. If later search and rescue operations are necessary, the Emergency Director may adjust the radiation exposure limits accordingly. If waiting for Emergency Director approval could endanger personnel, the search and rescue /first aid group leader may decide to remove injured, person.
9.1.1.4 If offsite medical help is necessary, have the ambulance, hospital or physician contacted by using Appendix EP-252-4 Medical Support Groups Phone List. Always state the number of individuals involved, type of injury and if contamination is involved. 9.1.1.5 Notify security so that the offsite medical response group's access to the Restricted Area can be expedited, if necessary. 9.1.1.6 Recall the search and rescue groups when search and rescue ope'.ations are no longer necessary. L.
< <t,~1
. . , _ . , . ~ . _
\ .
EP-252 Rev. 1 l Page 4 of 1: VAW/MF0/rgr 9.1.2 Seatch and Rescue /First Aid Group Leader
' shall:
9.1.2.1 Select volunteers from available personnel to form search and rescue /first aid squads. Each squad shall consist of at least three members; two must be qualified in first aid and one must be a health physics technician. 9.1.2.2 Ensure that each member has the necessary respiratory equipment, radsurvey equipment, anti-contamination clothing , and personal dosimetry. This material can be obtained from emergency survey kits at the OSC or from normal HP stocks. 9.1.2.3 Discuss the situation The withfollowing the Personnel Safety Team Leader. information should be obtained prior to performing search ar.", rescue operations: A. Number of missing persons. B. Name of individuals.
'- C. Last known location of individuals.
t 9,4 D. The job being worked. E. Any significant plant conditions that may affect the search and any special instructions. t 9.1.2.4 Ensure the group is equipped with a first aid kit, or can get one enroute. See attached Appendix EP-252-2 for listing of first aid equipment location in the plant. 9.1.2.5 Coordinate search and rescue /first aid squads to minimize duplication of effort and unnecessary radiation exposure. 9.1.2.6 Direct the groups to the last known location 1 of the missing individual. If necessary, adjacent areas. Ensure expand the search most expeditious tg'tes available are taken rgu 4 to minimize team exposure. 9.1.2.7 Inform the Personnel Saf tey Team Leader of f r the actions of the group and whenever the group locates any missing personnel, and the identity of located personnel.
. g .
i* EP-252 Rev. 1 Page 5 of 12 l' VAW/M?G/:g 9.1.2.8 Determine the extent of the injury and (i direct administration of first aid. 9.1.2.9 Report to the Personnel Safety Team Leads: the extent of the individual's injuries and recommend supplementary medical actions as necessary (i.e. , hospitalization) . Completc Appendix EP 252-3 (if possible) and attach to injured person prior to transporting in l ambulance. I 9.1.2.10 Report to the Personnel Safety Team Leade: when the search and rescue / fir st aid group has finished its task. 9.1.3 Search and Rescue /First Aid Squad Members shall 9.1.3.1 Perform a radiation and contamination survey [ of the person and subsequently the area. i . 9.1.3.2 Transport the injured person to a site first aid facility.if practicable. 9.1.3.3 Perform the following if the injured person f ( is contaminated. ss A. Wear necessary anti-contamination
- clothing if practicable.
IF THE INJURY IS SEVERE, IMMEDIATE MEDICAL TREATMENT IS OF THE HIGHEST PRIORITY AND RADIOLOGICAL CONTROLS API SECONDARY. , B. Administer appropriate first aid, being careful to limit the spread of contamination and limit personal exposure. C. IF INJURY IS NOT SEVERE, LECONTAMINAT!ON SHALL BE ATTEMPTED. D. Prepare the person for transportation by covering the contaminated area with a f protective wrap.' Avoid excessive wrapping to prevent dehydration of the person. f' IF THE INJURED PERSON IS GOING TO BE TRANSPORTED TO AN OFFSITE MEDICAL ( FACILITY, IT MAY NOT BE FEASIBLE TO ('\
%) ' - _ _-_____=________
. 1 .
EP-252 R2v. 1
]
Page 6 of 12
- VAW/P.PG/rgs
)
BRING THE PERSON TO THE FIRST AID ( FACILITY, INSTEAD MOVE THE PERSON TO A
~
SAFE PLACE WHICH IS EASILY ACCESS! ELE FOR THE TRANSFER TO A VEHICLE. E. When transporting the victim to an offsite medical facil,ity, a Health Physics Technician shall accompany the victim to assist the medical staff. 9.1.3.4 Recover any contaminated articles of clothing that may have been removed frc- the person for isotopic analysis. 9.2 Follow-Uo Actions 9.2.1 Search and rescue group members shall: 9.2.1.1 Report results of their actions to the Personnel Safety Team Leader. 9.2.1.2 Follow normal decontamination and disposal procedures when their tasks are complete. 9.2.2 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall: 9.2.2.1 Verify the victim's arrival at the medical 4" , facilities. 9.2.2.2 Inform the Emergency Director of results of search and rescue efforts.
~
9.2.2.3 Bave the Health Physics technician accompanying victim to the hospital, call ~ the Personnel Safety Team Leader when informed by the hospital that his services are no longer needed. With the concurrence of the Personnel Safety Team Leader he may procede to another assignment. 9.2.2.4 Arrange for inventory and restocking of first aid kits, if necessary. 9.2.3 The Emergency Directcr shall: 9.2.3.1 Bave the Medical Dikector and Corporate Communications informed of the identify and condition of the victim (s) . n l . l l 1
EP-252 Rev. 1
' Page 7 of ;;
VAW/ MPG /rgs r
!.t[
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan 10.2 NUREG 0654, Criteria for Preparation and Rev.1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness In
- Suppor t of Nuclear Power Plants, t
e
/
a (s (R U l
*e k.
(O
t e l EP-252-1 Rav. 1 Page B of 12
- VAW/ MPG /rgs
( APPENDIX EP 252-1 Emeroency Exposure Guidelines
- Projected Whole Body Thyroid. Authorired Function Dose Dose By
- 1. Life Saving and Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Emergency **
Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Emergency **
Director
- 3. Protection of Health and Safety of the Publ'.c 5 rem 25 rem Emergency Director
- 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 Emergency Activities limits limits Director
" ( 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station Administra- Adminis-Activities tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A
- Peference: EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis l
i l l 0 - . . e ~ r--
_ - . _ _ _ . . . . . _ . _ . _ . - - ~ - -
& o ,
l EP 252-2 Rev. 1 Page 9 cf 12 VAW/ MPG /rgs [g APPENDIX EP-214-2 1 FIRST-A!D EQUIPMENT LOCATIOMS FIRST AID STRETCHERS KITS ELANET .: Unit 1 RX Encl. Elevator Stairwells Elev. 177' X X >: Elev. 201' X X X Elev. 217' X X X Elev. 239' X X X Elev. 253' X X X Elev. 283' X X X Elev. 313 ' X X X Elev. 351' X X X Elev. 352' X X X Unit 2 RX Encl. Elevator Stairwells Elev. 177' X X X Elev. 201' X X X Elev. 217' X X X
. Elev. 239' X X X Elev. 253' X X X Elev. 283' X X X
.V fi Elev. 3 13 ' X X X Q Elev. 331' X X X Elev. 352' Turbine Encl. Nast & West Stairwells Elev. 200' X Elev. 217' X Elev. 239' X Elev. 269' X Turbine Encl.
Equipment Hatch Elev. 217' X X O ('s
,R
o
. q,
- EP 252-2 Riv. 1 l Page 10 of 12 .
VAW/ MPG /rg s ! t FIRST AID KITS BLANKETS
'8- STRETCHERS Control Enclosure Elevator Stairwells X Elev. 180' X X X
Elev. 200' X X Elev. 217' X '
. X X X
Elev. 239' X X X Elev. 254' X X X Elev. 269' X X X Elev. 289' X X X Elev. 304' X X X Elev. 332' X X Radwaste Encl. North Stairwell X X Elev. 162' X Elev. 191' X X X Elev. 217' X Elev. 237' X X Elev. 257' X Cire. Water Pump Bouse X 220 Switchyard Encl. X 500 Switchyard Encl. X NOTE: 1/2 Mile Rays (Emergency Flashlights) Are Located Just Outside Door To t) nit 2 Side of Main Control Room In Cabinet. O O n t'
0
,A EP 252-3, Rev. 1 f l
Page 11 of 12 VAW/ MPG /rgs k APPENDIX EP 252-3 INJURED PERSONNEL REPORT FORM (PREPARE IN DUPLICATE) Injured Person's Name : Age Badge No. Or Social Security No. Male Female Type and Location of Injury . Radioactive Contamination Yes No Level (, Location l Radiation Exposure Estimate Where Did Injury Occur Prepared by First Aid Group Leader SIGNATURE Group Members If practicable forward original, with the person, to the site first aid facility or hospital as appropriate. o
.. EP 252-4, Rev. 1 l
Page 12 of 1
- VAW/ MPG /rgs APPENDIX EP 252-4 (i MEDICAL SUPPOR"' GROUP PHONE LIS*
( Local Phvsicians Office ,Bome t
-:- . : . . r.
Dr. Charles W. Delp h, y ;.ls
; x.7. .; ? ' j.fD:: . '__i;..*y . . '._)l'_,.
- 4. \'
*J s ec Q,.t ;, . c.i 5
Dr. Arthur Mann n ?L;e *. w Fy.4e.. - Pottstown Memorial Medical center (Contaminated or otherwise) 1600 E. High St. Pottstown, PA 19464 Radiation Manacement Corporation (Serious Contamination /or Exp s.- multiple contaminated persennc;) 1 Dr. Roger E. Linneman Pre fe r red Alternate l r 1l.p,. .;.'j, Q _' : f.ll;'f .Q Q .2.L. r ; * ~ '.<;% w n , - r q . , . . " .*. ..y. .
. , . .+ .- 9. . .' . ,
4 .;,$. ..
-. n - '..
.;,[:1. '(' ,i .' , s . .,.-.' .j,. ~ T.* ;. , g '
*^
.,. :.; ~" ,
?+ & ' N W .' . ? l p s. ..
..~.'.y
~
Ambu 1anee -
'_ l} k .. , f _l -;
Q? '::v; ) -', , _,
' , ,Jv. . .,i *f..v ? -
Goodwill Ambulance Co. :1 '.5" i
,'.\4
,A,. - --
_. s ;,.. , ev j
- Serious Contamination / Exposure ist Whole Body Exposure greater than 25 REM or skin exposure greater than 150 REM or ext.remity exposure greater than 375 REM or contamination causing body contacted reading of greater than 1 MR/HR or suspected or actual inhalation or ingestion of measurable quantities of radioactive material.
O
l 38Y0010370 EP-254 Rev. 1 l o Page 1 of 7 4 /
- V RPG/jev I P
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION
~
k' EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-254 VEHICLE AND EVACUEE CONTROL GROUP 1.0 PURPOSE i The purpose of this procedure is to establish provisions fer i personnel and vehicle monitoring during a Site Evacuation I when contamination may be present. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES I 2.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall coordinate the I needs and actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control l Group with needs and actions of other elements of the i Personnel Safety Team. I 2.2 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader coordinates I the actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group
. I members.
I 2.3 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group members perform the I duties in this procedure at the designated assembly I areas. 3.0 APPENDICES l 3.1 EP-254-1 Vehicle Survey and Decontamination Report 4.0 PREREQUISITES I 4.1 Emergency has been declared per IP-J01 Classificatior. I of Emergencies 1 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT y, VL D a*. (ll y EH dtj l 5.1 Assembly area Kit ( l 5.2 Portable Radio (1/ Team) i ha =t y I h b[ . g M P o[ l ';i.* M'3 dd lL q i l
\
I EP-254 Rev. 1 Page 2 of 7
' VAW/ MPG /jmv
( 6.0 SYMPTOMS gg None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL .
! 7.1 An atmospheric release of radioactive material has I occurred or is occurring, and a Site Evacuation has I been ordered or is underway; OR I 7.2 As directed by the Personnel Safety Team Leader 8.0 PRECAUTIONS l 8.1 Personnel at the offsite assembly area who are I identified as being contaminated should not be I returned to the site for decontamination if a release I is ongoing or expected to occur.
I 8.2 Alpha contamination should be consicered whenever I there is reactor fuel degradation.
! 9.0 PROCEDURE I 9.1 ACTIONS I 9.1.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall:
I 9.1.1.1 verify with the (Interim) Emergency Dire:: I vP.ich offsite Assembly Area is to be used. I 9.1.1.2 Appoint a vehicle and Evacuee Control Grc;; I Leader and direct him to report to the TSC l Personnel entry area. I 9.1.1.3 Brief the Group Leader on the selected I offsite assembly area and other pertiner.: 1 information. I 9.1.2 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader i shall:
- EP-254 Rev. 1 P g? 3 of 7 ;
VAW/ MPG /jmv I 9.1.2.1 Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader in i i the TSC and request that a minimum of tvc I Health Physics Technicians report to the TSC l personnel entry area or to the selected ' I offsite assembly area.
! 9.1.2.2 Contact the PSTL and request that the Fire and Damage Control Group beader provide a I
vehicle and driver in support of the Ver:c;e I I and Evacuee Control Group, with the driver I to report to you in the TSC, if required. 8 9.1.2.3 Upon arrival of HP Technicians, appoint ene I of them as the Squad Leader. I 9.1.2.4 Instruct the team members to implement I section 9.1.3 of this procedure. i 9.1.3 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group shall: I 9.1.3.1 Upon the direction of the Group Leader, I proceed to the designated offsite assembly I area. ___ i 9.1.3.2 Upon arrival at the offsite assembly area, I establish communications with the Vehicle e and Evacuee Control Group Leader in the TSC ortable radio or available telephone, (l) ! ,, I 9.1.3.3 ordinate the set-up of personnel and vehicle contamination monitoring areas with security representatives present. I 9.1.3.4 Obtain an Assembly Area Kit at the offsite I assembly area. I 9.1.3.5 Perform an inventory of the equipment in the i kits by comparing contents with the I inventory lists contained in the respective I - kits. t 9.1.3.6 Perform battery and source checks on all I instrumentation. I 9.1.3.7 Report any missing items or inoperable i equipment to the Group Leader and request i replacements. (Ov 1 l
I 1 I
/ ,
l
- I EP-254 Rev. 1 f Page 4 of 7 ,
i
. VAW/ MPG /jav t
l PRIORITY SHOULD BE GIVEN TO THE MONITORING OF h l PERSONNEL. VEHICLE MONITORING, IF NECESSARY, SHOL'LD ( ONLY BE PERFORMED WHEN PERSONNEL MONITORING MAS BEEN l f COMPLETED. I 9.1.3.8 Perform whole body frisk of each individual I in accordance with HP-817, Personnel l Contamination Monitoring.. I 9.1.3.9 If individuals are found to be contaminated, I decontaminate using the techniques described I in HP-818, Personnel Decontamination, and I complete the documentation described I therein. I 9.1.3.10 If any individual cannot be decontaminated I below the release limits specified in HP-l 818, contact the Vehicle and Evacuee Control l Group Leader in the TSC for further i instructions. l . 9.1.3.11 Perform Vehicle surveys in accordance with I the following procedure. I a. Check that the survey instrument is I operable and that the audible accessory I is turned on and operating. () I i
- b. Prior to starting the survey, determine the background radiation in the area.
1 If the background greater than 300 cpm i as determined with an E140N with HP-l 210/HP-260 probe or equivalent, the i vehicle or equipment must be moved to I another area where the background is I less than 300 cpm. I c. Hold the instrument probe approximately l 1 (one) inch from the surface and move I it slowly over the surface with I particular attention to horizontal I surfaces and areas that would most I likely come in contact with I contamination, e.g., tires, door I handles, etc. I d. If there is any increase in audible I response,'stop moving the probe, allow I the meter response to stabilize and I determine the magnitude and size of the I contaminated area. k
/~
t (e>3 4 e -
7 { . . I' EP-254 Rev. 1 i
- Page 5 of 7 VAW/ MPG /jmv 6
g I e. Survey the accessible interior surfaces
, I of the vehicle or equipment in a similar f manner. Again, give special attention I to those areas most likely to be i contaminated, e.g., steering wheel, I brake pedal, drivers's seat, etc.
i I f. If contamination levels are less thar. I the 100 cpm as determined by an E140N I equipped with an HP-210 or HP-260 prebe I or equivalent, release the vehicle or i equipment by checking the appropriate I block on the Report and giving a copy te I the driver. I' g. If the vehicle is contaminated, record I . readings on the Vehicle Survey and I Decontamination Report (Appendix EP-254-l 1) and note contaminated areas and I levels on the illustration sheet. I 9.1.3.12 Perform vehicle decontamination in I accordance with EP-255, beginning with I 9.1.2.7. f I DECONTAMINATION OF VEHICLES SHALL BE SECOND IN l PRIORITY TO DECONTAMINATION OF PERSONNEL AND IMPOUNDING OF THE VEHICLES f (/r[ l I 9.1.3.13 If any vehicle cannot be decontaminated I below the release limits, contact the i Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader in i I the TSC for further instructions. E 9.1.3.14 Remain on-station until released by the I l Group Leader. 9.2 FOLLOW-UP 1 9.2.1 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader I shall: 1 9.2.1.1 When all personnel and vehicles have been I monitored, and the team is no longer needed I for decontamination, instruct them to I monitor themselves,.their equipment and I vehicle, and return to the TSC, or to the l EOF if the TSC is inaccessable. I 9.2.1.2 Upon return of the group, collect personnel ! I and vehicle survey and decontamination I l records.
./
.)
_.x _-___L__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
1 I EP-254 Rev. 1 g Page 6 of 7 f VAW/ MPG /jmv l
/ I 9.2.1.3 Transfer personnel survey and
\ l decontamination records to the Dosimetry, l Bioassay and Respiratory Protection Group 1 Leader for any needed exposure evaluations I and record retention.
I 9.2.2 vehicle and Evacuee Control Group shall: 1 9.2.2.1 Upon release, return with your equipment te I the TSC or other location as directed. I 9.2.2.2 Return all survey and decontamination I records to the Vehicle and Evacuee Contrc; I Group Leader.
10.0 REFERENCES
I 10.1 EP-255 - Vehicle Decontamination i 10.2 EP-305 - Site Evacuation i 10.3 HP-817 - Personnel Contamination Monitoring
, i 10.4 HP-818 - Personnel Decontamination /"N (j l 10.5 EP-101 - Classification of Emergencies v
6
. - - -+--
. EP-254 Rev. I n
Page 7 of 7 VDIICLE SURVEY AND DECONTAMINATION REPORT U n.es s N m. .f 0** Phone i I ( I Worn ( , e.,n , sir e ve, >=.. tiome zie ba;p M . setw.msntY nE3 ULT 5 hetrwwwtu e D.o Thn $ww.y.d by Aa.a. No. 5/N Pr.h.Typ.
@h S g3
.1-z - J f...;N s t_
_p _
$ f@ @
_ ca.. w =i e#w u r, si _ c.w w.ewo e,.e.u o.ni.e seww. P0574ECONTAAepMDON s#WEY futsuLT5 c .. _ . . _ ; s,. Penn. O.e. Yta. C__ :_._ :e n Anothed U e p ic ae w-rien W m.mme. w trwn n, u e 0.= Th ne. del No. 5/N Pr.h.Typ. j Fall.*w Aeten Reede.e _Non. Sp iss Feat noSp sfyh Signature i I t RETURN COMPLETED FORMS TO VDlICLE AND'EVAdU55' GROUP LEADER t l
* $= JU7UU/VMUU
[ EP-255 Rev. 1 .(. Page 1 cf f VAU/!3G/rgr V 3 [ PEILADELPEIA ELECTEIC COMPANY ' 6ll 8 LIMERICK GENERATING S.*ATION
. EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLE!!EN'"ING PROCEDURE EP-255 VEHICLE DECONTAMINATION
- 1.0 PUFJOSE I
The purpose of this procedure is to establish provisions fer decontamination of vehicles evacuated from the site to of fsite assembly areas or leaving the site in support of the emergency response. 2.0 RES PO!!SIBILITIES 2.1 Personnel Safety Team Leader shall coordinate the needs and actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Contrcl Group with needs and actions of other groups of the Personnel Safety Teaq. 2.2 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader shall coordinate the actions of the Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group members. 2.3 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group shall perform the duties in this procedure. 2.4 Vehicle Decontamination Group memberr shall perfort decontamination in accordance with this procedure. 3.0 APPENDICES
] None 4.0 PREREOUISITES CONTROLLED 4.1 Vehicle decontamination activitie inter fe re with other emergency activitlen y hb (O
O
---,,,,,4 ,,,,-----,.,n-- - -
, --e.--. -,-e-- ,-c-.,n-,-,----,-.,,~-_-n.. -
...,,_,,s-, - - , . - - - - - - ,.-n, -
-s . .
1 EP-255 R2v. 1 Page 2 of C .s VAW/!:PG/rgs N. 5.0 SPECIAL EOUIPMENT { 5.1 Assembly Area Kit (if at assembly area) l 5.2 Vehicle Decontamination Kit (if at Batch Plant)
] 5.3 Portable Radio (1/ Team) ,.
6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure shall be implemented whenever a vehicle has been identified to be contaminated (a >100 cpm above background as determined with an E-140N equipped with an RP-210/RP-260 probe or equivalent) and the vehicle is authorized by the Energency Director or by procedures for release to the owner or for emergency use. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS . 8.1 Decontamination of vehicles shall be second in priority to decontamination of personnel and impounding of the vehicles. 8.2 Alpha contamination should be considered whenever
- there is reactor fuel' degradation.
8.3 Dry methods of decontamination shall be the method of choice. First priority of decontamination shall be to those vehicles needed to support the emergency re,sponse Lar which dry methods will be effective. i l 0 9 O
Il I EP-255 Rev. 1 ; l Page 3 of C VAW/P.PG/rer 1 ) '
%/
'l ,
9.0 P'AOCEDURE 9.1 Actions
! 9.1.1 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader l
shall: 9.1.1.1 Determine manpower needs'and availability based on the number of vehicles to be decontaminated and their location and obtai . Personnel Safety Team Leader's concurrence. 9.1.1.2 Select one or both of the following decontamination areas: Off site Assembly Area for evacuee vehicles (Limerick Airport or Cromby Station) l Batch Plant for onsite vehicles 9.1.1.3 If the Batch Plant is to be used for vehicle decontamination: Contact the Personnel Safety Team Leader in l the TSC and request that a Health Physics l Technician be dispatched to the TSC; Contact the PSTL and request that the Fire and Damage Team Leader provide for the dispatch of personnel with vehicle to the TSC. 9.1.1.4 Upon arrival of HP Technician (s), appoint a Group Leader. , 9.1.1.5 Instruct the group members to implement section 9.1.3 of this procedure. 9.1.2 Vehicle Decontamination Team - Batch Plant shall: 9.1.2.1 Obtain a vehicle Decontamination Kit from the TSC Emergency Equipment Storage Closet. 9.1.2.2 Perform an inventory of the equipment in the kits by comparing. contents with the inventory lists contained in the respective kits, 9.1.2.3 Perform battery and source checks on all , (, f instrumentation. , i O
l EP-255 Rev. 1 I Page 4 of (
- e VAW/ MPG /rgs
<j 9.1.2.4 Report any missing items or inoperable s equipment to the Group Leader.
9.1.2.5 Inform Group Leader when ready to depart for the Batch Plant. 9.1.2.6 Upon the direction of the Group Leader, proceed to the designated
- decontamination area.
IF VEHICLE DECONTAMINATION IS TO BE PERFORMED AT THE ASSEMBLY AREA, START W:TH 9.1.2.7 (PER EP-254)
] 9.1.2.7 Upon arrival at the decontamination areat
- a. Set up a holding area for vehicles that cannot be decontaminated after several attempts.
- b. Set up a designated clean area for checking vehicles once decontamination is completed.
9.1.2.8 Decontaminate vehicles using the following
; techniques:
i a. Wipe down hard, smooth surfaces with dry masslinn cloth. I b. Vacuum dry, irregular porus surfaces.
- c. Wipe down vehicle with damp masslinn cloth.
USE WATER SPARINGLY AND ONLY WITH APPROVAL OF THE PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM LEADER. 9.1.2.9 Af ter the initial decontamination, the Health Physics Technician shall resurvey the vehicle per EP-254 and record post-decontamination survey results on the copy of Vehicle Survey and Decontamination Repor t. (EP-254-1) accompanying the vehicle. 9.1.2.10 Vehicles meeting the release criteria of EP-254 may be released to the owner, if pre sent. If owner is not present, move l vehicle to clean holding area. f ( b
EF-255 R2v. 1 l Pace 5 of ( l VAA/!'PG/rge f.1.2.11 If vehicle is still contaminated, re urn it { to the contaminated holding area for further decontamination at a later time. 9.1.2.12 When decontamination operations are complete, return completed forms te the Vehicle and Evacuee Contrgl Group Leader in the TSC. 9.2 Fellow-Up
! 9.2.1 Vehicle Decontamination Team shall:
9.2.1.1 When all vehicles have been decontaminated and the team is no longer needed, monitor the area, yourselves, your equipment and vehicle, and post any areas in accordance with HP-215. 9.2.1.2 Deliver contaminated rags and other materials to the radwaste facility. 9.2.1.3 Return to the TSC, or to the EDT if the TSC is inaccessable. 9.2.1.4 Upon return to the TSC, deliver Vehicle
/'.; h Survey and Decontamination Reports to the
(_ T l Group Leader. 9.2.1.5 Transfer personnel survey and decontamination records to the Dosimetry, Bionssay and Respiratory Protection Groep Leader for any needed exposure evaluations and record maintenance. 9.2.2 Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader shall: 9.2.2.1 Using completed vehicle Survey and Decontamination Reports (EP-254-1), contact owners and inform them where and when they may pick up their vehicle. 9.2.2.2 Retain all survey and decontsmination records. 6 pO
': ":. 2 .w.-.: ~ ...:. u u. = : 7 ; - :. =a: -- -- -- -- - - ' - - - - - - - -
< l EP-255 P.ev. 1 Page C of f~
. VAW/ MPG /rg:
i 9 4 ,e . 10.0' P,""z ". P,"". . ", ." S ' x [ 10.1' EP-254 - Vehicle and Evacuee Control Group 4 l^ 10.3 HP-215 - Posting of Radiologically Controlled Areas T 7 e I t 9 a J h l. 9 I-1 I .i r I h 4 h 4 . T r
) %
l 1(L
- i l.
' l 1
- I i
[ 4 i i ; 4 I i 1 t - r I
^
n 1 e !O l 5 i 1
't i
- # ,- ,-# . - . e- ..-me.,+,.---->wm--+=. - - . - - - _ _, . ,_ _ . _ _ . - , n, _v-
j 3040090410 EP-2sc Rev. . l I
-I Page 1 ef 5 l
VA G / f r.v 7 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
'$AY '
LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-260 FIRE AND DAMAGE TEAM ACTIVATION l 1.0 PURPOSE I The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines fer i the actions required to activate the Fire and Damage Tear., and the Fire Fighting Group. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES l 2.1 The Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman shall assume I the role of Int.erim Fire and Damage Team Leader and perform the necessary steps in this procedure. I 2.2 The Engineer - Maintenance or designated alternate i shall assume the role of Fire and Damage Team Leader,
/ relieve the Interim Team Leader, and perform the
( necessary steps in this procedure. I 2.3 A Shift supervisor shall assume'the role of the Fire l Fighting Group Leader and combat the fire in accordance with the Limerick Generating Station (LGS) l Fire Fighting Procedures. 3.0 APPENDICES 3.1 EP-260-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines 4.0 PREREQUISITES None 5.0 ,SPECIAL EQti!PMENT m m wu e (O l l l l
~ . - - - .-. -. - . . . - - _ _ . - _ _ _ _
i . . ; i EP-26C Rev. '. I Pace 2 of E VA5/ MPG /jt. [ l
, 7.C ACTION LEVEL
( l 7.1 The Fire and Damage Team vill be activated whenever
- i. the (Interim) Emergency Director deems their servi:es necessary.
8.0 PRECAUTIONS
- 8.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited :: the adLinistrative guide levels in Appendix EP-260-1 9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 ACTIONS I 9.1.1 The Shift Supervisor shall:
1 9.1.1.1 Report to scene of fire or as otherwise I directed. I 9.1.1.2 Assume role of Fire Fighting Group Leader,
, I 9.1.1.3 Direct fire fighting activities in p., I accordance with the LGS Fire Fighting l Procedures.
I 9.1.1.4 Periodically inform the Control Room on i status of the fire. I REPORTS SHOULD BE MADE ABOUT EVERY 15 MINUTES. I 9.1.1.5 Request additional personnel and or I equiptent as necessary from (Interim) Fire I and Damage Team Leader. I 9.1.1.6 Request Health Physics personnel as necessary. l 9.1.1.7 Inform group members on plant status and I significant radiological problems. I 9.1.2 The Maintenance Shift Assistant Foreman I shallt [v
EP-26: Rev. ; 1 Page 3 of 5
. l
' VAW/ MPG / c -
. l ,
~~ - l 9.1.2.1 Report to the Control Room or as othervise l
( l directed.
-)
'# L 9.1.2.2 Assume the role of the Interim Fire and 1 Damage Team Leader.
I AT ANY TIME DURING THIS PROCEDURE THE l INTERIM FIRE AND DAMAGE TEAM LEADER PJ.Y EI I RELIEVED BY THE FIRE AND DAMAGE TEAM *.,EALIF., I 9.1.2.3 Assist the Fire Fighting Group in con.batin; I the fire with necessary personnel and i equipment. I 9.1.2.4 If damage repair group is needed, notify the I supervisor, Maintenance or designated I alternate to activate the Damage Repair i Group in accordance with EP-261. I 9.1.2.5 Reep control Room and (Interim) Emergen:y I Director informed of Fire and Damage Tea: I status. I 9.1.2.6 Request additional personnel as necessary I using EP-276, Fire and Damage Team Phone
. ! List.
- 9.2 FOLLOW UP C.
I 9.2.1 Fire and Damage Team Leader shallt ( , I 9.2.1.1 Report to TSC or as otherwise directed.
! 9.2.1.2 Communicate and discuss situation with I
(Interim) Energency Director and with l Interim Fire and Damage Team Leader. I 9.2.1.3 Relieve the Interim Team Leader when fully cognizant of the situation. 1 ENSURE THAT GROUP LEADERS ARE INFORMED OT l NEW TEAM LEADER AND COMMAND LOCATION. I 9.2.1.4 Activate the Fire Fighting Group by directing the shift Supervisor to implement section 9.1.1.1 of this procedure (if necessary). - l 9.2.1.5 Activate the Damage Repair Group (if necessary) as follows: ) (. > O e
- M___ ,-..--,,,-.--..,,,,--,--.-..-,,.,......---*,y-..--e. - - - - -
---.-,~.,._--m-.,--m.-,-_-w-,,,.--.v.4 y - ,.,,,p,....,.r. .*.,.w-mew-
o , _ l EP-260 Rev. 1 I Page 4 cf E / I VAa'/ MPG / j mv l Notify the Supervisor, Maintenance or ( 1 designated alternate to activate the Damage 3 Repair Group in accordance with EP-261, Damage Repair Group. I 9.2.1.6 Update (Interim) Emergency Director or. status of team activities. I In cases of fire, make up'date report a: least every 15 minutes. I 9.2.1.7 Request additional site personnel and I equipment from (Interim) Emergency Dire: or as required. 9.2.1.8 Requests outside fire assistance from the I (Interim) Emergency Director as required. I 9.2.1.9 Re-assess the situation periodically and I make appropriate reports and adjustments. i 9.2.1.10 Have personnel radiation exposures mor.itored and request Emergency Exposure authorization I from the (Interim) Emergency Director as f necessary. f'-}' ( l 9.2.1.11 Debrief all involved participants to complete an accurate report when team activities have been completed. 10.0 References 10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency plan l 10.2 SE Fire on-site - General Fire Fighting Procedure 10.3 EP-261 - Damage Repair Group. I 10.4 EP-276 - Fire and Damage Team Phone List 9 . e
EP-260, Rev. 1 l I Page 5 of 5 l
- l. VAW/ MPG /jmv 1 APPENDIX EP-260-1 i Emercency Exposure Guidelines Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose ,
Bv
- 1. Life Saving and 1 Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem (Interim)
Eme rg ency" Director
- 2. Operation of Equipment to Mitigate an l Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem (Interim)
Er.is rgency*
- Dir>ctor
- 3. Protection of Health I and Safety of the Public 5 rem 25 rem ( I n t e .-im) saargency**
Director I 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 (Interim) ff;y / Activities limits limits Emergency ( / x Director
- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Stafion Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative lines Guide-lines N/A
- References EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** Such exposure shall be on a voluntary basis -
( ' Q.)
3840090420 EP-2tl, R2v. I Page 1 ef f vat:
- G/ g:
#?) .a't / 3 k
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC CD::PA :Y LIMERICK GENERATING STATIO!; E!TRCENCY PLAN IMPLEMEN"ING PROCEDUPI EP-261 DAftAGE REPAIP. GROUP 1.0 P"P. Post The purpose of this procedure is to provide guideliner fe: the actions of the Damage Repair Group. 2.0 RES PO!!SIBILITIES 2.1 The (Interim) Fire and Damage Team Leader shall perform the necessary steps in this procedure.
' 2.2 The Supervisor, Maintenance or designated alternate l shall assume the role of the Damage Repair Group Leader when directed and per form the necessary steps in this procedure.
( ' t<'Q 3.0 A7PENDICE: 3.1 EP-261-1 Emergency Exposure Guidelines 4.0 PPIPIOUISITES None 5.C SPE07 AL EQUIPPTirr Hone 6.0 SYMPTOMS COPY Hone (O l l l
J* EP-2(1, R;v. 1 I Page 2 of !
# VAU/".P G/ r g '.
i , 9.0 A07: 0" m'ri ( The Damage Repair Group shall be activated whenever
.1 I the (Interim) Emergency Director or (Interim) Tire and Damage Team Leader deems their services necessary.
E.c P nr 0At*T! o"s t.1 Planned radiation exposures should be limited to the administrative guide levels in Appendix EP-2(1-1 i Emergency Exposure Guidelines. 8.2 continuous coverage by Health Physics Technician may substitute for the Radiation Work Permit. 9.0 PPOCEDURE
! 9.1 ACTIOMS l 9.1.1 (Interim) Fire and Damage Team Leader shall 9.1.1.1 Notify the Supervisor, Maintenance or
- designated alternate to activate the Damage Repair Croup using EP-276, Fire and Damage Team Phone List.
9.1.1.2 Direct and coordinate emergency repair
, operations as necessary.
9.1.1.3 Provide the Damage Repair Croup with periodic plant status changes including , significant radiation and contamination problems which may affect the functions of l the group. 1
- ! 9.1.1.4 Periodically update the (Interim) Emergency Director of the status of the repair work.
Ensure that the plant status board in the TSC is updated as necessary. 9.1.1. 5 Provide additional personnel support if necessary. Use EP-276 Fire and Damage Tear Phone List for additional qualified maintenance personnel. f~ C( '_ O
EP-2(1. R:v.
!. Page 3 of !
- t. VAW/!'PG/rr .
e ., I 9.1.2 Damage Repair Group Leader shall: k Repor t to the maintenance of fice or as
) 9.1.2.1' i otherwise directed.
9.1.2.2 Assemble the Damage Repair Group from available auxiliary operators. Call in additional members using EP-27f, Tire and
- Damage Control Team Phone List. Contact tBt Plant Survey Group Leader for a Pre-Entry Evaluation and !!P coverage.
9.1.2.3 Brief the group members on the situation an' explain the actions that need to be performed. 9.1.2.4 Obtain necessary keys for the group. 9.1.2.5 Review applicable maintenance procedures anf advise group members. 9.1.2.6 Provide information to the grovp on equipment and supplies. 9.1.2.7 Request system blocking as needed from the OSC Coordinator. s ) 9.1.2.8 If necessary, request additional personnel or equipment f rom the '(Interim) Fire and Damage Team Leader. 9.1.2.9 Periodically update the (Interim) rire an' Damage Team Leader of the status of the repair work. 9.1.3 Damage Repair Group Members shall
, 9.1.3.1 Re por t to the maintenance of fice or as otierwise directed.
l 9.1.3.2 Follow the directions of the group leader. l 9.1.3.3 Assemble necessary equipent (i.e. , tools, parts, etc. for the pending operations) fror locations on or off-site designated by the Damage Repair Group. Leader. The erations Sup prt Center (on.269' elevation @ Turbine Enclosure) should be contacted for radiation monitoring equipment needed to support the repair ef for t. k. o
i i
*
- EP-261, Rev. 1 l Page 4 of 5 I- I VAW/F.PG/rgs l
i 4 m. A 9.1.3.4 Reep the Damage Repair Group Leader updated G%(_) as to current status of emergency repair (' efforts. 9.1.3.5 The HP Technician should obtain the necessary equipment from the OSC. When the group is conducting operations, the EP Technician shall review the Emergency Radiation Work Permit (ERWP) in accordance with EP-401, Entry for Emergency Repair and Operations. l 9.2.1 Damage Repair Group Leader shall: 9.2.1.1 Conduct a debriefing with the group members and provide the information to Fire and Damage Teem Leader.
10.0 REFERENCES
10.1 Limerick Generating Station Emergency Plan l 10.2 EP-260 - Fire and Damage Team Activation i 10.3 EP-401 - Entry for Emergency Repair, Operations, and Search and Rescue,
,,,(,).
'q l 10.4 EP-276 - Fire and Damage Team Phone List 10.5 NUREG 0654 - Criteria for Preparation and
~
Rev. 1 Evaluation of Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Suppor t of , Nuclear Power Plants.
* > +
EP-261, Rrv. 1 l, Page 5 of 5 VAW/ MPG /rgs W%r _,2~N. ' APPENDIX EP-261-1
'N_ I EMERGENCY EXPOSURE GUIDELINES Projected Whole Body Thyroid Authorized Function Dose Dose ,- By I 1. Life Saving and (Interim)
Reduction of Injury 75 rem
- 375 rem Emergency **
Director l 2. Operation of Equipment (Interim) ) to Mitigate an Emergency ** Emergency 25 rem
- 125 rem Director (
- 3. Protection of Health (Interim) and Safety of the Public- 5 rem 25 rem Emergency **
Director l 4. Other Emergency 10 CFR 20 10 CFR 20 (Interim) l Activities limits limits Emergency l Director , i (- 5. Re-entry / Recovery Station Station i Activities Administra- Adminis-tive Guide- trative (. c . N lines Guide-i
%- i lines. N/A
- References EPA-520/1-75-001 Table 2.1
** ruch exposure shall be on a voluntary basis
- l 9
O _ l O
)
i
, 3840090430 l EP-272 Rev, ;
4 s Page 1 ef E s VAV a PHILADELPHI'A ELECTRIC COMPANY ( LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-272 PH!LADELPHIA ELEC"'RIC COMPANY OFFICIALS 1.O PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to supply information te contact Philadelphia Electric Company officials. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 A communicator shall contact the required Philadelphia Electric Company officials when directed by the Emergency Director or the Site Emergency Coordinator. g, 3.0 APPENDICES ( None 4.0 PREREQUISITES None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 6.0 SYMPTOMS CONTROLLE f None 3 7.O ACTION LEVEL W I l )' h' :' Ihibn * .i ( l 7.1 This procedure may be used when Philadelphia Electric Company officials are to be contacted. hb b 7#
%' D9'f.
/F jdi d. l A!3G o a)dLdr Af p 13i" [6 ]j)A L
, eg . , , , , .., s .,&. f. n. s e.- .. , s s , w3..- .: - c- -a t._ - .e .- -
s.- ..
,c..,- .. . , , . . - *, ._ - .
EF-:~2 R e ', .
- Pace : cf :
' ' A k T'3 3 ' ' _
t {} E.: P RI C A"TI CN5 4
\
3 None i r
; 9.C P R OC ED'J RI
+'
$ 9.1 Actions As necessary, the following peep'e 9.1.1 - w--- re called by the communicator.
4 1 1
$ f I ! Sr. V. P. Nuclear Home Phone Centrer I
V. S. Doyer Federal / State Government Liaison V. P. Corocr ate Commun ica tions 1 C. Brenner Alternate Federal / State Government Liaison l Medical Director i K. T. Bu sh ion , MD f Emergency Medical Director =
! Medical Dispensary Phv sic ian I A. J. Cincotta, MD Alternate Emergency Medical - Director Vice President, Elect. Production I S. L. Daltroff Emergency Support Officer Ma n a c e r , Electric Production-Nuclear M. J. Cooney Alterna te s ietgency Suppor t O f f ice r ~
l
EF-2'2 Rev. . Pace 2 : : .
\, w, . ,a. ,.: w. . =
{Q' - Home Phone Certrc> n l 1/ s Supe r int end en : - Nuclear .: -# ;i 2 T
?'
f Geheretior Divisio.- -
.T
+ : ^.3 4
.'
- Zf.._'Y 5. ' LF. f/ .
.1. 5 .c 2,..
S.yr.- . y. 3 ,- _ . n
- y %. .- #-... . m . . , , ;.. . ,.;--
i
. . %. .y. - .s .-g% ..
*3 .g.g.
- r. -W. .. . . e >/* -9 .'.
- h . 'i.i W. Ullrich K' ,,." W, , n.
Site Emercen:V Coordinator i[3-
.x /. . tJ. a. .f b . 4. , n . .".,, -^ f 9 '.i.' ,.s.2N, 3.1 y.t
- - , ;. i - . . .-
- w,.: .. ,
. -e. .
- :- . h. . . -. +..+.o~,,
' b ., ; ?
, is , .' ; .
'....g,*,. : l. q ;'_ s . -
i Superintendent - Nuclear . .S .... l);. .[. ' .. 1.'. - c;
. , I ' .' ~I 1 1 M. ._ ,' s. J'\ . 7 Q7;. ,
l- Services .s. . : : . . ..# :-.v.s ,, .~. ~ -67,<'<. e .. :. .f.. ..
, 'v 6 n_
.. . - . . - + .-%,. . ., w.
.,4- .
.,s ,. +;. 4.. .: ,
y y
. ,-- . f j -
- r. . p
. . . ,ogue u
- >: 3
..m,......' ..
, , o. . r c. -5. , .,,
~ ::q - 4 .4 J. 3 !
3 . . . I Alternate Site i ,..: - 1 ; ; . s. V " ;. .T- > - Energency Coo rd ina tor 's ?;J V - e . l. :. R l
. .,. -' .p .
..... . ..; .:5:.4.~. :. .n
' *., . . 3.~ " . .: :'l,,
k.._..
.. ;. .,-. :... . ., a.; . -. n,r
.c, ..~._%.,.:..,,. .. ,
S merintendent - Peach Bottom N:J-l^-
<s .
T , .. ', : .., ,- , '.~T
. ~ ? .j......,s.... f y ,.0.'..'",jg
.- *. .m . . . - ...(.*
da. . . -
- a. -
-n- .m ~ . )- ,g. ".s. 3 0.'..' ' ! - lA l E. S. Fleischmann II .- . , i :
Alte nate Site Emergency A.,- Wi' s, A L. ? 4 i 'h l Coo rd ina to: <,[i .. :.j .
; I 1 O^7 : .
t. ( ' ~ *...'v, 79 " , -' .j -,N,
- g. (
. '.c. - 4*-s t +
j ,,,, _- -S".."','- g,
,,A
,_.%,
- j 4 y
.'3..*-.
.. .e .. .. .
i 2 & .r -
. . . . .- .,.-3:} : W-' ,.
i'i ce-P r e s id en t - Tll
-. ? ?
- . S-(^ '
C ' 1. '
.'.1 .11Jj.; -
. .f . .
s'<.e., ,'.7 ' Q' gO.%.h..' . .y
+ - - -
Er.c inee r ine & Re se a r ch De pa r tmen t n Y; % :,: i 3.; ; . % - '.l' .. i ?. S. Kemper Corpor ate Spoke sman
).k ' I -
?n >- . . . , .
. k.. g
{s '-h[ 4 e W m. ' , . .; 7.. . ' S .
. -Q "-
'.h Q
.]~. $, v :1 :4. ._.:.
.. ' [. ' . {
J.. g
, ' ".#.~j, ,. . ...3. - y.';
t ,. ,, . .
- s. . > . . a, ..s.: .. _. . . ,
,
- m, CPief Mechanical Encineer N...i.I
- 3. - ; --
,- i
.t : c ..-u- .'
/
- ;. ;' f . ,p
- . e.
'3 L .wer, n e, i,. y ...: .
E. C. Kistne r e
' ..' r a : : U+..- ..-1...
p,'p .e.. De s ig n & Construction .,( - y/; 7 - 7, '_ ; 2 - g' ' . . , . . . c. s. s.
+ i-/c.
o - Support Officer s.g,: Y . tc 'e. .,,..; -
., ~ :, ..'>. ... c . 3.(W~,'c_ _
} N,f n, *-,' _, . , . . . . . . - ..,g.,. ,. ,.
- % , . ,r -Q
- 7. L . , . :
n.
. e
...D..,.."..l4..?.,
Ch ie f Electrical Enc ineer ;jM?.x) f. .: . .,p .. :.91 s.... .- ..n. . < .
... s .
'z;c.j'y.'.- .'.c-C. N. DeCowsky . .. ./ .] < . _ <:n> V.;
A l t e rn a t e De s ig n Con s t r u c t i. on :s s.}' .' '.J.".a. J'c!.' J ' T e . .
'i 1 .,
-, a . 4 a
- ce - s s
. g.. . s. .
- i. Suppor t Officer :y;i.c m 7. 3...s.C . , ,..-
,s 13 .,. , r. , . . ~ .
<.i- . - .
. .m ,
.... s.. - ,. ;. , . .
- c. 8 s. s
- m. . ,. , ,. . . , . .
-; ~ . n .,: .. . : _
,. ~: , _ ., . . . .
l Assistant Manager - Energy ;> . b ; - p .i . y .
;(:. !; V" .k'}
1 n f or mat ion a nd Ed . f.>. ~ . g/f. . ; l.~4 ;, ';c[b ?. y. . ,l.!: $ , ' . c . ~~
- g. .. '. . T.>'
, ir . : .<*. i. .
v a- :'_ + y ,
. %:l y y , . , .
l M. D. McCornick M e alr . [.-;b ,'," Y j " k,%g
' 5'. ; . : }%(..:'.n.. % "- l * " ~ -
. '..-k-k 3 , .[.';
.' EOF Lisson - Corporate M.9 j - ' ' . .
M% b y: >: Coc=un ic a tions (9
c.v .c .: :w ry., '.x. , y m .,,.,.7,
; . -y:w. .v v. ; y . n . ; yny; , : = ' . ' ,; . ,. .-s - -
_d . " -, , , e -. EP-2 ; Re, _ Page 4 ef 9
. N.r#, . . 3, ss ,:' ,ai , _ .. . . - .
9 O , F o r.e Phone ^er!!?Y Manacer - Put1i: 'n f cr: ation .
-. .. . . . . .. l I k. b 4,TNW;.G ,.sg ' 3;*; ,..e. l } **
..? .. -
. x m4. ,} , i t, .
E. L. Earper ...--
- 1. D C. a .? .* -e# %. . ; .> .. : -.v..H *-
l ?s- y: w Ever;ency News Certer Coordinator i ~ - :. . t.1 . : ;or+: --:&, .* >x f 1 r-c;h,p&
," ' . , C'" . r.v 11 .' * '
. ' f 'Op,. . . .-l *:,. i 8 , fg h, ', y*
,.f ..
I 2
,Q ::6 , ' ' . *: '.-L,.
; t _m.
Q, * ... -l* %.;. . \ . .'.. , %. % : -
- y% % *, -
f.'sw'- Man a c e r of Claits Securitv ..
< % % ..: .~ F;' '" ' d .f 2 ' ,l'% .? ',' . ? V, i. Q .
.- - -1 . . .
- a. .
s., - u w . ..: .; - %, ..
.3 f 1 -
u o -, ,s m .~.. (...:..- ,. ;;s.: - , 3. c.
.. .n . m ,.x>
w*. . . .
. . . . , ... ~..,s, .+ ; . . .g, -
. m < v.'. . -,,
l Emergene) Security Officer ...,...
. ;~ ,( -;,
; ., . r; ,f*x t
-i . ~M.~
n, ' , ,c. c.s~ +. - . y .- w.t .. '
- q ;- ,-; 4. :
m 6 lg& .-;...... ?f. v
- g. % ,. .j .- , . , ..+: 3(.. '_'. . q _,. g b.
! 's .
8-. Director of Secu ritv S .,,9 , .a .
-p .,t . ...s. ....
M...Pc g y4x. '., +.s d,%. e.QN ,5. . # i ' -)p.4
. ;** : Q ,+._ ..
-.Ay, f
- 9. A %,.
[y, ,_f,, 1 F. J. Deneen ' 3 , ,':*-. '. iw
;n s
+ , ;.'
Alte rnate Er.ngency Security ( M.. .I.] [s l-? :- .(. l. 9. .l. f " .1/ ? f t s
.s w
.i.
i l Office: dec. . w. .?.- .?..
.g :%l . : -i ; 4L.,
- 4. ? . ^,*.
T4
.,... i . 2.;# .
.'; ' W,l . ~ ~ :7.
J , ,O # . '. - .[?, . f
..k. ..'. :s .. -,;.~2 ,.r ' -
7
. + ':.~-
Encineer in Charce Chemistry Section
;..id , , .. _". ;N ..
.. M.
.....r..
.z' T ' .
T
= - ~ .i,C...'.
r
. c '.'.--' '
i E. Ass en he ime r O. . .. . _
; ./. ./.' .". J
,'.: . :; % 4 . v. _ 7' . .2s,-- ., ~
m,; x .w s 1 s. -~. . .. - pA. . .a,z , .e. N . ,y, J .. s . ,. qs , ;. -
. . . n .7., J . ., . .
( 6.:,- . .:
.- . ....,a...
-- . v. .w .
$$ . Y . '_+. ~W'...
~
2ls fy " 4.%*
.'2 .1.[,.; . ' ./ , . ' ' . .T9 ~."' ;, .
Gene:al Suoerintendent of Maintenance ki W. *: ::.y ^4
'.: ';- , :.s....;p%'
= ..Y.'.,, Y..O M. J. McCormick a. ~ .. >-
Maintenance Coordinator 5:x'c, j: "a .g,. 7 .l d . m. ^'- ' . 'y1. '
. J ',
y'k.M , . T1,,. '. #. ' ' ' H. ' .
; e.-
~ ..ag;
..c. ..J.:-I E.g.;
s . m
,.,' *+%,*
3? ...\.( - : . . , ;'
.) , 1,3 .. l'. M ; ? - ' . A ( D ,(
-- v. p a - -
*~-
Man 8 CJ e r , .7.,.; -s -
- [s ,g Transmission & Distribution
{. ';4 -
, i3 :
- {'1 . ; k (. .
w - c3-?.'" 4 , {' :g. g.: . ..
. f',, n* - J
-' .! -- *. v-~
. .. E ' q. O}. :[' .
, F, '.V . !
- A. G. Mik a lau sk a s -
. - g.:. - - i T. & D. Support Coordinator g# g.y;4f c.?,13 ' . % 4, 5 , .S 7. , g , [ ' s':
+.
,.. o, e. . ,. .
.* . ..1, 3. , , ., :
..;, . . , . .y. . .3, i .
n ,.4 . . . ... .w-
.. . - ~-.
. ~; . ,.
- . m
.y -
m.. . m
' Assistant to V. P. T&D -k, , 3 d. . . .'
l i j' E. J. W5y f% 5. >3 _[..%.; - s he ' d ..l ;:%, % . Q. .. Q"
; Jh ' ,. . h?.
s S' . 1 Alte rnate T&D Support :.;,7'c'(.",' ,
.. i . ..N'--
M ? % 2 O ;" r S f WP " h . d' Coo rd ina tot h'E?g% N".T./ 'y . '
. A
- 3, ..,g .".:.{ , rs w.' ?q. ',
w .,.;. , w. ,, . ~< y- .e
; . ~
op g '-
-r.
. , .. - x,
. .--. .. . ..,. , , . - y /. . n, 44,.
Superintendent Electric Protection - 9., I
} Quality Assurance . ~ /. . o
'< Qy .< :.3 Jr, ;v
.p:i:..._gc.,f s p .,
. 4 =. s* . . . i. J. :, . ' O f -
; -s ., -.
.p w
a, .. s ,' %
..- ,. ;. - ..,3 .
.. e w.;, .
R. H. Moo re .. . r .- ;.,s.
- f. *4:ll$/grfy k:p< ' ' j; ~; 3 - !
( QA/QC Coordinator V Q ,2~ yAj .J , yg.~g7 7 .?y y 2.( x g w..y O . - v . : .e
~
t EP-27: R e '. . Face ! cf - VAK 'MF C r _ ; O -
}
/ Beme Phone 23rtr
k ; En:ineer-In-Charce E&E CA P. K. Pavlides Alternate OA/QC Coordinator Administration l
/ E le c t r ic Production)
G. Conover, Jr.
~
i Ma n a ge r Corporate Planning
' And Analvsis 1
J. M. Friderichs Administration and Log i s t ic s Manager Ma n a e r Rate Division R. C. Williams Alternate Administration and Log ist ic s Manager g
.anace: T&D Services J. V. Mannion I
Alternate Administration and Log ist ics Manager Manager Ar ea Deveicoment O. C. C'Brien
! Support Personnel Accomoda tions Coordina tor Suoervisor Sales Analysis
! J. J. Bevan (Tech. Se rv ice s) ?
! Alte rnate Suppor t Per sonn:ll Accomod a tions Coo rd ina tor
?
\
A O c
s-- EP-:~2 Re- - Page 6 cf C V AK ' ."_P 3 ' - l i More Phone Ce tre? { ). ( ' Ercineer-!n-Char:e Licensinc j' W. P '. . Alden
! Support Person.e; Procurement C oo rd in a to r E cineer Licensine i'
F. C. B r o wr.
; Alternate Support Personnel
! P r oc u r e men t C oo r d ina to r i
1
\
1 Manacer Purchas{nc
\'
i E. P. W in i t s k' I purchasing Coordinator I 1 l Sacerv is in c Bever R. A. Nones Alternate Purchasing Coordinator Ge ne ra l Suot. Trans. Civision j' E. L. Deld j' Transportation Coordinator i i i Suot. T;ans. Division i fi i R. T. Me lv in Alte rnate Transportation Coo rd ina tor 5 i i !
! j Ge ne r a l Supt . Office Systems
, ! a nd Commun ica t ion s i
'! B. C. Cz a r kow sk i
.I Communications Equipment 5 !I' Coo rd ina tor I
i
~
l'6 . - __
EP- ': E e '. . Face - rf ' VA'iTPC r1
/
/
O f . sore ?":ne Ce t-= fSupt. Office Systers and Corm;n: cations t C. W. A' dred Alternate Cor.runications ; i Equipment Coordinator l General Suet. Stores 01'ision fr T C. Staplef0:d Stores Civision Coordinator -3 3 i
' Suet. Store s Division E. A. Conno.
! Alte rnate Stores Division ,
j Co :d ina te: ~_ Enginee:-In-Charge Power Plant i Serv ice s S. K0walsk4
~
J. ~
, Radwaste Coordinator I
j! Supr. Engineer Power Plant Services
! A. C. Caprara Alte rna te Radwaste Coor d inator Chief Design Encineer s J. W. Siefert Engineering Design Coordinator i Assistant Chief Design Encineer
!' A. R. Lew is
!! Alterna te Enginee ring Design l Coordinator
' Engineer-In-Charge Civil Engineering n
i D. Marano
.f ! Civil Engineering Coordinator
- ~ k [ - p I - - - - -
; ..._ . . - . _m a l
D$e . .
.. .h D.'. .
Page E rf c , g . % h e'. '%. ,. a:-< - ._;
~~-
A O S i Rore F r. o e Ce trc' <. Surv Enci.eer Struct. Bran:P
- p. . g. .g...,.... ..
Altera. ate Civil Engineering C oc rd in a to r I l e l f j S u o. v . En:ineer Power Plant Certr:_ S sters B r a n.c h I w.-v.. ,. s L . F &C Cocrdinator L U r h Eng;neer Power Plant Control . i Svsters Braneb K s l W. W. 30wers
!, A l te r r.a t e I&C Coordinator i
s ; I Engineer- n-Charge Nuclear a
! and Env. Section
- i i L. 3. Pvrir l . j ' Lic ensing Coord ina tor i
w E l _ S ure r v is ine En:ineer Nuclear Branch y ; ' P. , A. 2;ederieb { = Alte r..a te L icensing Coord inator = L ' Eng inee r-In-Cha rg e Power Plan i' Desien p J. Moskowit: Systers Engineering Coo rd ina tor - Mechanical l l Sr. Engineer Power Plant De s i e n s s r T. E. Shannon Alte rnate Systems Eng ineering Coo rd ina to r - Mechanical 1 . _) - 1 -__ r r"_
- 1 '
r- t 1 E'
l EP-2': Rev. _ Page c :: - V A'n' / MP 3 r_t g g Home Phone m C e- - 3 3
\ '
Engineer-In-Cr.arge S t a t i or. Encineerin: Section J J. Ferenesik Systems Engineering Ccerdinator - Electrical Supervisin] Engineer Station Enc inee r in: Sectier J. Lees Alternate Systems Engineering Coo rd in a tor - Electrical General Sept. Construction
- 2. G. We i sh e it Construction Coordinator Asst. General Suet. Construction
. C. P. Got:is Alte rna te Con struction Coo rd ina tor Engineer-In-Charge Ind u s t r ial Section l
J. H. Long Ventilation Coordinator l Supervising Engineer-Building Facilities Branch G. M. Morley
, Alte rnate Ventilation i Coo rd ina tor
10.0 REFERENCES
None l, L____
's 4
.O k$
Ev l i La L____________________
s -s - 3840090440 EP-273 R2v. 1 ' 7 Page 1 of 4 g;' VA la PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY [ LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-273 LIMERICK STATION SUPERVISION CALL LIST 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide information for contacting Station Supervision. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The communicator shall contact Station Supervision. 3.0 APPENDICES None O 4.0 PREREQUISITES None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT None 6.0 SYMPTOMS um m a m 7.0 ACTION LEVEL - 7.1 This procedure can be used when it is necessary to contact members of Station Supervision. l j ' l .
o EP-273 Rev. 1 l Page of 4 VAW/KPG/mla b :- j f". ,.. E.0 P RE CA"T! ONS
.k^ - None 9.0 PROCEO"RI ,.
l 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 The communicator shall contact people fro the following list as required: ; s_
/ Home Kors 9.1.1.1 STATION SUPERINTENDENT:
l G. M. Leitch 9.1.1.2 ASSISTANT STATION SUPERINTENDENT: l J. F. Franz 9.1.1.3 STARTUP DIRECTOR: l J. W. Spencer l (until Startup) 7 l
\.
9.1.1.4 TECHNICAL ENGINEER: l P. J . Duc a 9.1.1.5 ENGINEER - MAINTENANCE: l J. B. Cotton . 9.1.1.6 ENGINEER - OPERATIONS : l J. Doering 9.1.1.7 SENIOR HEALTH PHYSICIST: l l R. W. Dubiel 9.1.1.8 SENIOR CHEMIST: l J. S. Wiley
}
9.1.1.9 ADMINISTRATIVE ENGINEER: l J. A. Basilio
/g
, li' . e
w - EP-27 3 Re . 1 l Page 3 of 4 VAW/VPG/ '.a
\'
i
- [' l 9.1.1.10 PERFOR.%ANCE ENGINEER: Home W0rk 1
k . L. A. Hopk ins l g V. J. Cwietniewic: 9.1.1.11 SECURITY ADMINISTRATIVE AS,SISTANT: l l P. Supplee l 9.1.1.12 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL ENGINEER: G. ~ R. Ra iney l 9.1.1.13 REACTOR ENGINEER: K. W. Hunt [ 9.1.1.14 APPLIED HEALTH. PHYSICIST: l R. J. Titolo l 9.1.1.15 HEALTH PHYSICIST - TECHNICAL SUPPORI .
. l C. W. Murphy
~.. l 9.1.1.16 ASSISTANT ENGINEER - MAINTENANCE:
Jit G. Paptzun 1 l 9.1.1.17 SUPV - CHEMIST: l J. Sabados - l 9.1.2 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT: 9.1.2.1 C. Gillespie l 9.1.2.2 R. Hampton Or 9.1.2.3 J. Monaghan l l 9.1.2.4 W. Truax l 9.1.2.5 W. Barnshaw - l 9. l'. 2. 6 E. Cosgrove - (5 i -- p\ T - - r - - e-
EP-272 Pe'.. 1 l Pace 4 of 4 (
- VAW/!!P O/r ic O
[ '
' 9.1.3 SHIFT SUPERVISORS : Home W: -
k G. Paton
!. 9.1.3.1 .
! 9.1.3.2 R. Delaney l 9.1.3.3 W. Russell
. l 9.1.3.4 R. Kennedy 9.1.3.5 W. Stanley l 9.1.3.6 M. Cory
10.0 REFERENCES
None ( e 6 e o em - k
PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY 3843010680 - ELECTRIC PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT LIMERICK GENERATING STATION fe May 14, 1984 FROM: P. J. Duca TO: G. M. Leitch
SUBJECT:
CANCELLATION MEMORANDUM FOR EP-275
Reference:
Limerick Administrative Procedure A-21 EP-275 should be cancelled because the Radiation Protection Team was eliminated from the organization. P. J. Duca 05/14/84 FROM: G. M. Leitch TO: Holders of EP Procedures @ This Cancellation Memorandum has been reviewed by PORC and is approved. All holders of EP procedures will be contacted regarding destruction of EP-275. In accordance with Administrative Procedure A-21, procedure number EP-275 vill not be re-used. c /k _ S Y APPROVED:// STATION 'SUPENINTENDENT :.
- N'*~ Y q
g3 gy MB IS
l 3840090450 l EP-276 Rev. 1 ; Page 1 of '
.. VA PG/ tic f
. _ t)
/
, PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l IP-276 FIRE AND DA.t' AGE TEAM PHONE LIST 1.0 PURPOSE '
The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and l information to call in Fire and Damage Team Members. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES l 2.1 The Fire and Damage Team Leader shall be responsible to call in group members. - l l 3.0 APPENDICES l
\ None 4.0 PREREOUISITES None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ,
6.0 SYMPTOMS None s en we 8 o t 9QQ998slIN
\-
l EP-:76 Re...: Page 2 of :
,z VA*.'/MP0 / ::
. .C ACT!ON LE'7IL 7.1 This procedure can be used when the Fire and Damage
! Team is activated or when additional personnel are needed.
~
6.0 P RECAL'TI ONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 Actions '
] 9.1.1 The Fire and Damage Team Leader shall call people from the following list until appropriate positions are filled. -]
f l 9.1.2 FIRE AND. DAMAGE TEAM LEADER: EOME WO F.i (' _ ENGINEER - MAINTENANCE (L-- l J. B. Cotton - l ASSISTANT ENGINEER - MAINTENANCt l G. Papt:un l MAINTENANCE SHIFT ASSISTANT FOREMAh l Rotating Shift Assignment Name (24 Hour Clock Time) 9.1.3 FIRE FIGHTING GROUP LEADER
-(FIRE BRIGADE LEADER)
SHIFT SUPERVISOR l Contact Control Room at , 9.1.4 FIRE FIGHTING GROUP MEMBER
" IRE BRIGADE -
- Fire Fighting Group Members,
(; e. stact Shif t Clerk in Control Room s N l I
~},y.
*'- ~ '
. l EP-276 F.e/. 1 Page 3 cf I VAW/MPO,' ::
!/- ' {}
- g.
d l 9.1.5 DAMAGE REPAIR GROUP LEADERS : l SUPERVISING ENGINEER, MAINTENANCE l R. Costagliola l SUPERVISOR, MAINTENANCE (kiternatt,
.] T. O'Mara l 9.1.6 DAMAGE REPAIR GROUP MEMBERS J. Cook J. Perkins-R. Whitbeck l D. Roller l R. Scott l R. Black
.l S. Denne tt l 9.1.7 FIRE PROTECTION ASSISTANT:
A. Mount
10.0 REFERENCES
None I e
.j P
a"x-
' i
. .. .. ___. m_ , _ . _.
. \- I 3840090460 EP-277 Rev. 4 .
' I.
- 1 Page 1 of ;
VAW MPG /mla tim 0 0lfl$ 6 PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
\ LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-277 PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM PHONE LIST 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in Personnel Safety Team Members.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES The Personnel Safety Team Leader shall be responsible to call in team members. 3.0 APPENDICES
+ .
None 4.0 PREREQUISITES None 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLED COPY 6.0 SYMPTOMS h hh h None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure can be used when the Personnel Safety l Team is activated or when additional people are ( needed. { j Y 3;. asu .gequ l s A c!O u# e a
r-
'~' , i EP-277 Ree. 1 l- Page 2 of '
J J *' VWa'/ MPG /mla
,- E.C PRECA*JTIONS
(( None 9.0 PROCEDURE
! 9.1 ACT ONS 9.1.1 The Personnel Safety Team Leader shall cal'.
people from the following list until appropriate positions are filled.
/
9.1.2 i Personnel Safety Team Leader: 1 Home Work l R.W. Dubiel l R. Titolo l 9.1.3 Plant Survey Group Leader l Home
-6 1 T. Mscis:
S. Baker ( l 9.1.3.1 Plant Survey Group Members l Health Physics Technicians listed I in 9.1.8. 9.1.4 Personnel Dosimetry, Bioassay, and Respiratory Protection Group Leader Home Work G. Murphy I (Alt.) F. Molohon 9.1.4.1 "Phrsonnel Dosimetry , Bioassay, and ed Respiratory Protection Group Members Any Health Physics Technicians listed in 9.1.8, (two required). k f
+
- - . y . - - -- , - - - - -- - - - - .w., , , --,- ,-
t
-1. EP Ree, .
1 Page 2 ef 4 f _, - VAW/ MPG /mla (-
\' '
9.1.5 ~ vehicle and Evacuee Control Group Leader
- Home Work C. Smith j l
(Alt.) J. Scone
'l 9.1.5.1 "' vehicle and Evacuee Control,. Group Members i Health Physics Technicians listed ,
I in 9.1.8. 1 I 9.1.E Vehicle Decontamination Group Members Any Health Physics Technicians listed in 9.1.8, as needed. ,,,_ i 9.1.7 ISearch and Rescue /First Aid Grou,p Leader Home Work i ' J. Krais (Alt.) R. Dickenson ,~) L-- - I 9.1.7.1 Search and Rescue /First Aid Group Members I Health Physics Technicians listed I in 9.1.8. , r I 9.1.8 Health Physics Technicians Home Work .
~~ "
l Baker, S. l Fay, D. 1 Gordon, K. 1 Gosnay, R. l Gruber, J. I Hines, D. i Parducci, A. l Assistant Technicians l Bilinski, M. I Chobot, J. I Engle, R. I Gerhart, J. , i Golden, E. l Hass, D. I Kanaskie, J. l i l Landis, B. N
' ', i
,--r , - ~ - - n - , --;,---nc - - ,, , . - , .---r - , -
r
r-
,- s - -
1 I?-277 Rev. 1 I~ Page 4 of 4 d .' , . j-. .; VAW/M?G/.T.1 a I issistant Technic'ians'(Con 'd)
'/
'l Nugent. D.
- 1. Red,'C.
t Reyes, A. I Root,.N. l Strubilla, W. ll Sveisford, S. l' 9.1.9 ' Contract Personnel l' Dailey, R.
.l Engle, M. L.
'l Gerry, M.,E.
l Mahanes, B. M. l Muscarella, J. E. i Smith, B. G. I Smith, W. I Wiecjorek, J.
10.0 REFERENCES
None 4 3 e 4 t e s a h {_ ' k
.c -
~ (
- 7. - .-
- l. -
i O L
+ .--,..,w ,,,m-r,v.,, e...,-e- ---e e-- - ~,y # , .%-- w.w.v% m,- ,-. . - - , _ , - -.yy,---,,-,,y v, y .,-r,-.- - ----.
s 1 3840090470 3 1 EP-279 Rev. 1 l Page 1 of 4
. VAW McG/res C ,, 6///
'A PEILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY
. LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE I
EP-279 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) GROUP PHONE LIST 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in the EOF Staff. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Communicator shall be responsible to call in group members as needed. 3.0 APPENDICES None 4.0 PREREOUISITES 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT COMIROW 1 $ 6.0 SYMPTOMS None 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure can be used when the EOF is activated or additional personnel are needed.
! ) )
y @] ( nial h !flb t
l s._. _ l
) e-1 EP-279 Rev. 1 Page 2 of 4 l VAW/ MPG /rgs i
- L
~ 8.C P RECAUT!ONS None
~
9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 The com=enicator shall call people f rom the l following list until appropriate positions a e filled. 9 9.1.2 Site Emergency Coordinator l W. T. Ullrich Supt. Nuc. Gen. Alt. R. H. Logue Supt. Nuc. Serv. Alt. U \ l R. S. Fleishmann II Supt. PBAPS s 9.1.3 Health Physics and Chemistry Coordina tor l W. J. Knapp - Dir. Rad. Prot. Alt. J. Fongheiser l Phys. Rad. Prot. 9.1.4 Planning and Scheduling Coordinator J. W. Spence r Startup Director J. P. Law TRB Chairman 9.1.5 Procedures Support Coordinator W. C. Birely - . l Sr. Eng. Licensing
/ l C. R. Endriss Regulatory Engineer
( pb i :
^
e eoe- se
, - g - .- , , - - , n ~ v -
1 EP- '? Re v . 1 i Page 2 cf 4 f VAW/!?G/rg: r k t
/
9.1.E Dose Assessment Team Leader G. Murphy HP Technical Support Alt. K. Taylor l Sr. Physicist Corporate l 9.1.7 EOF Mechanical-Enginecting Liaison l J. T. Robb l l C. Weide rsum 9.1.8 EOF Electrical Engineering Liaiso. l W. C. Ramer Field Engineer Alt. A. W. Jones Field Engineer 9.1.9 EOF Liaison - Corporate Communications
" ' ' M. D. McCormick Asst. Mgr. Energy Education and Information Alt. R. E. Geiger Sr. Energy Info. Rep. .
l 9.1.10 Emergency Prep. Coor. R. A. Kankus Dir. Em. Prep Alt. K. W. Schlecker Physicist Emer. Prep l Mike Mezias 9.1.11 Communicators and Status Board Keepers (5 Minimum) . K. Cenci . W. Lewis R. Degregorio J. Dixon i* J. Fitzgerald
. R. Hawthorne
! J. Ropkins M. Borton
( l MMg y .y3 , - --
r 0 i' EP-279 Et . . i Pace 4 ef : YA /E20'#II (IN / 9 i f Communicators and Status Board Keepers (Cer *" i R. Kovach Todd Moore J. Stott Scott Wagne: l, S. Weik
! 9.1.12 Data Display operators l M. McCormick 10.0 REFE RINCES ,j None l-
/
e ,
/
r e % s e
t ,-
~~~....,J . . . . .
3840090460 ! (h EP-200 Rev. 1 l Page 1 of ! p vat /?'PG/rg: il PHILADELPHIA EJCTRIC COPPANY LIMERICE GENERATING STATION E!'IRGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDUPI EP-280 TEOMNICAt EUPPORT CEt*TER PHONE LIFT 1.0 PUP 20SE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in Technical Support Center (TSC) personnel. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Emergency Director shall be responsible to have group members notified. 2.2 The Communicator shall call in TSC personnel. 3.0 APPENDICES None 4.0 PREREOUISITES None N_ g
... S ,_
None gg t4,, 1, g g . d', u l e u ica,. 4 5 a a) a j I
7 9 e ... _ . _ (i -
- (
.- j. EP-28C Re.
Page 2 cf I 1 VA%/M2"lrg: z i-7.0 ACTI O*: 'EVEL l 7.1 The procedure may be used when: l 7.1.1 The Technical Support Center is to be activated. 7.1.2 , Additional Technical Suppor t Group peop*s _
' 5 nest be-called in.
8.0 P RECAt'TI ONS None 9.0 PROCEDU RE - l 9.1 ACTIONS r 9.1.1 The Communicator shall call -people fror the following list until appropriate positions are filled.
/ .
l 9.1.2 ' EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (ONE) Home Work l Station Superintendent G. M. Leitch Assistant Station Superintendent J. F. Franz l 9 .1. 3 . TECHNICAL SUPPORT GROUP PERSONNEL (FOUR) Home Work l Technical Engineer P. J. Duc a Performance Engineer , L. A. Hopkins l - V. Cwietniewicz
~ ; '. ' I& C Engineer G. Rainey
/
t -: s W...-_._... - - _ . - _ . . - - - - . - . . . . _ - - . - - - . _ _ - - . - _ - . . . - . _ . _ . - - . - _ _ . _ _ _ - . - - - - _ _ . _ - . . _ . . _ . - - .- _ _ _ _ - _ _ . _
l T L
- w. .__- . _ . . . . -
j f EP-2EC ?.e r . '. ;
' Page 2 Of I <
\*AW/:' G :;:
A .- e Home M-- j Reactor Engineer j K. Hunt I - K. Kemper { - E. Callan
-J. Armstrong l
]
- M. Gallagher R. Ale jnikov l
l
-J. Muntz l ,
- R. Cyhan l
- B. Mandik i' l 9 .1. 4 PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM LEADER (ONE)
(- Home Wor > l Sr. Health Physicist R. W. Dubiel - Applied Health Physicist R. J._Titolo l 9.1.5 FIRE and DAMAGE TEAM LEADER (ONE) Home Wori-l Engineer - Maintenance J. Cotton l G. Paptzun
- s A, _ , , .
i
1 - . _u- -- :-- -
; (. .
'9
~ j.
EP-280 Rev. '.
~~
Page 4 of i VAW/P?O/rg-(' 2 f 9.1.E SECURITY TEAM. LEADER (1) Home We r t-Security Administrative Assistant j P. Supplee l Security Coordinator O. Burwell Site Captain - Operations Security
'(Protected Area)
D. Ross - l 9.1.7 DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM LEADER (ONE) Home Wert l Health Physicist G. Murphy Alt. Sr. Physicist Corp. - K. Taylor - 9.1.8 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM LEADER (ONE) Home Work l Sr. Chemist
' J. S. Wiley Supervisory Chemist ~
J. Sabados > \; 9.1.9 COMMUNICATORS AND STATUS BOARD KEEPERS (FIVE MINIMUM) , l Lead Communicators Home Work l l
<D. Feaster .
W. Winters l ! g
4 ^\
.i EP-280 Rev. .
- 1. Page 5 of E vat:/t"? 3/r c:
I r Brown I l M. Davis l J. Dolan M. Eyre G. Butchinson
! J. Kanute l
D. Kelsey l L. Marabella K. Mastrangelo
~
l T.-Moore (Tim) i l D. Shaner , ( l' T. Shea l J. Tyler l K. Walsh - l R. Weidner
~'
l 9.1.10 DATA DISPLAY OPERATOR (TWO) Home Werk l l (ERFDS) E. Kabak - - p
10.0 REFERENCES
None
-- , , - - ,~, , , _ , , . - , - - - - .- # ,, , - _ , ' - ~ , . - , - --
s . .. .
- e. - _ -. . .. . . . - . . :. . .... .. . .
e. 3840090490 EP-2e2 Res. 1
! Page 1 of 5 1 6
VA 92 ! PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMEN"'ING PROCEDURE EP-282 G_ iVERNMEN"' AND EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCIES 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to supply pertinent I information to government and emergency management agencies. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The (Interim) Emergency Director or the Site Emergency Ccordinator shall be responsible for the decision to impicment this procedure. l 2.2 The Communicator shall be responsible to notify the
} required agencies.
3.0 APPENDICES tiene 4.0 PREPIOUISITES None T,F CBm
.0 SPEcI AL __
None ggpy, Y 6.0 SYMPTOMS \
. None C
(O s r PT5 P f pd,gm/aktli'Mi jff
l 1
~
j p. EP-252 Re*i. ~. [ -l
?
Page 2 cf 5 VAW/MPC/rg: A^ 4 7 '. C ' ACT! ON LE**'EL l 7.1 This procedure may be used -when a government or emergency management agency must be contacted. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS 9 .1.1 The Communicator shall be directed to contact appropriate agencies by the Emergency Directer or Site Emergency Coordinator using the following list. -
./ Phone
' Add re ss
/'
~"
9.1.2 U. S. Nuclear Region I Regulatory 631 Park Ave.
- l. Com=ission King of Prussia, PA 19406 9.1.2.1 Office of -
Inspection
) and Enforcement l
Region 1 631 Park Avenue King of Prussia, PA 19406 9.1.2.2 office of Washington, Nuclear Reactor DC 20555 Regulation Barold Denton (Director) . 9.1.3 Dept. o f Ene rgy Brookhaven Radiological Nat. Lab , Program Upton, NY 11973 .
- I y 7 , , ..~ _. _ _ _ ., ._ , _ . . . . . . .
l . i~ _. _ . _ _ - -- . . y- ' EP-2E Re.. '. 3 l Page 3 of E l ' VAU/ MPG /::* 2 f / f Address Phene
~~~
j 9 .1. 4 - Environmental Ctetis Building Protection 6th & Walnut Sts. Agency Ph ilade lphi,a , PA 19106 9.1.5 Department of Governors Island Transpor ta tion New York, NY 3rd U.S. Coast 10004 Guard District l 9,.l.6 Department of Dept of Agriculture Agriculture Chief, Division Bureau of Food of Milk & Chemistry
-- Sanitation 2301 N. Cameron St Harrisburg, PA I
[ ~ l W. Fouse 17110-9408 9.1.7 Department of . Energy Rep. 9.1.8 Pennsylvania Room B-151 Emergency Transportation - Management And Safety Bld5 (P.O. Box 332 1-17105) Duty Officer Harrisburg, Pa 17120 l 9.1.9 Department of Harrisburg, PA Environmental Resources 9.1.9.1 Office of Room B-102 l Public Transportation Information & Safety Bldg. Barrisburg, PA Ellen Sprinkle 17120 , Director Harrisburg, PA
, l d
( 9.1.9.2 Regional Office 1875 New Hope Norristown, PA
^
\ ' ,,s l
1
EP-2E2 Re't. . (' I Page 4 of 5
~j VAW/ MPG /rgs Address Phone 9.1.10 Bureau of P.O. Box 2062 Rad iation Harrisburg, PA Protection, 17120 ,
l Dept. of 1 Env. Resources l i 9.1.10.1 Personnel & Home Phones T. Gerusky W. Dornsife M. Reilley D. Mcdonald 9.1.11 Pennsylvania 21. S . B ro wn S t . State Health P.O. Box 1012 Center Lewistown, PA
^ 17044 9.1.12 State Police Rt. 422 &
Barracks Lewis Rd. (Limerick) Limerick, PA 9.1.13 Delaware Civil State Police & Defense Agency Civil Defense . Emergency Management Section 9.1.14 New Jersey P.O. Box 7068 Civil Defense West Trenton Agency N.J., 08625 9.1.15 Maryland Civil Sudbrook Lane Defense Agency Reisterstown Rd.
.Pikesville, MD 21208 9.1.16 Montgomery 100 Wilson Blvd.
County Dept. Eagleville, PA 3 of Emergency 19403 Services i y ( l 9.1.17 Che ster County Dept. of Emergency 14 E. Biddle St. - West Chester, PA , 19380
.('- Services s
l _ , , - .-- m.,,: _ - . , -,, -_,y--
, _. -g-%4 s, c.-- --
y , , . ~ -. __ _ . . . . , sq. n. r- . .
- 1 s ne' , y . .
s' i m-
^~ -.. ...
p .:. , . A F - h1 EP-2E2 Rec.,-; i } (C ' 1 .. ct' : .-. Page :. c. :-
' ;1
- VAW/P.?G/:gs I- ,-
t,' \ '- 2. c.. ' i Address Phone 1 9.1.18 Berks County.' ' Agricultural Dept. ' o f Center, p:
' Emergency RD-1 .
- Services Lee spor t, - PA
> [ 19533 . 1 C '. O R??. ?D. -.TN*.?S - T None i-e a r J
*.- *s 9
8
- e
, . W r '. i l l. h [ o I e-T-'
- a. .
y
. .[, ') ' %. -
y ' ,. f ___i_.__.__E_-_.___m.'.____ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ . - _ _ . _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _z ____.__.._.___________.______.__.______________.__..____m___..______ _ - ---
\~
s s 1 3840090510 EP-284 Rev. 1 Page 1 of 4
~
VAh 95 g'{ PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-284 COMPANY CONSULTAN"S AND CONTRACTORS 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide information to l contt t PECo consultants and contractors. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Communicator shall be responsible to contact contractor or consultants as their services are need ed . K ( ie 3.0 APPENDICES None 4.0 PREREOUISITES None 5.0 SPECI AL EQUIPMENT
. None
- h 6.0 SYMPTOMS None i
( l 7.0 ACTION LEVEL n l 7.1 This a smy
%s{ rgCm4yIFe ubi4id wffe MttisIn 3
d cont pet.) nuhtanti?o.jconfra r. o[/ 59 s ;; 2 -V i va N g b par U 3g!)b$ ia { { 9 L
J. -. .s. EP-284 Rev. 1 (~ - [ Page 2 of 4 VAU/t'?O/rg: f
~., k 8.0 P PICAUTI C!!S 8.1 Requests for consultants or contractors shall be approved by the Site Emergency Coordinator or Emergency Director. .
9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 Actions 9 .1.1 The Communicator shall contact the needed contractor or consultant by using the following list. Address Phone 9.1.2 Chemistry Contractor (Later) 9.1.3 Health Physics Contractor (s) (Later) 9.1.4 General Electric Nuclear Energy
,g- Business (24 hour
- Company, Emergency Operations emergency Suppor t Program Services Division number) 175 Curtner Ave.
San Jose, CA
'95125 Working Hours:
Manager of BWR " Product Service Off Bours: Answe r ing Service for immediate call back from GE 9.1.5 Underwater 2735 Buren Ave. Technics, Inc. Camden, NJ 08105 (24 hour emergenc:a numbers) Mr. D. R. Stith . u Mr. R. T. Ba nnon ( k.'i
_n,., , A t.
- (" 'I EP-284 Rev. 1 Page 3 of 4 p
VA~<;/ MPG /:g s Address Phone i L 9.1.6 Radiation 3508 Market St. f ! Management Philadelphia, PA Corporation 19104 . Suite 400 I Science Ctr.
- Bldg. 2 i
(Dr. Roger E. Linneman) 9.1.7 Yoh, Inc. On Site - l (Security l Services) also: 828 cak St. Royersford, PA I 19468 also: 1600 Market St. Philadelphia, PA ! 19103 l. l 9.1.8 Institute of 1100 Circle
','. , Nuclear Power 75 Parkway Operations Suite 1500 (INPO) Atlanta, GA 30339 -
[ ) 9.1.9 Babcock and - Wilcox , Lynchburg Research Ctr. l l l l l ~ . I 9.1.10 Bechtel Power ! Corporation ,' , I < (?' J r .. t-
~
r- _ ~ is' e l. t 4
}
EP-284 Rev. 1 Page 4 of 4 VAW/M?O/rg: y/ - Address Phont 9.1.11 - Pooled Inventerv Manacettent (PIMS) Program Manager , - - Bruce McClintic l (Telecopier! (home) Alternate Jim G. Hogue (Telecopier) off hours (home) Alternate l Milind Korde i(work) 10.0 REFE RENCES None 7'
.,e 4
D f g (- )
g'. . 3840090520 ,.- ,E7, .s,. a ( l . Pace 1 cf 4 O VAO!y0/:g: PHILADELPEIA ELEC"RIC CO"PANY c/th LIMERICK GEN RATING STATION
, E!ZRGENCY PLAN I!GLE!TNTING PROCEDUPI EP-227 NEAP 2? PUBLIC AND INDUSTRI AL USERS OF DOFNSTPIA!! WATER 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide information to contact downstream users of the Schuylkill River.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resource: shall be responsible for the notification of the downstream domestic water users, unless specifically delegated to PECO. i 2.2 The (Interim) Emergency Director or Site Emergency
' Coordinator shall direct the implementation of this procedure.
2.3 The Communicator, when directed by the (Interim) Emergency Director or Site Emergency Coordinator, shall be responsible to contact the downstream users. 3.0 APPENDICES None 4.0 PREREQUISITES l 4.1 EP-312, Radioactive Liquid Releas h mpleted. 4.2 The Pennsylvania Depar f ronmental Resourcer has concurred with the cation of the downstrear domestic water users by ECO. o 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT -a O r
.J 4
f EP-287, Rev. 1 Page 2 of 4 VAU/MP 3,' r g r C.0 FY!!PTDME Cone 7.0 ACT!DN LEVEL T.1 This procedure can be used when there has been a relea'se to the Schuylkill River. 8.0 PnrCAUTIONS I 8.1 Ensure that the Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resources has concurred with notification of downstream water users by PECO. 8.2 Ensure that the (Interim) Emergency Director or Site Emergency Coordinator has directed implementation of this procedure. sv I l (_j Y- \ 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 Actions 9.1.1 The Communicator shall contact the downstream users using the following list and inform each of the information, listed below 9.1.1.1 That there has been a radioactive liquid release into the river. 9.1.1.2 Estimated Transit Time to their intake (for water companies only). 9 .1.1. 3 Suggest that they clope their intake until h further notice. ESTIMATED TRANSIT TIME FOR WATER COMPANIES CAN BE OBTAINED FROM EP-312, RADIOACTIVE LIQUID RELEASE. i (
m __. .
.)' .-.. .. .-.
~.
~
.- [ :
a EP-257, Re c .
- Page 3 of 4 VAW/ MPG /:g:
./
( ~ 9.1.2 Downstream Users
}
9.1.2.1 Citizens Utility.Home Water Co. 9.1.2.2 Philadelphia Electric Co. Cromby Generating Station s. 9.1.2.3 Philada1nkia Suburban Water Co. ' (Office) after 5 pm (Plan t) 9.1.2.4 Phoenixville Water Authority 9.1.2.5 Lukens Steel Co.
.. Day j24 hrs.
9.1.2.6 Phoenix Steel Corp. W Phoenixville Plant , 9.1.2.7 Svnthane - Taylor Corp. 9.1.2.8 Nicolet Industries, Inc.
-*
- i = & wn P lan t -
t. 9.1.2.9 Keystone Water Co., (Norristown District)* O 9.1.2.10 City of Philadelphia, Queen Lane Plant . 9.1.2.11 City of Philadelphia Belmont Plant . 9.1.2.12 Container Corp. of America whiladelohia Plant, Mill Dr.
. ~ . . .
9.1.2.13 Connelly Container, Inc. Philadelohia Plant g .. .. ( e
e , s
\
1 '
! EP-267, Rev. .
Page 4 of
' VAW/ MPG /:gt k
l 9.2 Follow-Up i 9.2.1 The Communicator shall: 9.2.1.1 When the (Interim) Emergency Director or Site Emergency Coordinato'r and Pennsi1 var.it Department of Environmental Resources have determined that the concentration of radioactive material in the river is at c: below acceptable levels, contact the downstream users and inform them of this information.
10.0 REFERENCES
l 10.1 EP-312 Radioactive Liquid Release. f O 1
-~ - ..a._..
he
- ks.
EP-291 Rev. 1 I 3840090530 Page 1 of f VAW MPG /r.lE I #g
/
( ' PEILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE l EP-291 STATTING AUGMENTATION 1.0 P"RPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines anf 1 information necessary to perform staff augmentation. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The shif t clerk or other assigned person shall perforr the follow!.ng procedure. 3.0 APPENDICES None 4.0 PREREQUISITES None l 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT pe e 6.0 SYMPTOMS Hone ,
, 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented at an Alert, a Site l Emergency or a General Emergency.
O , j 1
~
. . . --. -a . .._
-).
a ' EP-291 Rev. - l
- Page 2 ef i VAW/tiPG/t: a (fs s kl (,
6.0 PRECAUTIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE l 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 The Shif t Clerk or other assigned person shall: 9.1.1.1 Ask the (Interim) Emergency Director if the TSC and EOF or the TSC only is to be activated so this information can be given to the Dose Assessment Team Leader and Communicators. 9.1.1.2 Contact in sequence the personnel listed in Section 9.1.2. 9.1.1.3 Inform each person contacted of the event classification and that they are to respond
= i- l to their assigned location. If the person is unable to respond, go,.to the next person on the list.
9.1.1.4 Attempt to contact personnel who have pagers, by that method if they are known to be "on the page", or the phone is busy or there is no answer. l 9.1.1.5 Inform (Interim) Emergency Director of results including discrepancies. 9.1.2 Personnel to be contacted ares l 9.1.2.1 SHIFT IEC TECHNICIAN Communicator shall request that the TSC be activated. (Shift IEC Technician ext. 2470 o: 2471) I&C Technician Time By (O
f .
* . . - . a. . _ . _ _ . _ _ _ _ . . . _ . . . . _ . . _ . _ _ . . _
-' e ,
I EP-291 Rev. : Page 2 cf : VAW/ MPG /r.1 Q l 9.1.2.2 EMERGENCY DIRECTOR The Station Superintendent or Assistant Static . Superintendent is contacted by communicato: and it one contact. Do not re-contact
- if he has been successfully reached. .
Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called E*. Station Supt. 876-3547 G . 11. Leitch or 2000 Asst. Station Supt. 323-0127 J. F. Franz or 2001 l 9.1.2.3 OPERATIONS ENGINEER Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called Ev N Operations Eng. 495-7415 J. Doering or 2100 l J. Armstrong 323-6536 l 9.1.2.4 PERSONNEL SAFETY TEAM LEADER (ONE) Communicator shall request call in of Personnel Safety Team Members. Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called Ev Senior Health 717-653-2205 Physicist or 2200 R. W. Dubiel Applied HP 296-7855 R. Titolo or 2299 . i (j::) !
{ c EP-291 Rev. 1 l Page 4 cf C
- VAW/f'P *i/r; t.
l f,
/ s N] \
! 9.1.2.5 DOSE ASSESSMLNT TEAM LEADER (ONE)
Communicator shall request to call in tear, and :: report to the TSC or EOF as determined by Ste-9 .1.1.1. Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called E-Technical Support 687-2857 Health Physicist' or 2210 C. Murphy Sr.' Physicist Corp. 1-367-5495 K. H. Taylor or 2290 l 9.1.2.6 SHIFT MAINTENANCE SUB-FOREMAN Extension 2395 or page. Communicator shall request the Maintenance Sub-forenan to call three maintenance mechanics, preferably, one electriciar I and two machinists or fitters. Sub-foreman Time By [ 9.1.2.7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT PERSONNEL (ONE) l Communicator shall request call in of Technical Suppor t Group Members. , Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called By Technical Engineer 449-3638 P. J. Duca or 2400 Performance Engineer 436-0873 L. A. Hopkins or 2410 l v. Cwietniewicz 666-7322 I&C Engineer 485-6902
- G. R. Rainey or 2460 Reactor Engineer 367-7862 K. W. Hunt or 2480
{ N.] t
r 1 EP-291 Fe'..
, t
' Page ~ ef t VAU/!'.? O :- 1 e
l ( l 9.1.2.8 COMMUNICATORS (ONE) Communicator shall request call in of members f : ) the TSC or EOF as determined by Step 9.1.1.1. Disposition-Busy, ) Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called P 1 Technical Support Center (TSC) Communicator D. Feaster 327-1638 or 2415 Alternate W. Winters 327-2338 or 2413 l Ecr Communicator K. Cenci 674-5925 or 2413
~
Alternate W. Lewis 659-6661 or 2412 l 9.1.2.9 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING and ANALYSIS TEAM LEACEF. (ONE) 1 Communicator shall request call in or Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Members. . Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted called By Sr. Chemist 647-3393
! J. S. Wiley or 2292 Surv.-Chemist 323-1246 J. Sabados or 2293 v
l EP-29; Rev. ; i Page t ci i (~ VAK/MP /.;- I . 9.1.2.10 FIRE AND DAMAGE TEAM LEADER (ONE) l Conmunicator shall request call in of Fire and Damage Team Members. Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called ?. 1 Engineer Maintenance 584-9261 J. E. Cotton or 2300 G. Papt=un 646-8260 l (or 327-0383) or 2301 l 9.1.2.11 SECURITY TEAM LEADER (ONE) Disposition-Busy, Time Called No Ans.-Contacted Called B. Security 486-0646 l Administrative or 2070 Assistant P. Supplee (O' Security Coordinator 609-877-4403 *
- 0. Burwell or 2017 Site Captain 948-8792 (Protected. Area) or 2015 D. Ross
10.0 REFERENCES
l 10.1 NUREG 0654 Criteria for Preparation and Evaluation of Rev. 1 Radiological Emergency Response Plans and Preparedness in Support of Nuclear Power Plants e
/h s
l < l
' ? -
l 1 ;Y 3840090540 l EP-292 Rev. 1 Page 1 of 2 l VAW/r.la 11 j PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION ; EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-292 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM PHONE LIST 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information for notification of the Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Team Leader shall be responsible to call team members.
- t. 3.0 APPENDICES T None 4.0 PREREQUISITES
~
None f 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT I None 6.0 SYMPTOMS gg M None l 7.0 ACTION LEVEL - l This procedure can be used when the Chemistry Sampling and i Analysis Team is activated or when additional personnel are \o i d. , m; j ,i U
,u ea(p r,g n1nq '4, p; q .
E [,'/ ^) M k [rl 6 11d ' j , ; u O{ c l f!3 J i l
m% _ ,
.y-i>
' EP-292 Rev. 1
( Page 2 cf : t VAW/mla E.0 PRECA"TIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE- [ 9.1 ACTIONS 9.1.1 The Chemistry Sampling and Analysis Tea-Leader shall call in people from the
- following list until appropriate positions are filled, t
/
l 9.1.1.1 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TEAM LEADER Home Work l , J. S. Wiley J. W. Sabados T. J. Yednock 9.1.1.2 CHEMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP
" LEADER (One) g<. Rome Work i ~ ~
l J. W. Sabados T. J. Yednock D. S. Musselman J. C. Effinger l 9.1.1.3 CREMISTRY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS GROUP ME!2EFS Bome Work l E. W. Frick J. C. Effinger M. Wyzalek M. Reller W. Decker T. Williams R. Ullrich
10.0 REFERENCES
None J
,,s 3840090550 EP_2,4 ne.... -
Page 1 of 2 (^. VAW/tiPG/::: f% l PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LI!1ERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EP-294 DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM PHONE LIST 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines and information to call in the Dose Assessment Team. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The Dose Assessment Team Leader shall be responsible to call in team members. I 3.0 APPENDICES None 4.0 PREREQUISITES ,- None - 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT None 6.0 SYMPTOMS # # None - ( 7.0 ACTION LEVEL 7.1 This procedure can be used when the Dose Assesquiiin,t Teamistobeactivatedoradditi.,ogappgld needed. G, p G g, 0 pf y a+$gi )e 7]Q'r}\,.1d
" ~ - - - - - - - > - -- ' EP-294 F e '. . 1 i Page 2 of 2 l VAE/"? 3 / r g
(- . s E.C PRICA"T:oNS , None 9.0 PROCEDURI l 9.1 Actions 9.1.1 The Dose Assessment Team Leader shall call people f rom the following list until appropriate positions are filled. l 9 .'1. 2 DOSE ASSESSMENT TEAM LEADER (ONE) I l 9.1.2.1 Name Home Phone Work Phone l Gary Murphy (ll.P. Tech Support) Ken Taylor
(SR. Corporate Physicist)
Alternate K. Eldridge (HP Radwaste) Alternate D. M. Rombold (Physicist) 9.1.3 DOSE ASSESSMENT GROUP MEMBERS (3 MINIMUM) 9.1.3.1 Name Home Phone Work Phone l T. Molohon L. Wells K. Eldridge D. M. Rombold M. J. McGuinn M. Christinziano .
-( C. Betrick L _
s
\
_ ~= .:-
' ~
l' l* I EP-294 M 't . Page 3 o* 2 VAW/P.? 3/ r; r
\
9.1.4 FIELD SURVEY GROUP
'9.1.4.1 Tleid Survey Group Leader (One) a i e ,
l Name Mome Phone .. Work Phone Steve ' aylor Alternate
, Rober t Leddy 9.1.4.2 rield survey Group Members:
A. Wealth _._ Physics Personnel Name _Bose Phone Work Phone ( R. Dailey M. L. Engle i D. Fay M. E. Gerry [ K. Gordon ' R. Cosnay J. Gruber D. Eines
'{c. B. M. Mahanes !
J. E. Muncarella B. G. Smith W. Smith J. Wiecjorek A. Parducci S. Baker ',, i B. Drivers Drivers Available by Calling Name _Beme Phone _ Work Phone R. Wiegle L. Perkoski W , 10.0 PJrtPl'HCES , None s t ..
!** w 4pe. ese e, as se e se a e
I 3840090560 "" P$$ $*U 5 VAU G/rg: ( M s PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY LIMERICK GENERATING STATION EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDUPI EP-304 PARTIAL PLA!r EVACUATION 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this procedure is to define the actions to be performed in the event that a partial plant evacuation is l' required. 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 Personnel in affected areas requiring evacuation shall evacuate the area and notify the control room. l 2.2 The (Interim) Emergency Director shall direct the
, partial plant evacuation by performing the appropriate steps in this procedure.
3.0 APPENDICES None 4.0 PREREOUISITES 5.0 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT cm 1 jfi ti r' P .>
, f.. q % _ -
3 hk B o .s Ai s k" l f.ed D- /
\
- - . - ,- , , - - -..-~,.,.--,-.-.,n - - - - -
=
'. l
. , l 1 i l
. l EP-304 Rev. 1 Pace 2 of 4
, VAU/ MPG /rgs E.0 SYMPTOMS 6.1 An increase in the area radiation monitors or continuous air monitor indications to greater than l alarm levels in two or more large operating areas. j E.2 Radiation levels greater than 100 mR/hr within two or more large operating areas which normally experience less than 10 mR/hr. I l
6.3 Airborne radioactivity greater than 3NE uCi/cc for er unidentified isotope, (except for noble gas activity) or 10 MPC for identified isotopes in restricted areas in two or more large operating areas. 6.4 Release, leakage or spill of a toxic reagent such that the concentration of chemical vapors makes the areas ; uninhabitable in two or more large operating areas. j 1 6.5 Other hazards such as flood or fire af fecting two or ; more large operating areas ! l 7.0 ACTION LEVEL This procedure shall be implemented by the (Interim) ! Emergency Director when the symptoms of section 6.0 of this ; procedure occur. Two or more large operating areas is ' defined as two or more elevations in a single enclosure or one elevation in two or more enclosures. 8.0 PRECAUTIONS None 9.0 PROCEDURE , 1 l 9.1 Actions 9 . * .1
. Personnel in the affected area not directly involved in controlling the hazard shall evacuate to a safe area. Notify the control room of the type and location of the hazard.
( 1 (m#%>
r . i
- I EP-304 P.e c . 1
? age 3 of 4 VAi:/MPC-/ r g
(. 9.1.2 The (Interim) Emergency Director or Shift Supervision shall: 9.1.2.1 Upon receiving information fro personnel in the field about a harardous condition or
- f rom Control Room indications, evacuate the affected areas by making the following announcement:
"This (is) (is not) a drill. This (is) (is not) a drill. This is a Partial Plant Evacuation .- Evacuate (locations of harard) and assemble at (location of assembly area) .
All Other Personnel Leave The Protected Area. This (is)}}